acdsee 21

Transcript

1 Photo Studio Standard 2018

2 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Contents CHAPTER STARTED 14 1: GETTING ACDSee to Studio Standard 2018 14 Welcome Photo the ACDSee User About 14 Interface Manage 14 Mode Mode Photos 15 Mode 15 View Edit 15 Mode 365 Mode 15 Dashboard Mode 15 Switching Modes ACDSee 16 in Manage Mode Using 16 About the Manage Mode Panes 16 Manage Mode Drop- Down Menus 17 Working Manage Mode Panes 18 with Moving Panes 18 Docking Panes 18 Stacking Panes 19 Resizing Panes 19 Layout the Resetting 19 Using Photos 19 Mode Images Viewing 20 Cataloging 20 View Mode 21 Using Images in Full Screen Mode 21 Viewing Using the View Mode Panes 22 Using Bottom Toolbar 22 the Using Windows Touch Gestures™ with View Mode 23 to Switching Manage Mode 23 Using Edit 24 Mode 365 24 Using Mode Images 24 Uploading Using Mode 25 Dashboard Cataloging Files 25 Dashboard Mode 25 CHAPTER GETTING HELP 26 2: Using the Quick Start Guide 26 Finding Other Resources and Support 26 MANAGE 28 MODE 3: CHAPTER of Page 2 334

3 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Files with 28 Importing ACDSee Using Importing AutoPlay Dialog Box 28 the Files Windows Specific Types of Devices 28 Importing from Files 29 Devices About Removable From a Importing 29 Photos Device Photos a Scanner 33 Importing From From or CD Photos DVD 34 Importing a From a Disk 34 Importing Photos a Renaming Creating 34 Template Importing Lightroom® Database 36 a with Images Mobile 37 Working on Using to from Images Mobile Device ACDSee ACDSee Mobile Sync 38 Sending Your Started 39 Getting Images and Videos 39 Sending Files the File List Pane 39 Browsing in the Using List Pane 39 File Changing Overlay Icon Visibility 42 File the 42 Pane Maximizing List Browsing Using Pane 42 the Folders Folders Multiple Selecting 42 Managing Folders 43 Creating and By Date or Event 43 Browsing Files Descriptions and Events in Adding View 44 Thumbnails Browsing Favorite Files 45 Your the Pane 45 Accessing Shortcuts a Shortcut Creating 45 Creating a New Folder 45 Deleting a Shortcut or Folder 46 Using the Catalog Pane 46 Easy- Select 46 Bars ACDSee 46 The Database Changing Views 46 the Details Customizing 47 View Filtering Files 47 Grouping Files 48 Navigating Through Groups in the File List 48 Removing from the File List 49 Groups Selecting Files in One or More Groups 49 Sorting Files 49 Headers Column 50 Using Sorting Files of Page 3 334

4 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Sorting Files Custom 50 50 Files Selecting Previewing Images 51 The Information Palette 51 Images 52 Rotating Comparing Images 53 Images 55 the Image Basket Gathering in Cataloging Managing Files in ACDSee 55 and Organizing with the Catalog Pane 56 Categories 56 56 Keywords 56 Ratings Color Labels 56 Categories Auto 56 Saved Searches 57 Special Items 57 The ACDSee Database and Embedded Data 57 Easy- Bars 58 Select Match All Match Any 58 Creating Categories 59 Manage Categories 59 60 Sets Category Access Create Easy- 60 Assigning Categories and Ratings Searching and Quickly Assign Ratings 60 Assign and Search Categories and Ratings in the Catalog Pane 61 Assign and Ratings in the Properties Pane 62 Categories Remove Categories or Ratings from Files 62 Assigning Color Labels 63 Color Create a Label 63 Set Assign Color 63 Labels Images 65 to a Label Search Assigned Removing Labels and Color Label Sets 65 Color Creating Collections 66 Collections 68 Sets Smart Collections 68 Using the Properties Pane 69 Properties Pane Areas 70 Metadata Tab 70 70 Organize Tab 70 Tab File of Page 4 334

5 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio ACDSee Metadata Files 71 Embedding into Map Pane Using the 71 Pane to Map Your Workflow 72 the Using Further Assigning Hierarchical Keywords 73 Creating and Keywords 73 Creating 74 Managing Keywords Quick Keywords 74 Creating Moving Files Copying and 74 Images to the Clipboard 75 Copying Files and Folders Pasting 76 Replacing Overwriting Files 76 or a File Folder 76 Renaming or in Files Folders 77 Storing Private Tagging Images 78 Metadata Views and Presets 79 Manage ACDSee Metadata to Multiple Files 80 Adding IPTC Categories from Auto Removing 81 Keywords the Changing and Time Properties of Images 82 Date Computer Another to Up Backing 83 Your Files Updating or a Synchronization 84 Deleting a Synchronization 84 Running Saved with ACDSee Searching 84 Using the Quick Search Bar 85 Using the Search Pane 86 Search Areas 86 Pane Properties Area 87 Searching with File Name Patterns 88 Using Selective Browsing 88 Setting Selective Browsing Criteria 88 Selective Tips for Browsing 89 Hiding the Browsing Panel 89 Selective with Categories Searching 89 Auto Identifying Used Search Categories 90 Commonly Refining Your Auto Categories Search 90 Finding Files 91 Duplicate Finding Images Quickly 91 Sharing Files with ACDSee 92 Taking a Screen Capture 92 Emailing Images 93 365 Using ACDSee 94 Share / Email of Page 5 334

6 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a Desktop 94 Creating Screensaver Configuring Slideshow 96 and a Viewing and Screensavers Sharing Slideshows 98 a Desktop Slideshow 99 Creating the ACDSee Showroom Using Controls 99 Slideshow Creating PDF 100 a a Presentation 101 Creating PowerPoint a CD or Burning 101 DVD Creating an HTML Album 102 Uploading Images to Photo Websites 104 Uploading Images Facebook 104 to Images Facebook 104 Uploading to Errors Troubleshooting 105 Creating a Contact Sheet 105 Creating Archives of Your Files 106 Extracting (.zip) Files 107 Archived Printing Images 108 Setting Printer Options 108 109 Setting Size and Positioning Image Adding Text to Pages 110 Options Printing Sheet 111 Setting Contact About Batch 111 Editing Multiple to Another File Format 111 Converting Images or Flipping Rotating Images 112 Multiple Setting Rotated and Flipped File Options 113 Resizing Multiple Images 114 Adjusting For Multiple Images 115 Exposure Adjusting Batch Exposure Options 116 Renaming Multiple Files 117 About the ACDSee Database 119 in Embedding ACDSee Metadata Files 120 The Embed Flag 121 Pending Files 121 Have Data to Embed Viewing That Retrieving Metadata That is Embedded in Files 121 ACDSee Excluding Folders From the Database 122 Cataloging Files the Database 122 in the ACDSee Indexer 122 About Creating and Switching Between Multiple Databases 123 Converting an Older Database 124 Database 124 Information Importing of Page 6 334

7 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard File Information Other Sources 125 Importing From Discs Photo Importing 125 125 Importing Albums Descript.ion Files 125 Working with Database Exporting 126 Information Generating Lists 126 File Up Database 127 Backing Your Backup Tips Database Strategies 127 and Backup Schedule 128 Backup 128 Location Backup 128 Size Database Backup Tips and Strategies 128 Schedule 128 Backup Location 128 Backup Backup Size 129 Information Database From Restoring a Backup 129 Maintaining Database 129 the Optimizing the Database 130 Mapping Drives For an Incoming Database 130 130 Rebuilding Thumbnails and Metadata Quarantined 131 Files Working ins 131 Plug- with Types of Plug- ins 131 Plug- ins 131 Managing a Plug- in Disabling 132 Changing the Plug- in Order 132 Getting Viewing in Properties and Plug- Help 132 ACDSee SeeDrive™ 132 133 Managing Your ACDSee 365 Files with SeeDrive™ Uploading 134 Downloading 134 Making Folders Private or Public 134 Sharing and Downloading with ACDSee SeeDrive™ 135 Sharing a Folder with ACDSee SeeDrive™ 135 Sharing Your Folders by Copying and Pasting its URL Using ACDSee SeeDrive™ 136 CHAPTER 4: PHOTOS MODE 138 Using Photos Mode 138 138 Images Viewing 139 Cataloging of Page 7 334

8 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 5: VIEW 140 CHAPTER MODE Images Previewing Lens 140 with Your Auto 140 EQ™ Light Rotating 141 Images Using the Histogram 141 with Auto Advance Viewing Images 141 Text Images in View Mode 142 Displaying on Image 143 Hiding Text Selecting Part of an Image 143 File Properties in View Viewing 143 Mode Viewing Using Brush Files 144 and Video and Files 144 Playing Audio Audio Video Playing Files 144 and Automatically Toolbar 145 Media The Video Frames as Saving 145 Images Adding Editing Image Audio 145 or Audio an Recording Image 146 to Printing in View Mode 147 Images 148 Wallpaper Desktop the Setting an Image as Synchronizing View to a Folder 148 Mode Offline 149 Viewing Images Photo Discs Rebinding 149 Using ACDSee Quick View 150 Using Windows Touch Gestures™ with Quick View 151 Viewing in Another Application 151 Images Showing Originals 152 Committing Changes 152 Zooming an Image 152 Setting the Zoom Level 153 Automatically or Shrinking Enlarging Images 153 Using the to View Select Areas of an Image 155 Navigator a Magnified Image 155 Panning Using Pan Lock 155 Magnifying Specific Areas of an Image 155 CHAPTER EDIT MODE 157 6: Using Edit Mode 157 Editing an Image 157 Reverting to Original Settings 157 158 Controls Viewing Image Histogram and of Page 8 334

9 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Presets in 158 Using Edit Undo/Redo Using Button the 159 159 Restoring Originals Using 160 the Edit Brush 160 Brush Edit Gradient Using 161 the Tool the Gradient Tool 162 Using Radial Blend and Opacity 163 Using Modes Opacity 163 Modes 164 Blend Images in Edit Mode 166 Saving Images 166 Saving 167 Using Selections Tools 167 Selection The Selection Tools 167 Using the the Tools 170 Combining Applying Edits Effects to Selections 170 or Red 171 Reducing Eye Flaws 172 Removing Text to an Image 173 Adding to Drawings 175 Image Adding Your Adding Borders 177 Your Textures or Edges 181 Adding Own Textures 181 Edges 181 Adding a Vignette 182 Adding a Tilt- Shift Effect 184 About Effect Filters 185 Special Applying a Bathroom Window Effect 185 Applying a Blinds Effect 186 Steel Applying a Blue 186 Effect Applying a Ross Effect 187 Bob a Effect 188 Applying Bulge a Cartoon Applying 189 Effect Applying a Childhood Effect 190 Applying a Collage Effect 191 Applying Colored Edges Effect 191 a Applying a Contours Effect 192 Applying a Crayon Drawing Effect 193 a 193 Effect Crosshatch Applying of Page 9 334

10 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a Dauber 194 Applying Effect Dramatic 195 a Effect Applying Applying Detect Effect 195 an Edge an Emboss Effect 196 Applying Applying a Edges Effect 197 Furry a Edges Effect 198 Applying Glowing a Granite Applying 199 Effect Applying a Lomo Effect 199 Applying a Mirror Effect 200 Applying a Effect 201 Negative an Paint Effect 201 Applying Oil the Old Applying 202 Effect Applying the Orton Effect 203 Applying an Outline Effect 203 Applying Pencil Drawing Effect 204 a Applying a Pixel Explosion Effect 205 Applying a Pixelate Effect 206 Applying a Posterize Effect 206 207 Effect Haze Purple Applying a Applying a Effect 208 Radial Waves Rain 209 a Effect Applying Ripple Effect 210 Applying a Scattered Tiles Effect 211 a Applying a Sepia 211 Applying Effect Applying Seventies Effect 212 a a Metal Effect 213 Applying Sheet a Shift Applying 213 Effect Applying a Slant Effect 214 Applying a Sobel Effect 215 Applying a Solarize Effect 216 Applying a Effect 216 Somber a Glass Effect 217 Applying Stained a Sunspot Applying 218 Effect Applying a Swirl Effect 218 Applying the Threshold Effect 219 Applying Topography Effect 220 a Applying a Water Effect 221 Applying a Water Drops Effect 222 Applying a Waves Effect 223 a Weave 223 Effect Applying of Page 10 334

11 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a Wind 224 Applying Effect Custom Special a Filter (Convolution Effect) 225 Creating Effect an Image 226 Rotating an Flipping 227 Image an 228 Cropping Image the Crop Resizing 228 Window Resizing an Image 229 Pixel Resize Options and Resulting Action 230 Adjusting Image 232 Exposure Image 233 Adjusting Levels Levels Automatically 235 Adjusting Tone Curves 235 Adjusting Adjusting Lighting 236 Using the 1- Step Tab 237 Using Basic Tab 237 the Adjusting White Balance 238 Adjusting Color Balance 239 Using the Histogram 240 240 Depth Color Image Changing Using the Dialog Box 240 Color Standard 241 The Tab Custom Tab The 241 Selecting and Adjusting Colors 241 Sharpening an Image 241 Blurring Image 242 an About Noise and Noise Reduction 245 Removing Noise 245 Adding Noise 247 Adjusting Clarity 248 7: CHAPTER 365 MODE 250 Working in Mode 250 365 a 365.acdsee.com Creating 251 Account Uploading Images to 365.acdsee.com 251 Setting Folders to Automatically Sync to Web 252 Creating and Setting Privacy 253 Folders Changing the Rating System 254 Downloading Images 254 Using Transfer Manager 255 8: DASHBOARD 256 MODE CHAPTER of Page 11 334

12 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Dashboard Mode Using 256 256 Cataloging Files Mode Dashboard 256 CHAPTER PICAVIEW 257 9: 257 About ACDSee PicaView AND CONFIGURATION 258 OPTIONS 10: CHAPTER General Setting 258 the Options the Options 258 Setting Mode Manage 259 Options the Setting Mode the Search Options 259 Setting Quick the File List Pane Setting 260 Options Setting Thumbnail Info Options 262 the the Thumbnail Options 263 Setting Style Details 264 Options the Setting View the Pane Options 264 Setting Preview the Folders Pane Setting 265 Options Setting Catalog Pane Options 266 the the Pane Setting Options 266 Calendar Setting CD/DVD Management Options 267 the Options Pane Properties Setting 268 the Setting the Management Options 268 File the Options 269 Setting Database the Photos Mode Setting 270 Options Setting the View Mode Options 271 Setting the Display Options 272 Setting Edit Mode Options 273 the Setting the ACDSee 365 Options 273 Setting the ACDSee Showroom Options 274 Quick Setting the ACDSee View Options 275 Setting JPEG 276 Options the Options 276 Setting Media the ACDSee Indexer Setting 277 Options Setting the ACDSee PicaView Options 277 Setting the ACDSee Mobile Sync Options 278 Auto- Panes and Panels 278 hiding Using the Task Pane 279 Customizing Toolbars 279 Displaying and Hiding Toolbars 279 279 Contents Customizing Toolbar of Page 12 334

13 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Manage 280 In Mode: In View Mode: 280 Toolbars 281 Resetting Toolbar and Pane Locations 281 Customizing Hiding Panes 281 Moving Panes and Toolbars in View and Edit Mode 281 Docking and Toolbars in View and Edit Mode 282 Panes Creating a Custom Menu 282 Configuring Editors 283 External Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts 284 Changing the Display Theme 285 11: CHAPTER 286 SHORTCUTS Manage Shortcuts 286 Keyboard Mode Mode Mouse Shortcuts 293 Manage Keyboard Mode 293 Shortcuts View View Mode Mouse Shortcuts 298 Calendar Pane Shortcuts 298 298 Edit Mode Keyboard Shortcuts Edit Mode 303 Shortcuts Mouse 365 Keyboard Shortcuts 304 Mode 365 Mode Mouse Shortcuts 306 PicaView ACDSee Keyboard Shortcuts 306 CHAPTER 12: FILE FORMATS 307 About RAW Files 307 Files 307 Associating 308 GLOSSARY 318 INDEX of Page 13 334

14 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 1: Getting Chapter Started ACDSee Welcome Standard 2018 Photo to Studio digital , on choosing the industry- leading congratulations photo management software. ACDSee and Welcome to essential application ACDSee importing, organizing, viewing, enhancing, and sharing your digital photos is the for media files. other and you can import your photos from your camera to With computer, categorize and rate your files, and ACDSee your photo of any size— from a few hundred to a few hundred thousand. Choose to view thumbnail manage collections sort any or use a detailed list of file properties to of your files. Can't find a particular photo? No previews size, ACDSee includes a variety of powerful searching tools and a Compare Images feature problem. eliminate to duplicates. total control your photography workflow and get back behind the lens faster with ACDSee , the complete Achieve of solution professional management photographers. photography for You quickly high- quality displays mode your images. generates can run slideshows, play embedded audio, View of display multiple- page images in any of the more than 50 image and multimedia file and formats. Also, includes a wide variety of image editing tools you can use to create, edit, and touch- up your digital ACDSee your Use such as red eye images. crop, sharpen, blur, and photo repair to enhance or correct tools reduction, images. editing tools, such as exposure adjustment, Image resize, rename, and rotate, can be performed convert, the at on time. same multiple files The user is completely customizable, and provides quick access to tools and features. You can customize interface ACDSee screen the order of images, toolbar the and many other options to suit your preferences. layout, display, contains context- sensitive Help to assist extensive as you move through the application. you ACDSee is a fast, powerful, and easy- to- use image management system that everyone from beginners to professionals use and enjoy. can About the ACDSee User Interface The ACDSee user interface provides easy access to the various tools and features you can use to browse, view, consists edit, manage your photos and media files. ACDSee and of six modes: Manage mode, Photos mode, View Edit mode, mode, mode, 365 and Dashboard mode. Manage Mode user mode main browsing and managing component of the the interface, and is what you see when Manage is start ACDSee using the you icon on your desktop. In Manage mode, you can find, move, preview, and sort shortcut your files, and access organization and sharing tools. Manage mode consists of 15 panes, most of which can be closed when not in use. The File List pane is always your visible, displays the contents of the current folder, the results of your latest search, or the files in and at database match your filtering criteria. A status bar that the bottom of the Manage mode window displays category. or folder, file, information about the currently selected of Page 14 334

15 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can open close panes, move them to different areas of your screen, and stack them on other panes or You and can to of the window. Most panes also have additional options you edge set to further customize dock them the and appearance. behavior their also features a toolbar and a set of drop- down menus. The toolbar provides buttons for your home Manage mode and for forwards and backwards through your folders. The drop- down menus provide quick folder, navigating the common tasks. to most access Photos Mode can be used to view your Photos image collection by date. You can view them by year, month, or mode entire If you have day. OneDrive™ you can toggle viewing your OneDrive image collection along with the image Microsoft collection your hard drive, or just your hard drive collection on its own. Photos mode only displays images that on they been Images in Photos mode are displayed by the date . were taken, as indicated in the images' have cataloged data. EXIF mode consists of two panes, the Date pane and Timeline pane. The Date pane displays all Photos your cataloged of photo by date. The Timeline pane displays the year and month of your photos and how many collection are photos in You can also select individual images each. launch them in other modes. to View Mode can You and open In View mode you can play media files also display images in full resolution, one at a time. panes to image properties, display areas of an image at varying magnifications, or examine detailed color view information. the open You mode by selecting an image and clicking on can View mode tab, and you can use the Filmstrip in View View mode to flip quickly between all of the files in a folder. View mode contains a toolbar with shortcuts to of commonly- and a status bar at the bottom commands, the window, which displays information about the used current image or media file. Edit Mode Edit mode works on the image data already rendered to RGB. Edits are independently applied to the converted the RGB data in them. order that you do This chain editing gives you full control over the pixels, allowing creative freedom to precise adjustments. This makes operations such as selections and blend modes possible. apply Mode 365 mode provides an easy way to upload images 365 365.acdsee.com to share with your contacts or the to public. In 365 mode, you can select the images on your computer and then drag and drop them directly into 365.acdsee.com. Mode Dashboard Dashboard mode allows you to quickly access and browse file, camera, and database statistics based on your relies ACDSee and EXIF information. As Dashboard mode database on information derived from your database, it is out it. of most important to catalog in order to get the of Page 15 334

16 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Modes in Switching ACDSee Photos, you quickly switch between the six ACDSee Manage, can View, Edit, 365 mode, and Dashboard In modes— mode. mode buttons The located at the top right of the ACDSee window: are To from One Mode to Another: Switch one of the following mode buttons: Click photos. Manage : Import, browse, organize, compare, find, and publish your Photos your entire image collection by date. View : : Display and examine photos at any magnification. View enhance : Fix and pixel- photos using the Edit based Edit tools. share 365 Upload images to 365.acdsee.com to : with your contacts or the public. statistics. Dashboard : Quickly access and browse file, camera, and database Using Mode Manage share In you can browse, sort, catalog, manipulate, and mode, your files and images. You can combine Manage different tools and panes to perform sophisticated searching and filtering operations, and view thumbnail previews images and media files. of You can also switch very quickly to the other modes by clicking the mode buttons in the top right corner. panes The Manage in mode are fully customizable, and can be moved, resized, hidden, docked, or closed. You can accessibility, also panes together for easy reference and the and to maximize your screen space. stack If the pane you want to view is not visible, click Panes from the top left main toolbar and select a pane. About the Manage Mode Panes panes: of following the Manage mode consists of Page 16 334

17 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio List This displays the contents of the currently selected folder, the results of your latest File pane the files folders that match your selective browsing criteria. The File List search, or and visible, can cannot be hidden or closed. You always customize the File List pane is and the the the files are displayed, or way size of the thumbnails. by pane changing pane displays the directory structure of your computer, much like the directory tree Folders This Explorer. pane can use the Folders Windows to browse through the folders and in You display contents File List pane. You can also the the contents of multiple their in display the File List by clicking the Easy- Select indicator opposite each folder, on folders in the side the pane. left of and pane a calendar that you can This to organize displays browse your files Calendar use to their associated dates. according This pane stores shortcuts to your favorite images, Shortcuts folders or even applications. files, Dragging image, file, or folder into the Shortcuts pane creates a shortcut to the an without affecting in any way. original it can pane to a powerful search utility . You access specify the type of search This provides Search to perform, and enter your search criteria into you fields provided in the Search want the pane. also save a search and give it a can Saved searches are listed on the Search You name. and the Catalog pane. On the Search pane, can pane Saved searches from the select drop- list to run again. On the Catalog pane, Saved Searches are listed below Auto down once where run them again by clicking can on the Saved Search name. Categories, you This pane displays a thumbnail preview of any image Preview media file currently selected in or the List pane. You can adjust the size File the thumbnail by resizing the Preview pane, of also the display just and or specify whether you want the Preview pane to play media files first frame. Calendar panel input from the Folders, Catalog, This combines panes to limit the list Selective and of files in the File List pane to those that match a specific Browsing of criteria. You can include set You exclude by adjusting the different criteria in the Selective Browsing pane. files or from access Selective Browsing panel the the View menu. can ratings, This pane lists the categories, auto categories, labels, color Catalog and saved searches also to sort and manage your files. You can you use the Special Items area in the help Catalog pane to quickly view all of the images on your computer, or see any uncategorized in the current folder. files Task This pane displays menus of commonly- used buttons and commands from the menus based and The menus change dynamically toolbars. on your current location and . selections in ACDSee for any Properties This pane displays file properties and metadata File the file or folder you select in for List can use the Properties pane to view and edit metadata You your files, and pane. the EXIF metadata included in digital photos. Map This pane displays marked locations on a map for any file you select in the File List pane. mark You use the Map to view and can the geographic location of your files. your Image Basket While browsing through the files and folders, you can place images in Image Basket those to temporarily . You can then edit, print, or share them images without moving hold them all into a single folder. Burn Basket This pane provides the tools you need to group and organize files and then burn them to . CDs DVDs from within ACDSee and Manage Mode Drop- Down Menus include menus The drop- down menus in Manage mode give you quick access to often- used tasks. The drop- down following: the of Page 17 334

18 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio : Where can import photos from cameras and other devices. Import you Where Batch run all the batch editing processes. you : can CD/DVDs, you Where slide- show files, PowerPoint presentations, can online albums, or Create : create archives. Where you can configure and run a slideshow. Slideshow : Where Send can upload to photo sites, an FTP, or share photos by email. : you easy Editors you can list external editors for Where access. External : with Manage Mode Panes Working can open and close panes in Manage mode to suit your preferences, and move, float, or stack any of You panes the to the layout of the Manage mode window. customize Open or Panes in Manage Mode: To Close open and the Panes you want to select or close. Click pane Panes Moving can move a pane from a docked or floating position to a new location. You can move one pane at a time, You or several panes. stacked Move Pane: To a Drag the pane's title bar and hold your cursor over any of the arrows of the 1. Compass. Docking 2. the shaded marquee displays the position of When pane you want, release the mouse button. the its click a bar. 3. To return title pane to its previous location, double- To Move Docked or Floating Pane: a one the following: Do of the pane's tab to a new location. Only one pane moves. Drag Any the title bar to a new location. pane's panes stacked beneath it also move. Drag If you use dual monitors, you can move the panes to your second monitor to free up space on your main monitor. Panes Docking When you select a pane in the Manage mode, the Docking Compass activates to help you place the pane precisely. of The Docking Compass consists of an outer and inner ring your arrows. When you hold cursor over any of the arrows, a marquee displays the potential position of the pane. shaded Dock Mode Pane in Manage To Window: a tab Drag 1. title bar or the to activate the Docking Compass. pane's 2. To dock a pane around the outer edge of the window, hold your cursor over any of the outer arrows of the Docking and then release the mouse button. Compass, 3. To dock a pane around the the edge of the File List pane, or any another pane, hold your cursor over outer release button. mouse the inner arrows of the Docking compass, and then of Page 18 334

19 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Panes Stacking stack panes and reorder their tabs to suit your needs. You can Panes: Stack To Do one of the following: 1. pane's title bar onto the title bar of another pane until the shaded marquee appears, and Drag one the release button. then mouse the pane another, hold your cursor over the one of inside Docking Compass, and then Drag center the mouse button. release To reorder the panes, drag a tab to the left or 2. in the tab order. right 3. separate a tabbed pane, drag the pane’s tab to another location on the screen. To Panes Resizing resize all the panes in Manage can whether they are docked or floating. You mode, Resize a Docked Pane: To Hold of cursor over the edge 1. the pane until the cursor changes to arrows and lines. your size Drag edge of the pane to the the you want. 2. To Resize a Floating Pane: size the the want. Hold your cursor over you edge or corner of the pane and then drag the pane to Resetting the Layout View, can all of the panes to their default positions You Manage, restore and Edit mode at any time. for To Reset the Layout: Click View | Reset Layout . Using Mode Photos Photos mode is a quick and convenient way to view your entire image collection by date. Photos mode displays are images that have been cataloged . Images in Photos mode indicated displayed by the date they were taken, as taken, in EXIF data. If the EXIF data does not contain a date images' Photos mode will display the images based the on the modified date. You can modify the date taken by using Batch Adjust Time Stamp . Photos contains two areas: mode Date pane : This date. displays all of your cataloged photo collection by pane in photos are each. Timeline pane : This pane displays the year and month of your photos and how many of Page 19 334

20 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Images Viewing displayed in Photos mode by date. To toggle viewing them are year, month, or day, do one of the Images by following: the Year , Month , or Day buttons at the bottom right of the Date pane. Click the Use and back arrows at the top left to move from Year to Month to Day view. forward View | Year / Month / Day . Choose to an to move from Year Click Month to Day view. image Click on a year/month entry in the Timeline pane to navigate to the images from that time. To View Your Microsoft OneDrive® Photo Collection: Only the and drop- down menu Click select OneDrive . Filter View All of Your Photo Collection (Including OneDrive): To Click the Filter drop- down menu and select All . To Photos from Your Pictures Folder Only: View Click the Filter drop- down menu and select Pictures . To Photos from Your Desktop Only: View Click . Filter drop- down menu and select Desktop the Your with Collection: Photo To View Orphaned Files Click the Orphan Files button at the top of the Date pane. Orphaned files will appear in sepia. Show View Larger To Version of an Image: a one following: the Do of click an Double- to open it in View mode. image Select an image and press Enter to toggle between View mode and Photos mode. To Open Image in Another Mode: an one of the following: Do Right- click the image in Day view and select an option from the context menu. + Ctrl image right- click the in Year or Month view and select an option from the context menu. To Locate Image in Windows Explorer®: an Show click image in Day Right- and select the in File Explorer from the context menu. view Ctrl + right- click the image in Month or Year view and select Show in File Explorer from the context menu. Cataloging Photos mode will only display images that have been cataloged. You can catalog your images by: Browsing your folders in Manage mode . mode. top Photos of Using the Catalog button at the of Page 20 334

21 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard View Mode Using use of mode to display your images and media files using their actual dimensions or at a variety You can View sequential You also display a group of images in can order. magnifications . mode contains four main areas: View area : This View the main viewing area, which displays the current image or media file. You can is customize view, and zoom in or out on your images and media files. the the Bottom Located below the main viewing area, : Bottom toolbar provides shortcut buttons to toolbar commonly- used tools and commands, such as the zoom and scroll tools. You can customize the toolbar to use large small icons, or you can choose to not display the toolbar. or : thumbnails is an area below the main viewing area, which displays Filmstrip of the images in the This Manage current in the group of images you selected in or mode. It provides a scroll bar along the folder bottom, so that you can scroll through your images , and buttons for moving to the next or previous image. the Status Located at the bottom of the window, : Status bar displays information and properties for bar the current image or media file. It also displays icons for rating, color labels, and tagging that you can click to edit. Metadata the about information View mode can also display the Properties pane to show EXIF, IPTC and ACDSee image or View mode also has the Navigator , Magnifying Glass , and Histogram panes, each of which show file. image detailed information. Open an Image or Media File in View Mode: To the Manage in In File List pane, do one of mode, following: the Select a file and press Enter . Select a file and click the View mode button. Double- click file. a . click image or media file, and then Right- View an select To Open a Group of Images in View Mode: 1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select a group of images. 2. Enter . Press 3. To navigate through the images , do the following: in To view the next image sequence, the click Next . To view previous image in the sequence, click Previous . the Images Full Screen Mode Viewing in can use the entire screen of your You to display images . In full screen mode, the window borders, menu monitor bar, status bar, and toolbars are hidden, and only the image is visible. If you want to always view your images in for full you can set this option as the default mode, View mode. screen To View Images in Full Screen Mode: 1. Open an image or a group of images in View mode. 2. View | Full Screen . Click 3. Right- click the image menu. access the View mode tools and options via a context to Full Mode: Screen Exit To of Page 21 334

22 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio one of following: Do the F the key. Press the image and Right- View | Full Screen . click select the keyboard shortcut F in View mode to toggle in and Use of a full screen view. out Using View Mode Panes the Open View Mode Panes: To the Open an image 1. View mode. in 2. Do one of the following: for histogram Histogram image. Click Panes | the to display the which the | Magnifying glass to display a pane Panes shows Click area of the image under your magnification. cursor at a higher thumbnail overview Click Panes | Navigator to display a image. magnified of a EXIF for Panes | Properties to display the IPTC, Click and ACDSee Metadata the image. Using the Bottom Toolbar used tools. Use the Bottom toolbar to access commonly- Bottom Toolbar of Page 22 334

23 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio to Image Adds the image to the Image Basket. Add Basket Rotates the to the left. Rotate left image the to the right. Rotates image right Rotate scrolls the Scroll when the image is zoomed to a Pans or image than the View mode area. larger size a area Selects of the image. Select rectangular zoom in on the image. Click to out in or right- Zooms or Zoom zoom out. click to Press Displays image on a full screen. the F to view full Screen Full screen. Editors Opens the file in External external editor of your choosing. an Show Toggles between the original image and the edited image. Original Displays the Navigator pane so you can see a Navigator Quick of visible magnified image. (Only overview for thumbnail a larger are that to a size zoomed than will fit on images in screen.) the slider size the Zoom of the image in the View mode area. Drag Controls slider adjust the size. the to drop- down list Displays a list of Zoom sizes to select. zoom Actual Size Returns the image to its actual size. View the the area. Fit Image Reduces mode image to fit within Using Windows Gestures™ with View Mode Touch viewing you a Windows Touch Gestures™- enabled device, you can use it with View If for quick, easy have of mode photos. Use Mode: Touch Gestures™ with View To Windows an image in View mode. Open Swipe on the image to scroll through images one at a time. You can also use this method on the Filmstrip at bottom of View mode. the Hold and swipe slowly in one direction to go through all of the images in the folder. an Hold down on then image, and let go to achieve the same results as right- clicking with a mouse. Double- tap image to return to Manage mode in ACDSee . the toward two apart to zoom in, and Move each other to zoom out. fingers After zooming in further than 100%, you can pan the image with your finger. displayed If images in Actual Size (1:1), you can still swipe through your images. They will all be viewing at zoom level. 100% Switching to Manage Mode time. can return to Manage mode at any You View from Mode Mode: To Return to Manage of Page 23 334

24 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard one of following: Do the the Double- image click . mode Manage the Click button. Using Edit Mode is where you can Edit changes to your images. You can edit the overall look of your images by mode apply the lighting and color, or changing can crop, flip, resize, or rotate your images. You can use selections to fix you specific of your images. And you can also add final touches to your images, parts as red eye removal, such borders, and special effects. In Edit mode, you can: Use the Selection tools or Edit Brush to select and apply edits to a specific part of the image. Remove flaws red eye . or or text borders , a vignette , a tilt- shift , Add effects , , drawings . special Crop flip , resize , or rotate your images. , Adjust lighting using the exposure , levels , auto levels , tone curves , and lighting tools. Adjust using the White Balance or Color Balance tool. color Add details to your image using Sharpen , Clarity , Remove Noise , Add Noise or Blur tools. Using Mode 365 You can use 365 mode to upload and images to 365.acdsee.com. 365.acdsee.com is an image sharing your can browse and upload storage service available to ACDSee users. With 365 mode and 365.acdsee.com, you through your images without having to launch an Internet browser. online mode browse two parts: 365.acdsee.com and Transfer. In 365.acdsee.com, you can 365 through your images has In in account and modify your account settings. 365.acdsee.com Transfer, the screen splits into two. The your bottom part of the screen displays the images in your computer, and the top part of the screen displays your in 365.acdsee.com. simply click images in your computer displayed can the bottom part of the screen, and You drag them into the top part of the screen to upload the images to your 365.acdsee.com account. from You cannot take an image in 365 mode and open it Edit mode. To edit an image, select an image in Manage or mode and open it in Edit mode. View Images Uploading Upload Photos to Your 365.acdsee.com Account: To In click mode, 1. Login . 365 Login 2. your account. to 3. Click Transfer . Your screen splits in two, with the bottom part of the screen displaying images in your computer. photos, 4. image to upload. To select multiple an press the SHIFT or the CTRL key. Select 5. account. and drag the image into the top part of the screen to upload it to your 365.acdsee.com Click to your account. 365.acdsee.com There is no upload size limit when uploading your images of Page 24 334

25 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Dashboard Mode Using file, is and convenient way to browse your quick camera, and database statistics. Camera Dashboard a mode read from your images' metadata, and file information is analyzed from your ACDSee database. statistics are it is important to catalog to get the most out of Dashboard mode. Therefore, Files Cataloging catalog, do of the following: To one Tools Catalog Database | to . Go | your in Manage mode. Browse folders Dashboard Mode Dashboard contains the following tabs: mode Overview : The Overview tab summarizes the information tab on the other tabs. It also displays a found can the of top graph detailing your monthly or yearly photo counts. You the use the drop- down menu at range tab between viewing a range of months or a switch of years. You can use the Prev and Next to buttons to navigate backward or forward in time. to Database :The Database tab displays data pertaining tab your database, such as its location, size, your backup information, a breakdown of assets, and more. to Cameras The Cameras tab displays data pertaining : your camera usage, such as which cameras tab you use the most, your favorite ISO setting, and more. your Files : The Files tab displays data pertaining to tab image and video files, such as your most used bit resolutions, image more. and depths, of Page 25 334

26 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard 2: Getting Chapter Help Quick Guide the Start Using Start Guide is designed to give you The brief orientation of the most important features in ACDSee. The Quick a two intro pages allow you to configure some first to facilitate your future workflow. After the first two intro settings pages, Quick Start Guide contains a set of links on the left the that you can click to get a tour of the main side features in ACDSee . You can also use the Next button. To Close Quick Start: the dialog the show at start- up option in the bottom left Uncheck of the Always box, and click Close . corner To Re- Open the Quick Start Guide: On the Menu bar, click Help | Quick Start Guide . To the Quick Start Guide: Use Click the links on the left side of the Quick Start Guide or the Next button for a high- level tour. To Set Preferences: to future. the in On the first page, click the Browse button to select the folder ACDSee will open you On page, click the Select button to choose which folders second would like the ACDSee database to keep the of. track choose on the second page, you can side an interval from the drop- down menu on the right Also to specify how your often should remind you to backup ACDSee database. Finding Other Resources and Support the The Help menu on the ACDSee menu bar contains links to open plug- in help files and options that link you to find requirements. updates, ACDSee Web site, where you can system and newsletters, registration community take you to the support page, to the links page, or the Other home page where you can join forums. the community and participate in the ACDSee trial version The Help menu is also where you can convert a code. license of ACDSee to a full version by entering a menu Click to see the following Help options: Plug- in Help ACDSee Help 365 Manage Account acdID Check for Updates and Messages Quick Start Guide and Resources Product Support Support Customer Products ACDSee Community ACDSee Facebook of Page 26 334

27 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo Twitter ACDSee 2018 About Standard 334 27 Page of

28 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard 3: Manage Chapter Mode you is main browsing and managing component of the user interface, and mode what the see when you Manage is ACDSee using the shortcut icon on your desktop. start Manage mode, you can: In your Import from a device, CD or DVD, or disk. photos files folders . Browse and files by tagging them, adding categories, color labels, Catalog keywords and other metadata. ratings, Search for files and create saved searches. Publish and share files , including emailing files, creating slideshows, burning files to CD or DVD, and uploading images your favorite photo Web site. to images . Print of Edit files. batches maintain Manage ACDSee database . and your Files with ACDSee Importing your You ACDSee to download images from devices like use digital camera, flash drives, CD/DVDs, or other can removable devices. In Manage mode, you can also use the File | Import | From Disk option to import files from a preserving network, any kind of disk or drive that can be mapped, while and the original folders and subfolders. Importing Files Using the Windows AutoPlay Dialog Box box dialog AutoPlay prompts When you connect your digital camera or other device to your computer, the Windows you to one of the following: choose pictures then ACDSee : Select this option to open the Import dialog box. You can Import select using save settings backup, and place the files. You can rename, your import settings and give them a name to so that you can re- use them later. You can also create advanced settings for import dates and RAW + JPEG file options your camera takes both file formats. You can also create a if renaming template to use with specific kinds of files or projects. to Manage pictures using ACDSee : Select this option ACDSee browse the files in . You can then choose to import files or simply copy and paste the files from the device. the you pictures videos Import Windows : Select this option if and prefer to use Windows to import using the files. Depending on the other applications installed on your computer, there may be additional options. device If difficulty with your computer recognizing your experience as a drive, explore your device's you manual about mounting the device as a drive. Or, use your computer's card reader to access your memory card. Importing Files from Specific Types of Devices of you device connected: For more specific instructions, select the type of Page 28 334

29 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Photos From Device Importing a From Importing or DVD a Photos CD a From Disk Importing Photos About Removable Devices there are several ways to obtain images from your digital camera, scanner, or With card. For ACDSee , memory about your device communicates with your computer, how consult your device's Help file information more please Some different types of removable devices or manual. are: Removable : Removable devices include memory cards that you can attach to your computer USB device USB slots reader, camera memory cards that insert directly into a on the computer, or flash using card shown USB are detected by your computer and are devices in the structure as a drives. removable drive. removable Image Acquisition (WIA) : Cameras and scanners Windows use Windows Image Acquisition that (WIA) to communicate with the computer. Some cameras, including Canon cameras, use WIA. drivers automatically detects WIA protocol. ACDSee the audio DirectX QuickTime to copy and view and or video files. require You 9.0c From a Device Importing Photos your From box gives you multiple options for importing dialog files from cameras, card readers, flash The Import and other mass storage devices. If you want to drives, import files with a few clicks, you can. Or you can simply select several options to streamline your workflow and perform multiple tasks with each import. from files the From dialog In you can view the thumbnails of the Import on the device by their date or file type. You box, leave the device, the can change on size of the thumbnails to make it easier to select those you want to import or and then only those you have selected. view import, can choose the destination folder or subfolders for the files, create a backup set You files as you also of and the files during the import process, automatically rename them if your camera has this option. rotating Advanced settings give you options to change the date you want to use, and where to place RAW and JPEG files if your creates both file formats. camera You can even organize your files as you import by adding Categories, IPTC and ACDSee Metadata. a Then can save all these settings as you preset to use or adapt later. drive, If your camera connects to the computer as a removable can you also simply copy photos directly from the List and Folders pane because ACDSee detects and displays the removable device in the File computer, pane. you are Folders sure how your camera connects to your If please see About not Removable Devices in Importing Files with ACDSee . Some cameras, for example, Canon, use Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) to communicate with a Device computer. devices use these protocols, you can import by clicking From your on the File | If Import menu. ACDSee automatically detects these protocols. To Download Photos Using the Import From Dialog Box: sure 1. your camera or device to the computer. Make Connect your camera is turned on, and the cable is connected computer. your to properly of Page 29 334

30 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Do of the following: 2. one the Windows AutoPlay If box opens, select Import pictures using ACDSee . dialog If you have more than one device connected to your computer, select the device you want to use from the list, and then click OK . Device From | . In Manage mode, click File | Import Press G on the keyboard. + ALT In the Import From dialog box, described from the import options as 3. below. select 4. Click Import . 5. To browse your imported photos, click Yes when the Import Complete dialog box displays. your You may require Direct X 9.0c and QuickTime to download audio and video files from camera. Options From Import of Page 30 334

31 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio are of can control which items You imported by choosing one items to Select following: the import Only that have not been imported in New files imports : the past. Imports all files. : All Custom selected files. You can control : Imports the are by enabling or imported their which files disabling checkboxes. Date Displays all the files grouped by the dates they View created. by were deselect date, click the checkbox beside the date. To To a dates, the All Dates checkbox. deselect all click Displays all the files grouped by their file type. file deselect a To Type File To the beside the type, type. checkbox deselect all file click file click the All types, types checkbox. file View Displays all the thumbnails of the files on the device. all Displays the files selected for import. only View selected used settings Displays the names of recently- settings import import to use Import Choose preset drop- again, down you can select one of the following: menu or : Uses the current settings to import. Current used : Uses the import settings from Last last import. the None Clears all the current import settings. : with import all the current import settings Saves a name so that you Save can use them again. To select (or edit) import settings, save settings name Save and type in the icon (or re- save existing new settings). drop- the in appears The new name for the import settings down menu. Delete Deletes the saved import settings currently import in the selected Import settings drop- down menu. settings Choose Destination of again, use Displays the names Location recently- used destinations to one menu you can select or of the following: down drop- used : Uses the destination from the last import. Last : all Clears None the current destination settings. following Place select: to options Displays the Subfolders pre- defined subfolder in menu down drop- Single folder by name : Creates a new subfolder with the you type into the Name field, which activates name when a select this option. All the files are placed into you name. folder with the new by today's Single folder using folder date : Creates one all today's the name and places as the files into the date folder. Nested folder by today's date : Creates a series of nested one below the other, based on today's date folders, and the format you select in the Format field. The folders shows are created as the sample are and all the files placed in lowest folder. the folders by Nested date : Creates multiple sets of file's nested folders based on the files' dates and on the format you in the Format field, which activates when you select sample this option. The folders are created as the select folders on shows and the files are imported into the lowest date. each of Page 31 334

32 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio folders by date : Creates separate Separate file's on folders file dates in the format the based individual Format down options. the selected drop- from : Preserves existing folder Preserve subfolder names to use From Disk option the import. For you names when you have a flash drive or CD containing images example, if complex in of subfolders, the whole folder tree is a set intact. imported Format format options for the Nested folder options (see date Displays above). be sample Sample the nested folders that will a created Displays of the current settings (see above). using to drop- Creates the Backup a backup set of files using an exact duplicate of menu down you have selected under Place in . subfolders can also one of the following: You do and navigate to an existing folder to Browse then Click a backup destination. use as to and Make New Folder then create a new Browse Click as a backup destination. folder existing ACDSee Metadata is included in the While copy, Catalog settings (IPTC or ACDSee backup any added during import will not be included. Metadata) as Rename to predefined these according Renames each file File it imports files menu down drop- renaming templates: each Creates the using Date/time - filename : filename file date time the file was created plus the original and filename. the each filename using Creates file date and Date/time : time it was created. the - sequence number : Creates each filename Camera sequential the name and a using number starting camera at one. Date/time - sequence number : Creates each filename created using date and the time it was file plus a the sequential number starting at one. Camera - filename : Creates each filename using the camera and the original filename. name When you create and save your own renaming templates, they list also appear in this select. for you to Edit Opens Rename Templates dialog box where you can create the save own renaming templates . and your Metadata Manage select or Select the names of saved Apply presets metadata menu drop- presets to open the down Metadata Presets dialog box of Manage options. Customize Properties pane Metadata tab : Enter ACDSee and IPTC importing. Metadata the fields to add to the files you are to into Properties pane Categories tab : Assigns the imported files to any category selected in this tab. You can select multiple categories. the Rotates your images Automatically if your camera creates automatically option rotate images work. to this information needed for of Page 32 334

33 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard items from Delete after Deletes the imported items from their original location (s) import source import. after database Opens the Advanced Advanced Options dialog box where you can ACDSee Import change the date settings for files and specify where to place date and JPEG files. RAW following set database, use one of the ACDSee as the file To the date: date : Uses the EXIF date Exif in the image by embedded the camera. the modified : Uses File date date file was last the modified. Specific date : Uses the date you select by clicking the in the calendar down arrow. drop- select To to place RAW+JPEG files where one of the RAW+JPEG specify following: both in chosen destination folder : Places Place RAW and files in the folder you have selected JPEG under Choose destination on the Import From dialog box. Place JPEG in subfolder : Places the RAW files in the folder you selected under Choose destination on have Import the dialog box. Then creates a new subfolder From with the name you type into the Subfolder name field, which activates when you select this option. All the JPEG subfolder. new the into files are placed Place RAW : Places the JPEG files in the in subfolder have under Choose destination on you selected folder From dialog box. Then creates a the subfolder Import new the you type into name Subfolder name field, with the activates when you select this RAW All the which option. files placed into the new subfolder. are values field. in the IPTC fields are reflected in their corresponding EXIF The set Photos a Importing Scanner From import can images using You and scan them to specific, accessible locations. ACDSee To Specify a Destination for Your Scanned Images: Tools 1. Click | Options | Manage Mode . 2. On Manage mode page, in the Scanning Destination section, click the Browse For Folder button. the your In 3. For Folder dialog, select a destination folder for the scanned images. Browse 4. Press OK . To Scan Images: 1. In Manage mode, click File | Import | From Scanner . by 2. your scanning settings as desired. As the scanning dialog is controlled Configure Windows, these your settings vary, depending on will OS and version of ACDSee. the pane. Folders using 3. Navigate to the location you set as the destination for your scanned images of Page 33 334

34 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Photos From CD or DVD Importing a download You a CD or DVD using the Import From dialog box, or the Folders pane . Before you photos can from and can you the CD and view them just like any other folder browse then simply copy and paste import photos, to a new location. into them use If Import From dialog box, you can set the subfolder options to import complex folder structures you the including the folder names. You can also organize your files as you import them, as well all create a intact, as backup simultaneously. duplicate folder, Photos Import a CD or DVD: To from Insert the CD or DVD into the drive. 1. Do 2. of the following: one the Windows dialog box opens, select Import pictures using ACDSee . If AutoPlay have select than one CD or DVD drive connected to your computer, you the device you If more to use, then click OK . want and | mode, File | Import Manage From CD/DVD . In click In the Import From dialog 3. select the Import From options you want to use, and then click Import . box, 4. browse your imported photos, click Yes when the Import Complete dialog box displays. To Photos a Disk Importing From makes it easy to import photos from ACDSee other storage device, computer, network, flash drive etc. In fact, any network, to another or any device that your computer can map to. When you connect a removable drive, or disk a computer, ACDSee it as a removable drive and you can browse to it, and around it, using the Folders pane. sees can files copy and paste the You into ACDSee . just structure the in the disk or If have a complex folder files or you want to organize, rename, and back up the drive files as you import them, it is worth using the Import From dialog box, which has import settings do all of these tasks simultaneously. Import from a Disk: To Photos 1. the disk to the computer. Connect 2. Do one of the following: select If Windows AutoPlay dialog box opens, the Import pictures using ACDSee . more If you have select than one disk or drive connected to your computer, the device you want to use, and click OK . then | Manage File | Import click From Disk . In mode, In the Browse for Folder dialog 3. navigate to the removable drive or device in the folder tree, and then box, click OK . 4. In the Import From dialog box, select the options you want to use, and then click Import . Import 5. your imported photos, click Yes when the browse Complete dialog box displays. To Creating a Renaming Template In as Import From dialog box, you can create, name, and save a template that gives each file a unique name the photos. time import you they are imported and placed on your hard drive. You can then re- use the template each of Page 34 334

35 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio templates can a numerical sequence, custom text, and file- specific information in each new file Renaming have sorts You and save different renaming templates for different create of files. For example, you could name. can a different renaming template for a different camera, or a different type of file. have To Create Renaming Template: a Rename In From dialog box, select Import files to . 1. the From the drop- down list, select one of the following system 2. templates: Date/time filename : Renames the files using the date and - each file was created and the time original file name. was file each time Date/time : Renames the files using the date and created. Camera - number : Renames the files using the camera name and a sequential sequence number. Date/time sequence number : Renames the files using the date and time each file was - and number. sequential created a of - : Renames the files Camera the name filename the camera and each file's original with name. 3. To create your own renaming template, or add to a system template, click Edit . the 4. Rename Templates dialog box, select from the options as described in the table below. In 5. Click OK . checkbox, If select the Skip video and audio files you the rename process will not rename video and audio files. Options Templates Rename of Page 35 334

36 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio to template. Click the drop- down list System select a different pre- defined system template drop- down list rename to open the New Rename Template dialog box Click you can type in a name for your New where renaming template. Give the renaming template a name that clearly identifies how you own template use template, to or what kind of information the name will contain. For example, plan the photographer name_ . Camera click Save , the name of your new When is added to the drop- down list of you template templates. system Deletes the renaming template currently selected in the drop- down list unless Delete is a pre- it defined template, which cannot be deleted. system can Use to create the renaming template. You field type in the photographer's name and this Rename underscore between each element Template the template to make it easier to read. an of the placeholders to ensure that following filename is unique: Use each an * . When Insert files are renamed, the * will be replaced by the original file your name. a sequential . When your files are renamed, each # will be replaced by a Insert # insert If have a large number of files, you several ##s. For example, if you number. and be If on. enter ###, the first file renamed will so numbered 001, the next 002, you have 1000 files, insert ####. over inside a < > and the data placeholder these brackets is replaced Insert metadata whatever data you have with For example, if you choose , chosen. the of the camera is model into each file name. inserted Insert of Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box, where you can select from a long list Metadata to insert into your template. metadata you As you type, or add placeholders in the Rename Template field, the same updates to show Sample a sample of how renaming template will look. of Skip video process. rename the Skips the renaming files video and audio during audio and files a Lightroom® Importing Database your use Adobe® Lightroom® Database Importer can import the collections, keywords, ratings, and color You to from labels into ACDSee . Your keyword hierarchies will import independent of whether they are Lightroom® embedded in the images selected for import. You cannot import smart collections. You begin importing while Lightroom® is open. cannot If you have a hierarchy in your Collections in ACDSee that is identical to your hierarchy in Lightroom®, these will merge. collections To Import Your Lightroom® Database: 1. In . mode, choose Tools | Database | Import | Lightroom Database Manage . Next Importer, press 2. In the Adobe Lightroom Database of Page 36 334

37 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Select the of the database information you would like to import into ACDSee, including 3. checkboxes Collections, Keywords. Labels, and Ratings, the Browse button next to the Location 4. to navigate to the location of your Lightroom® database Use field file. default, the field displays By default location where Lightroom® stores its database, so you will the only to browse if you have moved your database. need Press . 5. Next Check the summary to ensure that the displayed 6. is correct. If you see a mistake, use the Back information button to return to the previous page to make any corrections. 7. Press . Green checkmarks will display next to the items that are successfully completed, and red Next will to next crossmarks items that failed. display Press . 8. Finish is a registered trademark Lightroom Adobe Inc. of Working with Images on Mobile You can access, browse, view, delete, and copy and paste images on your mobile phone with ACDSee. To edit a images your mobile device, you will need to copy them to on local folder. To Access the Images on Your Phone Using ACDSee: device. mobile your on Make sure that file sharing is enabled 1. With plugged in, open ACDSee. your phone your Manage the Folders pane, navigate to using phone under This PC/Computer. In mode, 2. the Folders pane 3. File List pane, navigate to your images. They are usually stored in a folder called Using or DCIM. displays supplied information ACDSee by your device in the Properties pane. file View Image from Your Mobile Phone: To an the File List pane, double- click the In image. You use the Filmstrip to navigate can the images in the folder. through To Copy Images from Your Mobile Phone to Another Folder in ACDSee: File In the List pane, select the image (s) and do one of the following: Right- click choose Copy . Browse to another folder, right- click and choose Paste . and To click choose Copy To Folder... In the Copy Right- Folder dialog, select the destination folder and and click OK . Edit Go Edit | Copy , or press CTRL +C . Then, in the destination folder, go to to | Paste , or press CTRL + . V To Delete Images ACDSee: Your Mobile Phone Using from using PC. your deleted It may be necessary to change settings on your mobile device to allow files to be of Page 37 334

38 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio following: the pane, select the image (s) and do one of the List In File click and choose Delete . Right- Press DEL . to Edit | Delete . Go Images to ACDSee from Your Mobile Device Using ACDSee Sending Sync Mobile can use the ACDSee Mobile Sync app to send You and videos directly from your mobile device into ACDSee photos and Store on Google Photo Studio the your PC. This free app is available on iOS and Android from the Apple App Play respectively. Store, ACDSee Mobile Sync will keep track of which photos have been sent to ACDSee and indicates new and using unsent items colored a border. you In mode, you will be able to access images Manage have sent to ACDSee by clicking the ACDSee Mobile Sync pane. in Folders the node icon of Page 38 334

39 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Started Getting the app, you can: To procure in the Apple App Store , for iOS. In the App Store, type ACDSee Mobile Sync in it Search Download the bar. the the Google Play Store , for Android. In in Play Store, type ACDSee Mobile Sync in the Download it bar. Search After installation, the ACDSee Mobile Sync app on your device. Follow the prompts to give the app access to open photos (ACDSee to assign the target your on your PC). and PC must connected to the You wifi network as the be that is running ACDSee in order to use ACDSee same Mobile Sync to send photos and videos. Sending Images Videos and to can and videos from the ACDSee Mobile Sync app images ACDSee. ACDSee Mobile Sync keeps track of You send items which already been sent. ACDSee will notify you with a pop- up in the lower right corner when it has have received your sent items. You can then click on the ACDSee Mobile Sync node icon in the Folders pane in Manage mode to the received files. view send To new items, press the Send button. all To send specific items, select them and press the Send button. the You use context- menus within can app for more specific selection options. Setting See drive. the You can customize the location of your ACDSee Mobile Sync folder on your hard ACDSee Mobile Options . Sync Files the File List Pane Browsing in File List pane is the large pane in the center of the Manage mode window. The File The pane displays the List contents the currently selected folder, the results of your of search, or the files and folders that match your latest selective browsing criteria. The File List pane is always visible, and cannot be hidden or closed. from Files as thumbnails in the File List pane by default. However, you can change the File List pane view display can thumbnails details, list, icons, tiles, or Filmstrip . You to sort your files according to name, size, properties, use and more. You can also filters to control which files display in the File List pane. Using the List Pane File List are sections in the File List pane: the Contents bar, the File List drop- down lists, and There File three the toolbar. overlay icons, which appear on the thumbnails, allow The to rate, tag, and label your images and you indicate additional information, such as if the file has been processed or geotagged. The Bar Contents The Contents bar is located at the top of the File List pane and describes what you are currently browsing. When the you using the Folders pane, the Contents bar will display are path or paths to the folders you are browsing, as in the example: following of Page 39 334

40 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard the you browsing files by category or rating with the If pane, are Contents bar displays the selected Catalog classifications, as in the following example: The Contents bar also displays a date range when browsing with the Calendar pane , and a summary of your pane. search you use the Search when criteria File List Drop- Down Lists Filter Displays a list of filter options such as rating and category. You can also select Advanced Filters and create a custom filter. List File the pane. Group Displays a list of file attributes that you can use to group files in to Sort list of file attributes that you can use a sort the files in the File List pane. Displays Displays a View list of view options for viewing files in the File List pane. Select Displays a list of file selection options. Toolbar File List Basket Adds Add to Image Basket. Image selected images to the Rotate Rotates selected images to the left. left Rotate right Rotates selected images to the right. Opens Compare images in selected images the Compare Images Viewer. the Zoom Controls the size of slider thumbnails in the File List pane. thumbnails. the Drag the slider to adjust Icons Overlay of Page 40 334

41 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard click / play Appears if the file contains to Playing Right- Sound audio. embedded Sound embedded or associated The second audio. icon the on click you if appears icon the sound and sound begins embedded playing. Rating if the file has been Appears in ACDSee rated the database. Label Appears if Color file has been the assigned a color label. Embed Pending Appears if the file has choose and click Right- ACDSee either: Metadata stored in that the database ACDSee ACDSee Embed written been yet not has to Metadata : Writes the file. the metadata the file. to Clear Embed Pending Flag : Clears this overlay but icon, not write does the metadata to the file. File format Displays the file format. Left- click to display the File Information, Image Attributes, and EXIF on (summary) Metadata the File the Properties tab of pane. Appears if the file has been to Left- click Category open the Categories on the section categorized. tab of the Organize pane. Properties Collection Appears if the file has been added to collection. a Appears Shortcut the item is a if shortcut to another file. Offline Appears if the file is stored device. on an offline file has been Excluded items Appears if the excluded from the ACDSee database. items Appears Tagged the file has been if tagged. items Appears if the Untagged has not file been tagged. Geotagged items Appears if the file has been Left- click to open the Map geotagged. pane. click Auto- Appears if the file has been image the Left- rotate to rotate rotated. automatically original permanently and update the EXIF information. been has file Edited Appears if the edited. of Page 41 334

42 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Overlay Icon Changing Visibility change You icons are visible, visible in color, and which icons are in color. whether can overlay Icon Overlay Visibility: Change To at the top of the In List pane, do one of the following: Manage Mode, File | Toggle Overlay Mode to control whether the overlay Click are invisible, visible in grayscale, View icons visible color. Toggle the ( ] ) key to move through the available modes. or in ( | Overlay View select which icons appear in color. Toggle the Highlight [ ) key to select from Click to available options. the that this does not apply to Note overlay icons. For more control over which icons are visible, see all Setting Thumbnail Info Options . the the File Pane Maximizing List maximize the of your available screen space, you can make to most the File List pane and hide the rest of To choose Manage mode panes. The only parts of the Manage mode window that remain visible are the File List pane and the whichever you are currently using. toolbars Maximize File List Pane: To the Click View | Maximize File List . 1. its To only the File List pane and 2. toolbar, click View | Full Screen . show mode. Manage to return 3. Click the Close Full Screen button in the upper right corner to Browsing Using Folders Pane the Folders in displays a directory tree of all the folders on your computer in the same style as they appear The pane pane Windows can select one or more folders in the Folders You to display their contents in the File List Explorer. pane . You can also use the Folders pane to create shortcuts to your favorite files, folders, or applications. Then, instead quickly of search for a specific file, you can to access it in the Shortcuts pane . having Whenever you browse to a folder using the Folders pane, the ACDSee database catalogs any images, or media files in folder. the To Open Close the Folders Pane: or Manage click Panes | Folders . In mode, you connect a removable device, such as a mass storage device When digital camera, the Folders pane or displays device as another drive, and the it a drive letter automatically. assigns You can access the device, and its contents, by clicking on it in the Folders pane. Selecting Folders Multiple Easy- Select bars are vertical columns of indicators on the left side of the Folders and Catalog panes. You can use ratings, the Select bars to select multiple folders, categories, or Easy- and display their contents in the File List pane. Easy- the Bar: Select To Use of Page 42 334

43 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio the Folders select the indicator to the left of each folder with contents you want to display. In pane, Selective also Easy- Select bars with the the Browsing pane . can You use Managing Folders Creating and on use Folders and File can panes to create, delete, rename, and move folders the your hard drive to help You List your files. organize To Manage Your Folders: In the Folders pane, browse to where you want to 1. delete, or rename a folder. add, 2. one of the following: Do Type create click File | New , and then select Folder . folder, a name for the new folder and To a Enter . press delete a folder, select a folder To press Delete . and To a folder, right- click the folder you want to rename and select rename . Type a new Rename name for the folder and press Enter . a as a ROM. You cannot rename a drive or any folder on CD- read- only file system, such Browsing Files Date or Event By image the pane you can browse With collection of Calendar and media files using the dates associated with your each file. The Calendar pane includes Events, Year, Month, Day view and the Photo Calendar, which shows to thumbnails day within a month. You can click any date in the Calendar pane per display a list of files associated with that date. To Open the Calendar Pane: | In Manage mode, click Panes Calendar . The Calendar opens in the center File List pane area. pane you images not Your in the Calendar pane until will have either browsed the folder containing the display images or used the Catalog Files Wizard to catalog your images so they are in the ACDSee database. photos If are using the Photo Calendar, you only see thumbnails if there are you on a particular day in that month. Days that have no photo, are blank. View Pane Calendar Options of Page 43 334

44 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio View Switches Calendar pane to Events view. In the Events view you see only those Events the which months media files are available. Next to the month you see images during or dates available. which images or media files are of Expand the month the number on those dates the number of pictures available for the dates. You can add a see to and a thumbnail image to help you remember the description and event. View the Calendar pane to Year view. In Year view you see a series of tables. Year Switches represents you specific year. Next to the year table see how many images or Each a images are with that year. The months during which files or media media associated are available are highlighted. files View Switches the Calendar pane to Month view. In Month view you see a series of tables. Month Each represents a specific month. Next to the month you see how many images table media files associated with that month. The dates on which images or media or are available highlighted. are are files Switches the Calendar pane to Day view. Day Day view you see a series of tables. Each View In represents a specific day. Next to the date you see how many images or table media files associated with that date. The time at which the images or media files are are are highlighted. available the Switches the Calendar pane to Photo Photo Calendar. In the Photo Calendar, you see a Calendar month with thumbnails for any day that single photos. A pop- up of the first contains Click images thumbnail a four on opens if you hover your cursor over a thumbnail. and all for that date display in the File List. The total number of photos the pictures that calendar. is in the top right corner of the to Drag the title bar belonging month resize this float another monitor and drag a corner to pane it and make the to onto bigger or smaller. thumbnails Use the date pane options to specify which Options you want to use to organize Calendar your For example, you can quickly change the setting so that the photos are files. by following: displayed the the ACDSee database cataloged the file Date the taken was Date image the was modified Date file the Date was loaded to your computer file Select Options to open the Calendar dialog, where you can set filter options, choose day the to start the week, and set clock formats. Table of Opens a list of event dates. Contents Only Events View. available in Descriptions Thumbnails in Events View Adding and can add a You and a thumbnail image to dates in Events view to help you remember the event. description Try right- clicking the Calendar Title bar and select Floating to move the pane to a new location. To Add Description to a Date in Events View: a which Expand month 1. see the dates on the images or media files are available. to 2. Click Enter event description here and replace the highlighted text with a new description. the 3. Enter or click outside of Press description area. The description is saved. Calendar: View Photo or To Select a Specific Thumbnail in the Events of Page 44 334

45 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Expand the to see the dates on which images or media files are available. 1. month media Click date to display the images or a files in the File List pane. 2. on Click and drag an image or media file and drag it 3. the thumbnail area for the date. to When release the mouse button the thumbnail is saved. You can reset the default thumbnail by right- you clicking the and selecting Restore Default Thumbnail . thumbnail To a Long List of Dates in Events View: Navigate 1. To expand and collapse specific groups click the + / - signs which are located on the left side of the group header. 2. expand and collapse all groups right- click a group header To select either Open All Groups or Close and All Groups . 3. To scroll through multiple groups click the Next Group and Previous Group buttons, which are located at bottom of the File List scroll bar. the 4. At the bottom of the Calendar pane scroll bar, click the Table of Contents button and select a date. Browsing Your Favorite Files for files access. easy You can create shortcuts to your favorite Accessing the Pane Shortcuts Panes Shortcuts . Click | Creating a Shortcut can create shortcuts to folders You files, and even run executable files, from inside the Shortcuts pane. and Favorite shortcuts can be copied, renamed, moved, or deleted just like a folder. You can even use an executable also shortcut another application from inside ACDSee . You can start create a shortcut by dragging a file, folder, to or executable file directly from the File List pane to the Shortcuts pane. To Add Files to the Shortcuts Pane: pane, 1. In the File List or select a file, folder, executable file. 2. Do of the following: one select click you selected, and then item Add to Shortcuts . Right- the File | Add to Shortcuts Click . 3. a name for the new shortcut Type click OK . and Creating a New Folder You can create a folder, or an entire directory tree, in the Shortcuts pane to help organize your favorites. To a New Folder: Create 1. In the Shortcuts pane, right- click the Shortcuts folder, or a folder you previously created, and then select New | Folder . and . Enter press 2. Type the name of the folder of Page 45 334

46 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio you move file or a folder that is a shortcuts, you break the link and the shortcut no longer works. If a Shortcut or Deleting a Folder the a or delete from within shortcut Shortcuts pane. can You folder a Shortcut or Folder: To Delete confirm Shortcuts right- click the shortcut or folder, click Delete , and then click Yes to pane, that you In the to the shortcut or folder. delete want Catalog Pane the Using Catalog pane is one of the most useful panes in Manage mode as it provides so many tools for organizing, The managing, and your files. You can drag files into the categories, ratings, keywords, or color labels of the finding section pane and quickly organize your files. The Auto Categories assign can be used to find files with Catalog to information such as file size, keywords, or shutter speed. The Saved Searches section allows you to create specific run searches. and Special items such as the Image Well display all the images on the computer in one custom not or can click Uncategorized to display only those that are click, yet in a category. you To Open the Catalog Pane: | Panes Manage . In Catalog mode, click Folders The on the left, tabbed with the opens and Calendar panes. pane Catalog Select Bars Easy- multiple albums, ratings, keywords, labels, and categories with the Easy- Select bars to display files Select List these selections in the File pane. matching To the Easy- Select bar: use Select the indicator to the left of one or more items in the Catalog pane to display the files in the File List pane that match the specific set of criteria. Database The ACDSee pane) in is Any organizing you do using categories, ratings, or labels (on the Catalog pane or the Properties stored embed the If you choose to, you can then also database. this information in each individual file, making it ACDSee easier to relocate and share files, or retrieve the information from the file if you need to. Changing Views select You can your different views to display files in the File List pane, including thumbnail previews and file the details. can also customize the appearance and size of thumbnails, and specify You information displayed in the Details view. To Change the File List View: the following: from In Manage mode, in the File List pane, under View , select Views of Page 46 334

47 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Displays file and details in a list, and adds a thumbnail preview to the Thumbs+Details names Filename column. previews of your files in a single row across the bottom of Displays Filmstrip thumbnail in pane, displays the currently selected file and an expanded the File List pane. Preview thumbnail previews of all image and media files in the File List pane. Thumbnails Displays customize You appearance of thumbnails, and specify what information can the with display them. to each file in the File List pane on a "tile" that includes Tiles thumbnail Displays a and information. You can resize the file using the Zoom slider. preview tiles Displays files in a list, represented by large default system Icons for each file icons type. Displays a of file names and extensions. List list file, a file names and details about each of such as size, format, Displays list Details date. You can and the appearance of the Details view mode, creation customize explained below, and specify what information it displays. as visible or Controls whether overlay icons are invisible, visible in grayscale, in Mode Toggle Overlay Use ( ] ) key to choose. the color. through. Controls which overlay icon is colored. Use the ( [ ) key to rotate Overlay Highlight the Details View Customizing or can the Details view to automatically You columns, display set hide grid lines, and select an entire row resize which select view, Details when you select a column entry in that row. You can also change the appearance of the columns to customize the column order. display, and Columns Set Column Order: Select and To Manage mode, from the File List drop- down, click View | 1. Details . In Choose In Choose Details dialog box, do the or more of the following: 2. one add a the select a folder or detail name in To Available Details pane, and then click Add . column, Adding folder adds all detail names within the folder. a Currently remove column, select To detail name in the a Displayed Details pane, and then click a Remove . To move a column to the left in the File List pane, select its name in the Currently Displayed Details pane and click Move Up . To move column to the right in the File List pane, select its name in the Currently Displayed a pane . click Move Down Details and Click . 3. OK can click Reset to display only the You column names in the Currently Displayed Details pane, and default you can also move a column in the File List pane by dragging its header to a new position. A vertical line indicates the column will be inserted. where Filtering Files You can use the Filter By options pane. identify the types of files and folders you want to display in the File List to Pane: List the File To Filter Files in of Page 47 334

48 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio one of following: Do the | Click and select a filter option. Filter View By Filter down and select a filter option. the Click drop- your thumbnails seem to disappear, click Filter | All and they reappear. If all a To Filter: Create Custom one the following: Do of 1. | Filter By | Advanced Filters Click View . the drop- down and Filter Advanced Filters . Click select Select Apply filtering 2. . criteria 3. or clear one or more of the following options to show or hide that file or folder type in the File List Select pane: Show files image Show media files Show folders archive files Show Show that files and folders to show files and folders Select are normally hidden by hidden your operating system. Show thumbnail files to show Select files. THM Click OK . 4. Grouping Files images into images organize If you have to browse a lot of to in the File List you should consider using Group By they different may find it easier to find images when You are organized into groups. For example, if you groups. use more than one camera, you can quickly organize your images according to the camera you used to capture the you images. if you save your images into different file formats Similarly, can quickly organize your images according to their file format. Thumbs Group By only works in the Thumbs, Details, + Details, Tiles, and Icons views. The Edited group is particularly useful for finding images that you have edited. State Group Files in the File List: To Browse 1. the folder or folders containing your files. to 2. Do one of the following: Click | Group By and select a group option. View Click the Group drop- down and select a group option. Navigating Through Groups in the File List Groups: Specific and Collapse To Expand of Page 48 334

49 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard group the Collapse arrows, on the left side of the or header. Click Expand Expand and Collapse All Groups: To click a group header, and then select either Open All Right- or Close All Groups . Groups To a Preview of the Images in a Closed Group: Display Hover your over the group header. cursor Scroll Through Multiple Groups: To Click the Next Group and Previous Group buttons at the bottom of the File List scroll bar. To Display Table of Contents: the one the following: Do of View | Group By | Table of Contents Click . Click Group drop- down list the select Table of Contents . and At the bottom of the File List scroll bar, click the Table of Contents button. To Jump to a Specific Group: Quickly 1. Display the table of contents. 2. Click the group that you want to display. Order Groups: the of To Change the Sort Do one following: of the | . By and select either Group Forward or Group Backward View Click Group Forward the down and select either Group drop- or Group Backward . Click Group Groups from the File List Removing Remove To Group: a one of following: Do the | View By | None . Click Group the Group Click down list and select None . drop- Selecting Files in One or More Groups To Select Files in Groups: Do one of the following: Click the header to select all of the files in that group. group headers and the CTRL Press and click two or more group hold to select all of the files in those groups. key Sorting Files your In mode, you can sort your files according to different file properties to quickly organize Manage images, find files specific and create a range of files, with similar attributes for easy selection. the in List: File To Sort Items of Page 49 334

50 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Click View Sort By , and then select a sort option: 1. | Filename (KB) Size Image Type Modified Date Image Properties Caption Rating Tagged (sort by metadata, EXIF, file properties, More attributes, IPTC information, or multimedia image attributes) By To the direction of the sort, click View | 2. set , and then select a direction: Sort Sort Forward Sort Backward pane Your sort settings are saved until you change them. For example, if you sort images in the File List you according the images will remain sorted according to Rating until Rating, change the sort settings. to Files Using Column Headers Sorting files can quickly sort using in Details view mode You column headings. To Files Using a Column Header: Sort 1. Click direction. column header. An arrow appears, indicating the sort a direction. 2. Click the column header again to change the sort Custom Files Sorting in You custom sorting to customize the order of files use the File List pane. After custom sorting your files, can ACDSee automatically saves the file order for the selected folder until you change it or delete the custom sort order. Customize the Sorting Order of Your Files: To 1. Select one or more files. new 2. the selected files to a Drag location in the File List. sort To delete a custom View order, click | Sort By , and then select Delete Custom Sort . Selecting Files folders the List pane, you can select all of your files In File at once, select all of the files in the current folder, and select only the image files, or clear your selection entirely. whenever You also set an option to automatically select new files can you add them to the File List. Click Tools | set to option. this Options | File List of Page 50 334

51 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Select Your or Folders: To Files thumbnail Click the file. to a select to more than one file. click select + CTRL to SHIFT a number of files in a row. + click select to the side in Click file list pane to clear your selection. off the Select Files or Folders Using the Menu: To Your Manage mode, click Edit . 1. In one of the following: 2. Select All : Selects all files and subfolders in Select current folder. the Select Files : Selects all files in the current folder. All All Images Selects all image files in the current folder. Select : regardless Tagged all tagged image files Selects of their folder. Select : by Rating : Displays a list of Select and selects all files currently assigned to the rating ratings, you select. Selection Clears your selection. Clear : Selection : Selects Invert files except for your original selections. all Previewing Images displays pane Preview pane. You can preview image, audio, and video files in the Preview a By default, the resize thumbnail selected image or media file. You can currently the pane to adjust the thumbnail the of display reposition the pane anywhere on your screen. You can set the Preview pane to dimensions, highlights and of the image's EXIF information for quick reference. To Open Close the Preview Pane: or one of the following: Do Click Panes | Preview . Press CTRL + Shift + P . Pane: To Show or Hide What Displays in the Preview the options You can customize the click displayed in the Preview pane when you have an image displaying. Right- of image the Preview pane, select Image and Information , and then select one in the following: a Show : Displays only Image preview of the image. Displays Show Information : information EXIF about the image. This is called the Information palette. The Palette Information The Information palette provides immediate access to the most useful elements of an image's EXIF information. It includes: Model and Camera Name Lens Dimensions File Size of Page 51 334

52 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Program Exposure White Balance Metering Mode Flash RAW) blank that are not files RAW (will for be ISO F- Stop Speed Shutter Exposure Compensation Focal Length are unsure If a certain symbol means, you can hover your mouse over it for a pop- up you what explanation. To Customize the Preview Info: can customize what information displays at the bottom of the Information You section of the Preview pane. palette The and time that the image was taken is selected by default. date Right- the the date and time at the bottom of the Information palette in 1. Preview pane. click Click Info... Preview 2. Choose under In Choose Details dialog box, select 3. item listed the Currently Displayed Details and press the the Remove button. pressing and it Details 4. From the Available the column, choose an item by checking the checkbox next to Add button. Click OK . 5. Preview Audio or Video Files: To Click Tools | 1. | Preview . Options 2. Check the Preview audio and video clips checkbox. 3. Click OK . deselect The Information palette also displays in View and Edit mode. To turn off the Information palette, or Panes Info Palette under the View menu in Edit mode, mode. View menu in Rotating Images You can rotate images in Manage and View modes using the Rotate icons in the bottom toolbar. rotate When you a unedited JPEG images, ACDSee performs lossless rotation. To Images: Rotate 1. In Manage mode images. View mode, select one or more or toolbar. bottom 2. Click the Rotate Left or Rotate Right icon in the Icons Rotate of Page 52 334

53 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Left Rotates image 90° to the left. Rotate the right. Rotates 90° to the image the Right Rotate Images Comparing use the Compare Images feature to compare a group of images. The tool You both the similarities can highlights the in the properties, metadata, and pixel intensity levels differences images you select. You can save your and of images to a new location on your hard drive, or tag images you would like selected in Manage mode, and preferred delete, then rename, or alter the images. move, Compare Images: To that the List pane, select 1. images File you want to compare. In the Click Tools | Compare Images... . Up to four images display in the Compare Images Viewer. 2. To change which image displays in the comparison view, do one or more of the following: 3. Send the List, right- click an image and click In to Active View (indicated by a pale Comparison box). Compare the in Viewer. In the Comparison List, drag an image to a box Images In the Images Viewer, right- click an image and click Next Image or Previous Image . Compare click In Images Viewer, right- click an image and Compare File | Remove From View or click the the Remove icon in the image toolbar. 4. tag images, do one of the following: To In the Comparison List, click the checkbox that is located at the bottom of the image on the right side. or In the Compare Images Viewer, right- click an image and click Tag click the the Tag icon in image toolbar. the Tag All button in the bottom left corner to tag all Click the images, or click Untag All to of all of the images. untag an To rate images, right- click Rating image, click Set 5. , and then select an appropriate rating. , 6. categorize images, right- click an image, click Set Categories To and then select an appropriate category (or create an appropriate category). corner. 7. Click OK , located in the bottom right Toolbar Images Compare of Page 53 334

54 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Swaps the image with the previous image in the Comparison Previous selected List. image selected image with the next Next in the Comparison List. Swaps the In Increases the magnification of the selected Zoom image. Zoom Reduces the magnification of the selected image. Out options: menu a menu of zoom Zoom Select from the following Opens options. Actual : Displays the Size at its original size. image Fit Image : Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in Compare Images Viewer. the between Width the image to fit Displays the left and right Fit : of the sides Images Viewer. Compare Fit : Displays the image Height fit between the top and to bottom of the Compare Images Viewer. the Zoom Displays all images at : zoom option of the Lock current image. If the zoom is adjusted, the new zoom level is applied to all images that you view. zoom a select can Zoom To : Opens a dialog box where you option. Pan Locks the panned image area, so that when you zoom and pan an image Lock the to area, the Compare Images Viewer displays specific same area a for all images you view. Exposure warning Indicates pixels that may be over or underexposed. the Properties for each image in properties Compare Images Viewer. Click Displays the Metadata Setup button to specify which file properties are displayed. file Compare Images tool displays the The properties in a field below image. each are Differences in properties bolded, while similarities are displayed in font. regular the Displays for each image in histogram Compare Images Viewer. Histogram a Setup Metadata a dialog box where you can select the metadata to display for Opens each image in the Compare Images Viewer (ensure Properties is toggled to on). Image Displays one One in the Compare Images Viewer. image Two Images Displays two images in the Compare Images Viewer. Three Images Displays three images in the Compare Images Viewer. Compare the Viewer. Images Four Images Displays four images in of Page 54 334

55 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Pane If image is displayed, this button opens the Properties, Histogram, Properties one and Glass, panes. Magnifying Navigator the Opens file. Help Help Image Toolbars image in the Compare Images tool has a toolbar Each below it. You can use this toolbar to adjust each located image individually. with Opens dialog box where you can save the Save a a different file image name and a different file format. Previous Swaps the displayed image with the previous image in the Comparison List. Next the displayed image with the next image in the Comparison List. Swaps In Increases the magnification of the image. Zoom Zoom Reduces the magnification of the image. Out Delete Deletes the image from your hard drive. Remove the image from the Comparison List. Removes Tag Tags the image so that it will remain selected when you close the Compare Images tool. Gathering Images in the Image Basket or locations Once folders. You can use the Image Basket to gather and hold images and media files from different in you in the Image Basket, you can use any of the tools or features items ACDSee to edit, share, or placed have those files. view To Use the Image Basket: To open the Image mode, in Manage 1. click Panes | Image Basket . Basket, 2. the File List pane, select the files you want to In Drag the items to the Image Basket, or right- click a add. selected item and select Add to Image Basket . or 3. To remove one more files, right- click the file, and then select Remove from Image Basket . Basket, 4. all files, right- click the Image remove and then select Clear Image Basket . To You can also add images to the Image Basket by dragging them from Windows Explorer. Cataloging Managing Files in ACDSee and In addition to its you viewing, and editing capabilities, ACDSee features integrated management tools browsing, (tools that alter can can use to organize and sort your images and media files. These tools include batch functions of Page 55 334

56 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio adjust multiple at the same time), category and rating systems, and a powerful database to hold all of your or files information. important image resize, the functions to convert the file format, rotate, batch rename, and adjust the time can ACDSee use You exposure stamp a single image, a group of images all at once. With the category, color label, and rating or the of can create a virtual folder structure, and use it to find related images and systems, files with a single you media click. file properties and image information in an easily accessible Properties pane that you can use to ACDSee displays and Metadata. file information, including ACDSee add You can add an author, description, notes, and directly edit rating your and adjust the category and files, assignments at the same time. keywords to with Organizing Catalog Pane the The pane is one of the most useful panes in ACDSee as it provides many ways to catalog, sort, group, Catalog for, and your files. search manage Categories related easy way to organize your Categories into context- an sections. When you assign a file to a are files you do not move the file from its folder or create an extra copy. Your categories can be simple or complex category, use icons names you choose. There are different and to use for different categories to help you identify them any a group, Once your files are in categories, you can search, sort, at and find them by category. glance. or way assign One to a category is to select and drag one to more files from the file list and drop them onto the files file A is belong category. Any file that can assigned to a category has a blue tab above its thumbnail in the File List. to multiple but it will only have one blue tab. For comprehensive categories management, use the categories, tab the Properties pane. Organize of Keywords that is highly efficient way to group Keywording in hierarchies a make sense to you and find them quickly in files an expanding tree. The hierarchical tree of keywords you have created in the Organize tab of the Properties pane is need displayed Keywords section of the Catalog pane without the the to select an image . Utilize this group to in manage your keywords on the fly by using the context menu (right- click). Keyword quickly by dragging a keyword an onto image , or by dragging an image onto a keyword. Ratings from You can assign a numerical rating Once 1 to 5 to your images and files. you have assigned ratings, you can search, sort, catalog your files based on the ratings, or a combination of ratings, categories, auto categories and number A can have only etc. rating. When a file has a rating, the file appears on top of the thumbnail in the one File List pane. Color Labels Color labels can be used in many ways to help you catalog your files. You can use different colors to represent can different your workflow. As you review your photos you of assign them to the color labels and rename stages them accordingly. Auto Categories Most digital cameras create and embed information about called file as you take a photo. This information is the settings in camera used metadata and can include the name and model of the camera, the file size, shutter speed, of Page 56 334

57 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio shot and more. ACDSee uses this information to create auto categories. When you click on an auto the much ACDSee category images containing that metadata. You can select one or more auto categories to searches , for also example, of a for size, taken by a particular camera. You can photos add to this data using find files, certain panes. Properties the Saved Searches find yourself creating the same search criteria frequently, you can save the If to use again later. Saved you search appear the top of the Search pane but they also appear in the Catalog pane for you to re- run using a searches at bar. click name or in the white checkbox of the Easy- select the single on create new saved search a the Catalog pane: To from In the 1. Searches area of the Catalog pane, click the New saved search icon. Saved The pane opens. Search Enter your criteria and then click the Saved searches icon. 2. search the saved appears in the Saved Searches new the Catalog pane and in search Saved Searches The on down list of the Search pane. drop- Special Items can use Special Items to quickly view all of the images in your database and any uncategorized images . You Select one the following items: of database. Well all images cataloged in the ACDSee Displays If you have a substantial image Image : it may take a few moments to gather all collection, the information. of Embed : Displays all the files with database data that Pending changed but has not yet been has embedded in the files. a to assigned been Uncategorized : Displays any images cataloged in the database that have not category. No any images cataloged in the database that have no ACDSee keywords assigned. Keywords: Displays Displays the tagged images on the computer. : all Tagged assign a rating or category to any type of file, You the options in the Special Items area only apply to can but images. The ACDSee Database and Embedded Data you assign a is to a rating, or category, this information When stored in the ACDSee database. If you choose to, file you also embed this information in each individual file, making it easier to relocate and share files, or retrieve can database, information the file if you need to. As the from information is always associated with a particular file. the If you move or rename files using an application other than ACDSee (like Windows Explorer) the link between the and file the ACDSee database will be broken. If this happens, and you have embedded the information in each file, you can the database and retrieve all the information. rebuild can keywords use the Properties pane to add information to the ACDSee database like captions, You and much also makes Taking time to assign categories and add keywords, notes, etc., more. it much easier to find and the organize your files. ACDSee uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file. Only some file formats and file extensions TIF. support include GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, PSD, and These In the case of these file formats, the XMP. ACDSee Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee XMP, support not do and still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata. For formats that currently of Page 57 334

58 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio RAW and the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder including ABR, them file. sidecar file is separate from the file itself, you need to rename or move a Because its as you lose the ACDSee Metadata could together, or permanently. Bars Select Easy- Select bars are the indicators on the left side of the Folders and The panes. You can use the Easy- Easy- Catalog indicators select multiple folders or categories, and display their contents in the File List pane. In the to Select to you also use the Easy- Select indicators can select combinations of categories, ratings, auto pane Catalog saved searches, and special items. For example, you categories, display all your photos with a rating of 1 could that to the category People. belonged can also the Easy- Select indicators with the Selective Browsing pane ( View | Selective Browsing ). You use pane use Match Any/All you and the Easy- Select indicators together, the Catalog the becomes a When buttons search tool for finding unique sets of files. powerful Use the Easy- Select Bar: To the In pane, select the indicator to the left of each item with contents you want to display. The indicator Catalog orientation the point to changes item you have selected. to not you a category, If or combination that does select have any files that match, the File List rating, is files message click displays a to and shows no thumbnails. The quickest way to return to a folder with the arrow. back To View Cataloged Files: one or more categories, ratings, auto categories, saved searches, or special items. Files assigned to Select classifications are displayed in the File List pane. those the Contents bar at items top of the File List pane displays whatever categories or The are currently selected. specific You browse through specific categories, ratings, or items within can folders using the Selective Browsing pane. Match All Match Any affects There are two Match All/ Match Any drop- down lists on the Catalog pane; one at the top of the pane that affect the categories and one that affects saved searches. You can use the Match All and Any options to of display thumbnails the File List in the following way: in Match All : To be included, a file has to belong to all the categories or searches you select. So the file has display to be in both or all of the categories or searches before it will more in the File List. Match All is files exclusive. use it to limit the number of can that display and narrow a search down. You Match Any files To be included, a file can belong to any of the categories or searches you select. So any : more inclusive. in the selected categories or searches will display in the File List. Match any is Catalog Icons of Page 58 334

59 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Identifies files have been assigned to a category. Category that 5 file ratings. 1- Identifies Ratings search Opens the Search pane New that you can create a new Saved so search. saved search Displays the Save/Save As menu so Saved can save a you search. auto Select Selects the category, rating, (selected) category, or other item Easy- indicator display in the File for pane. List Easy- indicator (not selected) Does not Select the category, rating, auto category, or select other item for display in the File List pane. Match Any/All which images are displayed in the File List pane. Controls Options hide icons in To Catalog pane, click Tools | the , and then select Catalog . Deselect the Show the Icons checkbox in the Options dialog box. Creating Categories Create and manage a system of categories for your files in the Organize tab of the Properties pane. You can easily way customize category system in a your that makes sense to you. categories. also can You Select the Organize tab in the Properties pane to create, rename, delete, and move your access the pane by choosing Panes | Categories . Categories Create Category: To a Do one of the following: 1. and click Right- in the Catalog pane, a then select New Category . category In Manage mode, click Edit | Set Categories | New Category . 2. Select of the following: one a category top- level Create new, a Create category within the current selection sub- 3. If you are creating a sub- category, select a top- level (or parent) category from the drop- down list. (If you right- clicked a category in the Catalog pane, the new sub- category will be added below that category by default.) 4. a name for the new category Type the Name field. in 5. Click OK . When you create a new top- level category, you can select an icon to help identify the category. The Icon Options drop- only appears if the Show Icons checkbox is selected on the Catalog page of the down Options dialog In Manage mode, click Tools | box. , and then select Catalog . Manage Categories Categories: Your To Manage of Page 59 334

60 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a category the Catalog pane, and do one of the following: Select in the drag it to the new location. move category, To the category, right- click the selected category and select Edit To edit . delete category, right- click the selected category and the Delete . To select Easy- Access Category Sets Create you have a long list of categories, or would like to break your categories up into different If or areas of events interest, can use the Edit Category Sets feature. you Create Easy- Category Sets: To Access create the First you want in your set. 1. categories In the Properties pane, click the Quick Categories drop- down list and select 2. Quick Categories . Manage 3. your commonly used categories into the entry fields. For sub- Enter use the pipe key. Example: categories, A|B|C. 4. Click the Save button. Category Quick list. down 5. Click OK . This category set will be listed in the drop- category 6. or more files and click a button in the one set. The category will be assigned to the Select to files. The button text color will change assigned indicate that the category is selected to currently only selected and will display in italics if assigned to files, some (but not all) of the currently selected files. tree. Make sure the category button name matches the category name in the category and Ratings Categories Assigning and Searching categories, You assign files to a rating, or one or more can without moving the file or making an extra copy. click If the Properties pane or Catalog pane is not visible in Manage mode, Properties Panes | or Panes | . Catalog Quickly Assign Ratings 1. Hover over a thumbnail to display the gray box with diagonal line through it. 2. Click the gray box to make your selection. Rating: Select a Example of Hovering Over a Thumbnail to 1. of Page 60 334

61 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 2. 3. icons display in Thumbnail view only. The hover quickly keyboard + 0 - 5 to CTRL rate a file. the shortcut Use number you select can be reflected as a The rating in other applications. Give your favorite rating star a rating, and your least high shots a low rating. shots favorite and Search Categories and Ratings in the Catalog Assign Pane The pane allows you to both assign categories and ratings as well as search them. Catalog in Assign Categories or Ratings to the Catalog Pane: To Files In Manage mode, do one of the following: 1. selected to Drag a category or rating in the Catalog pane. files Catalog Drag or rating from the category pane to selected files. the click click or out, Right- fly the files, and then click Set Categories and click the category in the Set Rating click the rating. and In 2. mode, do one of the following: View Click Edit | Set Categories and then click the category to which you want to assign the file. the Right- the file, click Set Categories , and then click click category to which you want to assign the file. Edit Click | file. Set Rating and then click the rating to which you want to assign the click the the file, click Set Rating , and then click the rating to which you want to assign Right- file. a On the status bar, click the rating icon, and then click a new rating. This icon only appears once is rating set. of Page 61 334

62 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard them, If comparing imagesand want to categorize are do one of the following: 3. you click one of the files, click Set Categories , and then click the category to Right- you want which to the file. assign click click of the files, click Set Rating , Right- then one the rating to which you want to and assign the file. Ratings embedded by ACDSee can be seen in other applications supporting xmp:rating and vice versa. To embed metadata one or more selected files click Tools | Metadata | Embed ACDSee Metadata | into In Files Embed . Selected Tree the Menu (Right- Click) Use the Category Context to Do the Following: in Assign Items Remove Items Create Category New Search Cut Copy Paste Delete Edit Category To Search a Category or Rating in the Catalog Pane: display Click Category name or Rating number to the all corresponding files in the File List pane. the in Pane Properties Assign Categories and Ratings The Properties provides another way to assign categories and ratings. pane Assign Properties to Ratings in the To Pane: Files files In File 1. pane, select the the you want to assign a rating. List 2. In the Properties pane, select the Metadata tab. the 3. the rating you want these files to have from the numbers listed at Click top of the Properties pane. To Assign Files to Categories in the Properties Pane: List 1. In the File the pane, select files you want to assign a rating. 2. In Properties pane, select the Organize tab. the to Click 3. you want these files the have from your Categories list. category Assign files quickly with a category sets button. See Create Easy- Access Category Sets . Remove or Ratings from Files Categories You can remove a file from a category or rating without moving or deleting the original file, or affecting any other files assigned to that classification. from Ratings or Files: To Remove Categories of Page 62 334

63 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In the List pane, select the files you want to remove. 1. File one 2. following: of Do the Clear selected then click Set Rating | and Rating . a file, click Right- selected file, Right- Set Categories , and then click the name of the category from click a click want to remove the file, or which remove all categories, click Uncategorize All Selected you to . Items a checkbox category or a radio button for a rating in the Catalog pane. Clear for a a category or rating in the Catalog pane, and then click Remove Items . Right- click Color Labels Assigning labels Color useful for naming and quickly identifying your processing plans for your images. Different colors are example, be represent different stages of your workflow. For to as you review your photos you can can used label files to upload, print, reject, review, or sharpen, or any other term that matches your workflow quickly Once you files have been labeled, needs. can click a color label in the Catalog pane to instantly display all of your files that to the label. assigned or can use color labels in combination with You Group by, also Filter By features to refine your list. Color labels, the tagging, them moving without like photos categories, and ratings, are a way to set aside, organize, and group your into folders. different the Properties pane or Catalog pane is not visible in Manage mode, click Panes | Properties or Panes If Catalog . | Create a Color Label Set so by creating a label set specified you can quickly select and assign Begin labels. Once you have a label set in corresponding place, can assign your images to the appropriate labels you to your workflow. To Create a Color Label Set: 1. . In the Catalog pane, click the Labels settings button and select Edit Label Sets Save icon. 2. Enter names for your labels and click the 3. Click As from the Save Label Set dialog box. Save Enter a name for your new label set. 4. 5. Click OK . them Once have created color label sets, you can access you from the Catalog pane by clicking the Labels settings and button the selecting from drop- down list. Before assigning a color label, make sure the intended label set is in active. label set name is shown active brackets in the label header. The Assign Color Labels Your You Assign Color Labels to Can Files by Using the Following: view thumbnail Hover icons in Catalog pane pane Properties of Page 63 334

64 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio menu in and View mode Edit Manage menu Context Keyboard shortcuts XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file. Only some file formats and file extensions ACDSee uses In These GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, PSD, and TIF. include the case of these file formats, the support XMP. Metadata is embedded inside ACDSee file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee the and be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata. For formats that currently do not support XMP, still sidecar RAW ABR, the ACDSee Metadata is written to a including file that is stored in the same folder and rename as them move or its file. Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself, you need to together, could lose the ACDSee Metadata permanently. you or can also View labels from the status bar in You and Edit mode. set To Assign a Color Label Using the Label Line Hover Icon in Thumbnail View: 1. the Hover over a thumbnail to display gray label icon. 2. the gray label icon to make your selection. Click Example of Hovering Over a Thumbnail to Click and Select a Color Label: 1. 2. 3. all. to the label Use the overlay icon on one of a number of selected images to assign of Page 64 334

65 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Assign a Label to a File Using the Catalog Pane: Color To Manage mode, do one of the following: In 1. selected files to a color Drag in the Catalog pane. label Drag color label from the Catalog pane to selected files. the Assign Files to Color Labels in the Properties Pane: To 1. In the File List pane, select the files you want to assign a color rating. 2. In Properties pane, select the color label from the boxes along the top. the Menu Assign Labels Using the Edit Color in Manage and View Mode: To Click Edit | Set Label and then select a color. To Color Labels with the Context Menu: Assign Right- click the file, click Set Label , then select a label name. To Assign Color Labels Using Keyboard Shortcuts: (exactly as same the Keyboard shortcuts are available for the five color labels, plus Alt- 0 to clear the label ratings, except is used instead of Ctrl) Alt 1 Alt- 2 Alt- Alt- 3 Alt- 4 Alt- 5 0 Alt- Images to Search a Label Assigned Database Search To in the All Assigned to a Label: Images Click the color label in the Catalog pane to display all corresponding files in the File List pane. Use Search box. the Use Quick Search. To Search All Images in the File List Assigned to a Label: Click drop- the Filter down above the File List pane and select a label name. All files assigned to that label in the current file will be selected. list List Select Images To the File All Assigned to a Label: in Use Alt- 1 through Alt- 5 for the five colors, plus Alt- 0 to clear the label, (exactly the same as ratings, except it uses Alt of Ctrl). instead Removing Sets Labels and Color Label Color File: a Label from To Remove a Color of Page 65 334

66 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard remove In List pane, select one or more files you want to File a label from. 1. the Do one of the following: 2. click a selected file, and then click Set Label | Right- Label . Clear In Properties pane, click the gray unlabeled icon. the Delete Label Set: To a In the Catalog pane, click 1. Labels settings button and select Edit Label Sets . the 2. Select the set you want to delete from the Labels Sets drop- down list. 3. Click delete button. the Collections Creating is a powerful grouping and search query tool. Collections can use the Collections pane to group accumulated You photos based on a common variable, such as the camera used, location, or size. You could also use Collections to group for sorting, processing, sharing, and much more. photos Collection Collection Set Smart Collection To Create a Collection: with tabbed and Catalog 1. In Manage mode, at the bottom of the Folders pane, select Collections , which is Calendar. 2. the Collections pane, right- click and select Create Collection... from the context menu. In as In Create Collection dialog box, configure the options 3. described below. the 4. Press the Create button. Create Collection Dialog Box Options Name a name for your collection. Enter Location Inside a Collection inside Select this checkbox if you would like to place this collection collection Set another previously- created of set, thereby developing a to hierarchy. Select the collection set you would like your add image to the drop- down menu. from Include photos selected Select this checkbox to include any currently selected Options in the photos collection. designate as Select this checkbox Set target this collection as the target to collection collection for images you will add photos to. You will be able to quickly images directly to this collection by selecting images send and pressing Ctrl+Alt+C . To customize the keyboard shortcut, see Keyboard Shortcuts . Customizing Collection: Add Photos to a To the of following: one Do of Page 66 334

67 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard the File pane, select the image (s) before using the Create Collection command described above. List In the the selected photos checkbox inside Include Create Collection dialog box. enable Then the File List pane, right- click the image (s) and choose Collections | Add to | [ name of In the collection ]. to and image (s) from the File List pane the the collection inside the Collections pane. Drag drop the image in the Select List pane. In the Organize tab of the Properties pane, in the Collections group, File select the checkbox next to the collection. To Set a Collection as Your Target Collection: You can a specific collection as the target collection, allowing you to quickly add images to it using a keyboard set the A shortcut. will display a blue circle icon next to it in target Collections pane. You cannot set a collection smart collection as a target. Do one of the following: collection When collection, enable the Set as target a checkbox in the Create Collection dialog creating box. Right- click a collection in the Collections pane and choose Set as Target Collection . To Images to Target Collections: Add Select key. image and press the Ctrl+Alt+C the . Shortcuts Keyboard Customizing You can customize this keyboard shortcut. See To Search Collections: for can the for collections, collection sets, and smart collections in the Filter Collections field at the top of You search Collections pane. collection, the (or portion of the name), of Enter name, smart collection, or collection set you are the looking for. If the collection you are searching for is part of a collection set, the search will return the root Filter collection if one of the sub- collections contains the text you entered in the set Collections field. Collection: To an Image from a Remove 1. Select the collection. from 2. Right- click the image and choose Collections | Remove . Selected Collection This will remove the image from the collection and will not delete the image. only can by multiple images from a collection at once You selecting them all and then right- clicking remove choosing and | Remove from Selected Collection . Collections Remove an Image from All Collections: To To remove an image from all collections, right- click the image and choose Collections | Remove from all collections . collections will remove the image from This only and will not delete the image. all clicking can remove multiple images from all collections at once by selecting them all and then right- You collections from all . and choosing Collections | Remove of Page 67 334

68 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Sets Collections create a collection set and add other collection folders inside. You can use this method to create a You can further images You cannot add images to collection sets themselves. You can only add for hierarchy organization. images (collections) of collection sets. Selecting the root folders a collection set will display all of the inside in to of of collections inside of the root. the all a Collection Set: Create To In the 1. pane, right- click and select Create Collection Set... from the context menu. Collections 2. the Create Collection Set dialog box, enter a name for your collection set. In Select set Inside a Collection Set checkbox if you would like to add your collection 3. inside of another the set. collection the collection set from the drop- down menu. Select Click . 4. Create Add Collection to To Sets: Collections one of the following: Do dialog Collection Create the Select the Inside a Collection Set checkbox while creating a collection inside box. Select collection set from the drop- down menu. the the the pane, drag In drop the collection from Collections root level to the collection set. and Smart Collections Smart collections are collections with queries built into them based on search criteria you specify. These search in queries saved to the database. When you catalog new images get the future, those that fit the criteria of your will search query show automatically up in your smart collection. You can also create a search query to locate files based on date they were cataloged. the Search Create To Collection and Add a Criteria to Your Query: Smart 1. In the Collections pane, right- click and select Create Smart Collection... from the context menu. the 2. the Create Smart Collection dialog box, configure In options as described below. 3. Press the OK button. Options Box Collection Dialog Create Smart of Page 68 334

69 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Enter a for your smart collection. Name name recommended It give your smart collection a name that is you search save assigned to it. This will the you reflective of query out of open it to find to what it contains. time the having a Collection Set Select Location checkbox if you would like Inside this place collection inside of to this created previously- another set, thereby developing a collection the collection set hierarchy. Select would like add your smart you to to the drop- down collection from menu. Press the Add button to select search criteria Match your query. In the for Add Criteria dialog box, choose criteria by clicking the plus + Search to expand tree and toggling the checkboxes on and off to signs the criteria properties. OK . Your chosen Press will appear in select your Match field box. Refine each item by clicking the underlined the and option an variables from the drop- down, or entering a selecting into field. number the example, if you chose Size as your search criteria, click "is" For and select not", "is less than", "is "is than or equal to", "is greater less between". "0" the click than", "is greater than or equal to", or "is Then and enter size value. the Remove from Your Search Query: To Criteria the criteria from the Match field and select Remove . Select To Edit Search Query: Your Collections Right- your smart 1. in the click pane and choose Edit . collection 2. In the Edit Smart Collection dialog box, add and remove search criteria as described above. 3. OK . Click Using the Properties Pane The Properties pane displays all the metadata about your files. It also displays file properties such as file size, can creation date, and read- only or hidden status. You change, use the Properties pane to add, or delete the metadata for and media files. image default. Properties is open in Manage mode on the right of the File The pane by pane The Properties pane is List available all modes except 365 in and Photos mode . mode To Open the Properties Pane in Any Mode: Click Panes Properties . | fields. Metadata offers adjustable The for metadata panel Simply hover between a corresponding width toggle and field to display the double arrow cursor. Click and drag to adjust width. Double- click to label in pane. the label between the width of the longest label in the group or the longest of Page 69 334

70 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Pane Areas Properties Organize pane into 3 tabs: Metadata tab, divided tab, and File tab. The is Properties overlay icons, Use appear as you hover over a thumbnail, to tag, rate and add color labels to the which images. Alternatively, you can display these setting in the Properties pane by clicking Tools | your | Options Pane and selecting Show Tagged, Rating, and Color Labels . Properties Tab Metadata Metadata tab displays the rating, category, IPTC, EXIF, and ACDSee Metadata stored with a photo. The The for ACDSee are available for you to enter the caption fields your photographs as well as date, author, and Metadata notes. The keywords field is display- only and can be entered in the Organize tab. The label field can be entered here or from the Labels section in the Catalog pane. IPTC information is automatically embedded into your selected but image, Metadata is not embedded in your files, ACDSee instead is held in the database. ACDSee while Metadata can be embedded into all your files (or just selected ones) by clicking the Tools | Metadata | Embed ACDSee command. Metadata The IPTC data fields provide a standard means for entering and storing information about your photographs such supports as creator, and copyright information. ACDSee description, fields defined in IPTC Core 1.1. and model, camera GPS The EXIF data fields hold information captured by your camera such as shutter speed, information. Certain are no longer visible by default. The fields Artist, Copyright, Image Description, and Date/Time EXIF EXIF fields are automatically modified when their matching IPTC fields are modified, (see table below). This Original (MWG). reflects recommendations of the Metadata Working Group the If you need to change these fields have visible in the EXIF section you can adjust your settings by clicking Tools | Options | Properties Pane and clicking the Metadata Views button. Manage Matching and EXIF Fields IPTC IPTC EXIF Description writes to Image Description Creator writes to Artist Copyright Notice writes to Copyright Original Date Created writes to Date/Time is mapping. without When ACDSee parses metadata from a file, the content of the field displayed Organize Tab The Organize tab displays a tree of categories and a tree of keywords. The Category tree context- menu (right- sub- click) you to add and delete categories and allows categories. You can create category sets to quickly also categorize your files. Right- clicking the Keyword tree to allows the same options. Use the keyword tree create way a easily organize your files in a to that holds meaning for you. hierarchy File Tab The File change displays detailed file information and image attributes for a selected file or files. You can set or tab a in contained the Read- Only and Hidden properties of a file or folder, and view a summary of any EXIF information file. of Page 70 334

71 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard ACDSee Metadata Files Embedding into renamed, have your files and they are copied, moved, or in outside of ACDSee , the link you metadata If file between the database will be broken, but you can rebuild the database using the embedded the and in the file. data uses XMP to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file. Only some file ACDSee and file extensions formats support These include GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, PSD, and TIF. In the case of these file formats, the XMP. Metadata you embedded inside the file and so ACDSee can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee is For still able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata. be formats that currently do not support XMP, and including RAW and ABR, the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder as its Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself, you need to rename or move them file. or permanently. could lose the ACDSee Metadata together, you the Pane Using Map the Map pane to add photo locations from anywhere Use the world to your photos. You can then recall and view in that information for reference at any time. Use the map to select groups of files for further workflow steps, and select photos display in View mode. for on location files displayed in the The pane is based of the latitude and longitude information in the file Map properties. If you have a camera with geotagging capabilities, the geographic location is automatically conveyed to visually the map. You can also add map coordinates on files by dragging them directly onto the map and button. All Save the pressing Geotagged images on the map with pins. You can click a pin on the map to select files within a are indicated the for location processing. If your geotagged image pin is not displayed on viewing map, try using geographic or keyboard shortcut F5 to refresh the map. the following file formats can be added to the map: JPG, TIFF, RAW, DNG, and PNG. The automatically information, file ACDSee including geographical tags, to the database as you browse. adds if to have a large number of files, you may want to catalog those files first However, speed up the you Tools time loading pins on the map. To catalog your files, click for | Database | Catalog Files . the To Open the Map Pane: In Manage mode, click Panes | Map ( CTRL + SHIFT + M ). Map The pane appears above the File List pane in Manage mode by default. You can drag the Map title bar to a new location float the pane or dock it in another position like the other movable panes in ACDSee . and in can You Map on and off with the keyboard shortcut CTRL+SHIFT+M toggle Manage mode. the To Add Files to the Map by Dragging: 1. In Manage mode, drag one or more files onto the map. left 2. All in the top Save corner of the map. Click Ideally images should be geotagged prior to processing. If an image is geotagged after it has been edited will and Restore to Original command is used, then the geotag the be lost. To Delete a Pinned Location on the Map: . Map Remove from Right- click the geotagged image thumbnail and select Map | of Page 71 334

72 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard View a Image on the Map: To Geotagged on the image thumbnail and click Map | View geotagged Map . Right- select Find a Location: To find a specific To enter a place or landmark into the Search for Location field at the top right of the Map location, pane. To Set Default Location, Zoom and Map Type: 1. Pan to your preferred location on the map, then adjust the zoom- level and select your preferred map type (Map, Satellite, Terrain). or Set Click | 2. | Tools default map location . Map Note : The map reflects the current File list. If the File list has images mapped to a different location from your setting, then that location will be displayed. default To pan and zoom the map to a specific location, enter the location into the Map search field and press Enter . Reverse Geocoding: IPTC include: These fields. The Reverse Geocoding command allows you to save location information into certain Country, State/Province, and Location. Code, Country In Manage mode, drag one or more files onto the map. 1. left Click All in the top Save corner of the map. 2. preview Press the Reverse Geocode button to the 3. location information. the 4. to save this information into Save IPTC fields of the selected images. Click If images the multiple different locations are selected, only one of those locations will be used to do with lookup. reverse Map Pane Using the Workflow Your to Further few With images from a particular location all selected, here are a the possible workflow options: Enter Edit mode to process this selection together. apply Use the Batch tool to the the same settings on photos from same location. photos Click to view and present a slideshow of the Slideshow from this location. Send photos from this location via email. map. the If a geotagged image does not display, try using the keyboard shortcut F5 to refresh Pin Legend of Page 72 334

73 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio geotagged location. Indicates see than location in this area. (Zoom in to geotagged locations) one Indicates more geotagged location. selected Indicates on a pin of any color indicates unsaved image A dot location. and Hierarchical Keywords Creating Assigning in keyword files in a hierarchy and can these groups your the Keyword tree. Select the Organize tab You maintain the Properties pane to create, rename, delete, and in your keywords. move You also access the Keywords pane by choosing Panes | Keywords . can Keywords Creating Create Keywords: To the Properties pane, located to the right of the File List pane, do one of the following: In click in Right- the Organize tab, and then select New Keyword . Keywords Keyword Type into the field of the keyword group and press Enter . a One with Following: the To Keyword Files of Existing Keywords, Do Select one more files, then drag the keyword onto them. or box one more files, then check the Select next to the appropriate keyword. or Select one or more files, then right- click the keyword. Select Assign items . keyword. Select or more files, then drag them onto the one To Establish a Hierarchy, Do One of the Following: lesser In the keyword field, type the more or specific keyword, followed by the less than symbol, followed by the or more general keyword. greater Example: Owl Bird < or Madrid < Spain < Europe Right- click an existing keyword, then select New Keyword . The new keyword will automatically become a child the existing keyword. to When assigning multiple keywords to a commas it is important to note that separating keywords with file, generate hierarchy. not a will of Page 73 334

74 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Keywords Managing Your Keywords: To Manage one keyword Organize tab, and do the of the following: a in Select a keyword from To file, right- click the selected keyword and select Remove Items or uncheck unassign a box. the edit the keyword, right- click the selected keyword and select To . Edit To the keyword, right- click the selected keyword and select Delete . delete edit to keyword tree, click and drag the keyword To other parts of the tree. the and To keyword, right- click the selected keyword a select Copy , then Paste where desired. duplicate To merge duplicate keywords, click and drag one keyword into the other. To create keyword from an existing category, click and drag the category into the keyword tree. a Quick Creating Keywords order to keep your keywords organized and In your workflow, you can use quick keywords by creating streamline a group of related keywords that hold an association for you. This is ideal for keywords you would like to be easily can accessible, buried in the hierarchical tree. You than create multiple groups and choose between them rather based on the photos you are viewing at the time. You can also add these keywords to your tree. Example: Italy Florence Venice Lake Como Rome Milan Verona Genoa Bologna Naples Access Easy- Keywords: Quick To Create 1. In group, on the Organize tab, select Manage Quick Keywords from the drop- down menu. the Keyword Keywords dialog box opens. The Quick for the button and Click a name Save your set. Click OK . 2. choose Enter up to nine associated or hierarchy used keywords into the open fields. To create a 3. within commonly- a use the pipe key. Example: A|B|C. field, Click . 4. OK Apply keywords from your set by selecting a 5. and clicking the applicable keyword from the Quick file Keywords Table. 6. A dialog will open asking if you would like to create this keyword. Click Yes . The keyword will be added to the tree. If you specified a hierarchy in the keyword set, the parent keyword will appear in the tree with the child it. The text of the keywords in the table will change color to indicate that the keyword is under to to currently selected files, and will display in italics if assigned assigned only some (but not all) of the the currently selected files. Copying and Moving Files drive, You use the Copy To Folder and Move To Folder commands to relocate files and folders on your hard can and also specify to handle overwriting existing files. You can how select from a list of previously accessed folders to structure. directory through your save time looking of Page 74 334

75 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio you use to relocate your files, by default any ACDSee Metadata associated with those files is When ACDSee clear the However, if you do not want to copy the associated files, location. the Include copied to new for non- RAW images checkbox. files related do NOT use ACDSee to move or copy your files, you break the link to any database information When you added those have files. This is because ACDSee cannot track the files. You will lose important you to other by information. You can fix this and clicking Change Binding and rebinding categorizing database in . you have embedded the database information database the files themselves, you can also the If this information using Tools | Database | Catalog Files . retrieve ACDSee uses to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file. Only some file formats and file extensions XMP XMP. These GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, PSD, and TIF. In the case of these file formats, the support include rename Metadata inside the file and so you can embedded or move the file outside of ACDSee ACDSee is still be able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata. For formats that currently do not support XMP, and RAW including ABR, the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar file that is stored in the same folder and move its Because a sidecar file is as from the file itself, you need to rename or file. them separate together, you could lose the ACDSee or permanently. Metadata To Copy or Move Files: the of one 1. following: Do In the pane, select one or more files, and then click Edit | Copy To Folder or Move To File List . Folder Edit image or media file in View mode, click While | Copy To Folder or Move To an viewing . Folder In the Copy To Folder or Move To Folder dialog box, do one of the following: 2. Select the tab, and locate the folder on your hard drive where you want to place the files. Folders folders. the tab, Select select a folder from the list of recently- accessed History and Select Folder and enter the Create of a new folder. name 3. In the Overwriting duplicate files drop- down list, select one of the following options to specify how should ACDSee handle overwriting files: Ask : you for confirmation when overwriting a file. Prompts : you to rename a file. Rename Prompts : Overwrites any file with the same file name and extension. Replace name : the Skip if there is a file with the same file Cancels and extension. operation 4. Click OK . Copying Images to the Clipboard You can copy an image to the Clipboard and then paste it into another application. Using the Copy Image command or transfers image data to the Clipboard: no EXIF, IPTC the metadata information is retained. only To Copy an Image: 1. In Manage mode or View mode, select the image file you want to copy. 2. Click Edit | Copy Image . application. other into your 3. Paste the image of Page 75 334

76 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Files and Pasting Folders without cut files to the Clipboard, and then paste them into another folder copy losing your ACDSee or can You Metadata. Cut and Paste Files: To Manage mode, in the File List or Folders pane, select one or more files 1. folders. In or Click | Copy or Cut . 2. Edit the pane, browse to a new location. In Folders 3. Edit | Paste to 4. the files or folders into the new location. Click place or Overwriting Files Replacing copying or moving files from one location to another, a file name collision occurs if a file already exists in the When folder destination the same file name and extension as a file you are relocating. In ACDSee , you can view both with the the in the Confirm File Replace dialog box. If involved files involved are image files, ACDSee displays of files previews of both files, and provides options to replace the existing file, rename, delete, or skip the file thumbnail are or you cancel the operation entirely. moving, Use Confirm File Replace Dialog Box: To the If you are moving a number of files and want 1. handle all potential file name collisions in the same to manner, select the Apply to all checkbox. preview two any to 2. To help determine fields differences between the two files, use the toolbar between the shrink or the size of the previews. enlarge Do of the following: 3. one replace the destination file with the source file, click Replace . To folder, rename new file before moving it into the destination To type a new name for the file in the the Rename to field, and then click Rename . files To file, and leave both this intact, click Skip . skip To delete either the destination or source file, click Delete below the file you want to remove from your drive. hard To cancel the operation and not . or copy any more files, click Cancel move In the Confirm File Replace dialog box, destination file refers to the file that exists in the target folder, and source refers to the file you are moving or copying. file a or Folder Renaming File can rename a file or folder on your hard You in the Folders and File List panes. drive To Rename a File or Folder: 1. In Manage mode, in the File List or Folders pane, select the item you want to rename. 2. Edit | Rename . Click 3. Without removing or changing the file. name extension, such as “.jpg”, type a new name for the file . 4. Enter Press of Page 76 334

77 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard can rename files at the same time using the Batch Rename tool. You multiple in Folders Files Private Storing are secure folders where you can store Private files. When you place files into a private folder, folders confidential moves them from their current ACDSee into the private folder. Private folders are password- protected and location the in them can only be viewed in ACDSee . files information you files or When to a private folder all add related to them is permanently removed from the folders database. Restoring files and folders from a private folder does not restore information to the database. The only way you preserve database information related to the files or folders is to back up or export the database can you add them to a private folder. before Open Folder Private To Pane: the Manage In click Panes | Private Folder . mode, To Create a Private Folder: 1. any open private folders. Close 2. Right- click the private folder icon in the Private Folder pane and select Create Private Folder . the 3. the Enter Password text box, type a password for In private folder. Your password must be less than 40 characters long. again it. verify to 4. In the Re- enter Password text box, type the password 5. Click OK . folders folder not display in the Private Folder new Private will are hidden and are only identified by their A pane. When you have a private folder open you will see any subfolders that exist within the private folder, but password. not the these subfolders with do private folder itself. confuse Open Private Folder: To a Close any open private folders. 1. Click Private | 2. Folder . Panes the Click 3. button in the Private Folder pane header. Open 4. In the Enter Password text box, type the password of the private folder that you want to open. . 5. Click OK The contents an open private folder remain visible until you close it. Remember to close your private of want if have folder step away from your computer and do not you anyone to see its contents. to To Close a Private Folder: Do one of the following: Click Close button in the Private Folder pane header. the Click File | Exit to exit ACDSee . The private folder is closed automatically. To Files to a Private Folder: Add 1. Open files. private folder to which you want to add the message pane. warning A 2. Click and drag the files onto the private folder icon in the Private Folder of Page 77 334

78 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio displays. 3. to move the files to the private folder. Click Yes add When folders to a private folder they are removed from their original location in the file files you and way to password- protected private folder. There is no the to recover files and folders and system added private folder if you have forgotten your password. Ensure that you choose from password that you a a be to remember. will able a an and its Contents to Folder Private Folder: Add Existing To the private folder to which you want to 1. files. Open add Click drag the folder onto the private and icon in the Private Folder pane. 2. folder Click Yes to move the 3. and its contents to the private folder. folder To Folders and Files from a Private Folder: Restore Open the folder containing the folders or files that you want to restore. 1. private | Select or files and click File folders Restore from Private Folder . 2. the Click the browse button, navigate to the folder where you would like to move the folders or files, and then 3. OK click . Click OK 4. . the the or files from the private moves to folders selected location. These folders and files ACDSee folder now are to anyone with access to the computer. visible To a Private Folder, or the Delete or Files in the Private Folder: Folders to want you or 1. Open the private folder containing the folders delete. files that 2. Do of the following: one folder delete folder, right- click the private private icon and select Delete . To the delete folders To files in a private folder, right- click them and select Delete . or A warning message displays. 3. Click Yes to delete the private folder and all of its contents, or the selected folders or files in the private folder. Use when deleting folders or files in private folders. caution you delete folders or files in private folders If they are permanently destroyed. Restore the folders and files if you want to move them from the private on folder a non- secure location to your computer. Tagging Images at It is easy to take hundreds of photos an important event like a wedding or a marathon. After you have a transferred to your computer, you may want to review them and sort out your favorites. Tagging is photos your fast easy way to identify your best photos and to separate them for editing or review. or The tagging checkbox is at the bottom right corner of the thumbnails. Click the checkbox to tag or un- tag photos . the Photos until you clear tagged checkmark from the checkbox. remain You can display all your tagged photos with one click by clicking Tagged under Special items in the Catalog pane. set Tagging, categories and ratings, is a way to like aside, organize, and group your photos without moving the different into folders. files of Page 78 334

79 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio is intended a temporary means of separating your images. Once tagged, you can move or Tagging as of and the images, and then clear all to the tags. Categories, ratings, color categories apply ratings folders are more effective for organizing and grouping your images over a long period of time. labels, and a Image: Tag To Selected the keyboard backslash key to toggle \ tag on. the shortcut Use checkbox in the bottom right Select of the thumbnail. the corner click one or more thumbnails on select Tag . Right- and the Properties pane, select In tag checkbox at the top left corner in the Metadata tab. the To a Selected Image: Untag the keyboard \ backslash key to toggle the tag off. Use shortcut in Properties uncheck the tag the at the top left corner pane, the Metadata tab. In checkbox Untag All Tagged Images: To Click Tagged in the 1. pane to display all tagged files in the File List pane. Catalog 2. the keyboard shortcut CTRL + A to select all. Use the Click backslash key \ to toggle 3. tag off. the To Display Tagged Images: Items Special the in In Manage mode, click Panes | Catalog to display the Catalog pane, then click Tagged section. Tagged from all your folders display in the File List pane. photos Tag To Image in View Mode: an one of the following: Do In View mode, select the checkbox in the bottom right corner of the status bar. Properties In click Panes | Properties to display the mode, pane, click the Metadata tab, then select View the Tagged checkbox in the top left corner. To Tag an Image When You Are Comparing Images: the 1. In the Comparison List, select of checkbox in the bottom right corner the image thumbnails. of 2. . The Compare Images Viewer closes. You will see a checkmark in the checkbox OK the images that Click you tagged. Metadata Views and Manage Presets To Select a Metadata View: 1. Click Panes | Properties to open the Properties pane. 2. the Metadata tab of the Properties pane. Select 3. Click the Metadata View Default down list in the Metadata tab to select one of the view options: drop- or custom saved views. Metadata View (most commonly used fields), All EXIF, All IPTC, ACDSee Metadata, of Page 79 334

80 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Create a Metadata View: To Customized and the drop- down list in the Metadata pane View select Manage Metadata Views . Click Metadata 1. the Choose Metadata to Display dialog box, select New Metadata 2. from the drop- down list. In View Click plus + signs to expand the tree and toggle the checkboxes on and off to select your preferences. 3. the Manage Metadata View See below. options 4. the save button and enter a name for your customized view. Click Click . 5. OK Manage Metadata Views Options all items in a group are selected, the group checkbox is checked. When no group in a When are selected, the group checkbox is clear. items are some, not all items in a group When selected, the group checkbox is but solid. make to off selections. Toggle the checkboxes on and your deselecting You whether or not to display maker notes by selecting or choose the Display Maker can Notes checkbox. Adding ACDSee Metadata to Multiple Files We recommend entering and editing metadata prior to processing your images. If you use the Restore to prior Original the metadata will be lost unless it was entered command, to processing (except in the case of RAW images). set You cannot information IPTC and EXIF for read- only files, such as those on a CD- ROM. Properties If pane is not already open, select Panes | Properties . the To Add Metadata to One or More Files: 1. In Manage mode, select one or more files in the File List pane. tab. 2. the Properties pane, select the Metadata In 3. Enter information into the metadata fields. apply to changes. your 4. Click Apply or press Enter of Page 80 334

81 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard List you or Enter in Manage Mode, the focus is returned to the File Apply pane allowing you to When click make another file selection using your keyboard. quickly include numbers in a sequence with your metadata, select the files To enter < # > as the start and number, whichever field you want. Ex) Entering <5> will begin the sequence at 5. in Metadata Tab Shortcuts Keyboard Shortcut This Result This Has Jumps TAB forward from field to field. focus SHIFT + TAB Jumps focus backwards from field to field. Keywords the the cursor in the ACDSee Metadata Places field of the Organize tab in CTRL + K pane. Properties + K Places the cursor in the IPTC Keywords field ALT the Metadata tab in the Properties pane. of ENTER Applies your changes. ESC Discards your changes. you If away from the Properties pane, any metadata that click have just entered will be lost. You must you click Apply or press ENTER to apply your changes. into To Keyboard Shortcuts to Enter Metadata Use the Same Field of Multiple Photos: Metadata a into field. 1. Select the first photo in your list and enter content 2. Press Down key to move to the next photo. The cursor remains in the same field of the Page the for for photo, allowing you to quickly enter content each the same field for multiple pane Properties photos. Enter content into the field press again 3. Page Down to move to the next photo. and 4. Step 3 until complete. Continue do this need to click the Apply button when using You shortcut. not move You the Page Up key to use back to the previous photo. can Removing IPTC Keywords from Auto Categories can You remove unused IPTC keywords from the ACDSee database. Once removed, the IPTC keywords will no longer display Keywords (IPTC) in the Photo Properties' Auto Categories list of the Catalog Pane. under This This applies for the Supplemental Categories field. also field is only visible if selected from process the Choose Metadata to Display dialog box found under Tools | Options | Properties Pane by pressing the Metadata Views button. Manage To Remove IPTC Keywords and Supplemental Categories: 1. In Manage mode, select any image which supports IPTC. | Panes . Properties 2. If the Properties pane is not already displayed, click of Page 81 334

82 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio To ensure image is writable, do the following: 3. the a File check to see if there is and checkmark in Read only . the tab Select is a checkmark the image is not writable. Deselect the Read only checkbox to make the If there file writable. 4. field. IPTC of the Metadata tab, click the keyword picker button beside the In section the Keywords In IPTC Keywords Picker dialog the click Edit List . 5. box, Select the keyword 6. want to remove from the Value list. you To more than one keyword, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting the keywords. select Click Remove 7. . OK . Click 8. Click OK . 9. keywords that are not in use can be removed from the list. To find photos associated Only a keyword, with click keyword listed under Photo Properties in the Auto Categories list the the Catalog pane. of Changing the Date and Time Properties of Images images more or one You can use the Batch Adjust Time Stamp tool to change the date and time properties of in Manage in View mode. or mode Change the Date and Time Properties of a File: To Do one of the following: 1. | Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools . Batch | Adjust Time Stamp In | In click Tools | Modify mode, Adjust Image Time Stamp . View 2. On the Date to Change tab, choose from the following: Date to Change captured. EXIF date and was EXIF date/time original The original date/time the image time image was EXIF date/time digitized The date/time the digital a converted to image (usually as original). the same The date/time the image was lasted edited. EXIF date/time last- modified or editing image The date/time the File or file was lasted edited. For example, image and date updates to metadata. time File creation date The original date/time the file was created. time and time ACDSee Database. ACDSee The date and the held in Database date time and 3. On below, Advanced Options tab, select the options for the Adjust Image Time Stamp tool described the Next . then click Advanced Options of Page 82 334

83 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio defaults and Accept Accepts the default settings for the new time stamp options. To start changing the and time of your images, click Adjust Time Stamp . conversion start date as Closes Automatically the Adjust Image Time Stamp Wizard close soon as the process is complete. wizard when finished and Save change Remembers the current settings current applies them the next time you defaults settings stamps. as time of the time stamp page, select one new the following options: On Choose 4. date Use time : Replaces the selected date and time with another time stamp different and from the same file. Select the file property you want to use from the Select date and property time drop- list. down specific date time : Changes the selected time stamp in each file to a specific date and Use and the stamp date and time for the time Type in the Date and Time fields. time. new earliest a starting date and time : Replaces the to time stamp with a date and time Shift new specify, you shifts all later time stamps ahead accordingly. Specify the time stamp for the and earliest in the Date and Time fields. file date stamps time by a specific number : Shifts all the time Shift either forwards or and for by specific number of hours (to adjust a time zones). Select either Shift forward backwards Seconds and , boxes. or Shift backward , and type a number into the Hours , Minutes spin 5. Click Time Stamp to begin adjusting your files. Adjust to When is finished, click Done wizard return to ACDSee . 6. the Up Your Files to Another Computer Backing a The will guide you through the process of creating Wizard synchronized copy of your files to protect you Sync from local hard drive failure. You can synchronize your local folders with a network drive, remote computer, or actions external You can name the synchronization, specify the drive. you want to take each time you hard synchronize your files, schedule the synchronization to run at specific intervals, and edit or remove the synchronization at a later time. to The Sync Wizard does not backup your database when your files are copied location. a new To back up files with information, use the ACD Database Backup Wizard . database Create Synchronization: To a In Manage mode, click File | Sync | Create Sync . 1. to On Welcome page, 2. the Next button when you are ready the continue. click 3. On the Synchronization Options page, do the following: In the Source folder field, specify the folder containing files you would like to copy. on In destination field, specify a folder Backup a network drive, remote computer, or the external hard drive in which to place the backup files. should In area, specify how Sync Options handle errors and logs. the conflicts. the Confirmations area, specify how Sync should handle file duplication In ready are continue. to Click Next when you of Page 83 334

84 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio On the Schedule page, do the following: 4. Synchronization Name In type a name for your synchronization. text the box, area, the whether you would like to run Schedule synchronization immediately, or In the specify synchronization. the schedule you are ready Finish complete the wizard. Click when to An account with Schedule password cannot set up a schedule. You must set a password for your : no for to work. A blank password will not work; you must have a schedules password with more account real one character. than Updating or Deleting a Synchronization can adjust the settings of a synchronization, schedule it You run at regular intervals, or delete the to synchronization ACDSee . from Update or a Saved Synchronization: To Delete Edit Manage File | Sync | click Sync . In mode, 1. the Saved Synchronizations 2. box, select a synchronization from the list. In dialog Do one of the following: 3. schedule the synchronization, click Schedule . Specify To often to run your synchronization, how and click OK . then adjust the settings, click Edit . In the Edit Synchronizations dialog box, update To folder the folder containing would like to copy, and a you on a network drive, remote computer, or files Sync how update the external hard drive in which to place those files. In should Options area, handle errors logs. In the Confirmations area, update how Sync should handle file and conflicts. OK when you are finished. duplication Click rename the synchronization, click Rename . Type a new name To the synchronization and for click . OK . delete synchronization, To Delete the click 4. Click Close . Running a Saved Synchronization even After a synchronization, you can run it at any time, create if it is scheduled to run at regular intervals. you To Run a Saved Synchronization: name In mode, click File | Sync , and then select the Manage of the synchronization you want to run. Searching with ACDSee ACDSee a includes number of ways to search your computer for files and folders. You can use the Search pane to search by name, keywords, or image properties. You can create advanced searches to locate files that fall file search a within rating range and then save and name the date to use later. You can also use the Duplicate or Finder to locate and manage identical files. quickly For you can use the Quick Search bar to searches, locate files and folders, or search the database simpler or specific names and keywords. You can also customize the Quick Search bar to only search for specific items for database. the parts of certain of Page 84 334

85 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio you can the Catalog pane to quickly locate and list all images on your hard drive, or to locate any files in a Also, use image have categorized. If you are working with larger been collections, you can use Selective that not folder specify broad or narrow criteria for the images you want to display in the Browsing List pane. to File the Search Bar Using Quick files use Quick Search bar in Manage mode can quickly locate the or folders. You can use the Quick Search You to or basic operators to refine or expand your search, and view the results in the File List pane. options The Quick feature always searches the following IPTC fields: Title, Headline, Description, Keywords, Search and City, Country, and Instructions. The Quick Search also searches Color labels State/Province, Creator, Location, ACDSee Metadata fields: Caption, Author, Notes, and Keywords. the ACDSee searches file names, it only considers the first term in the file name. For example, a file When Cat_ found would be called by searching for Cat , but not for Dog . Search terms are not case- Dog sensitive. To a Quick Search: Run one the following: Do of the Quick Search bar, type the term In part of a word for which you want to search. or search entered previously down Click the drop- term. list beside the Quick Search field and select a Quick Operators Search can use the following operators to further refine or expand your searches in the Quick Search bar. Note that a You start term begin with an operator; it must cannot with a word. search Result Examples Operator and Searches for all items containing the first search term, then - all returns Dog - Cat displays don't the second search Cat, that items those only contain items that contain also term. except those that also contain Dog. Be sure to insert space before a the minus sign. If you do not insert a space, ACDSee will assume you a are searching for hyphenated word. before + items containing both the search term all and for Searches Cat+Dog or Cat Dog that only contain one of the terms, after the operator. Those items returns items treats spaces between words Cat both containing are excluded. The Quick Search bar operators. + as and Dog. Cat+Dog+- Kittens returns items that include both and Cat but that those Dog, not include and Dog Cat and Kittens. | Searches for all items containing one or the other of the search all Cat|Dog includes elements. with either Cat or items Dog in the search. Cat+Dog|Kittens includes items that contain both Cat and that those Dog, and contain Kittens. of Page 85 334

86 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio the Search Using Pane or use pane to search for your files and folders. You can do basic searching by file name Search the can You and advanced searches to narrow your results create folders, categories, and image phrase, keyword by properties. also search for patterns in file names and find duplicate files. You can can save a search and give it a name. Saved searches also listed on the Search pane and the Catalog pane. You are the Search pane, can select Saved searches from the drop- down list to run again. On the On pane, Saved Catalog Searches listed below Auto Categories where you can run them again by clicking once on the Saved Search are name. are will not return results for folders that pane not cataloged in the ACDSee database . The Search happens automatically when you browse to a folder. You can also click Tools | Database | Cataloging Catalog Files . Open the Pane: To Search . mode, Panes Manage Search click In | Pane Areas Search Search The contains several areas to help you manage your searches. When you create a search, remember pane you that criteria files that the search tool will only return specify. that match all of the Saved Searches select Saved area, you can save a complex search to use the searches a search to run again, or delete a In later, search. saved searches If you have saved a search, it is listed in this drop- down list for you to select Saved run and When you click Start at the bottom of the pane, the search again. are the in results File List pane. listed pane, searches also Saved on the Catalog are from where you can run listed them with a single click on the Saved Search name. search Save a Click the Save icon, and then Save or Save As to save or overwrite a saved search. When Saved Search dialog opens, type in a name for the search. If the easier you descriptive name, it makes it a to remember the criteria in your use saved search. Delete Delete search Select a search from the drop- down list and then click the a icon. Click the Yes confirm the deletion, when to prompt opens. Files and Text search to it. for In the Files and Text area, you can identify what you are searching for, and where you want of Page 86 334

87 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio for files Search or Type a portion of the file or folder name for which you want to search, or select a previous term from the drop- down list. You can also use wildcards to folders named search image name . To exclude all non- patterns files, click the right- for search file beside the field and select Images only . arrow button text text the the you want to search for within the ACDSee database . This can With Type of even caption or keyword, or portions the name of a folder or include a find. that the files you want to contain When you search by both category might name and a file or phrase, an item is included in the search result only keyword when includes both criteria. it specify what of the database you want to search, and indicate how to To parts the text type the the field, click the arrow next to you field and select any treat in the following options: of all words : Only returns files that match all of the Find you words enter. entire whole : Only returns files that contain the only Find words exactly as you type it. word, in Caption : Searches Search Caption field of files in the database. the Search Keywords : Searches the Keyword in of files in the field database. files Searches database. the Search in Notes : in the Notes field of Search in Searches the Category assignments of files in Categories : database. the Search : Searches in the name of folders in the database. Folders in Labels : Searches the labeled images by color. Search in Select one of the following options: Search in database : Performs a search on the entire ACDSee database. Entire Note that folders on your computer that have not been cataloged are any included the search results. not in folders and categories : Performs the search only within the Specific and you categories specify. Selecting this option opens the folders can Categories area, where you Folders select the location and and categories in which you want to search. to Sync file list settings Imports the current Manage mode settings, including Selective Browsing settings, into Search pane. Note that this may also remove criteria from the the pane. Search Area Properties the Properties area, you can identify file properties that you want In search for, and specify ranges of values to to include or exclude from your search. To Use the Properties Area: 1. the Search file properties field, click Add . Below 2. In the Add Search Criteria dialog box, select one or more properties on which to base your search. 3. OK . Click 4. In the Properties area, property. the hyperlinks to define conditional statements for each click perform to search. the 5. Click Start of Page 87 334

88 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard with Searching Patterns File Name and type pattern into the Search pane's Search for files text folders named field to search for file can a You can names. for simple patterns such as portions of file names, or more advanced patterns that include You search wildcards. File Name Pattern Wildcards Result Wildcar Example d ? any single character in the file name. ca?.jpg results in cat.jpg, cap.jpg, and Matches but cats.jpg car.jpg, not Matches zero or more characters in the file name. cat* results in cat.jpg, cats.jpg, and * cathy.jpg [...] any of the enclosed characters. ca [tr] Matches in cat.jpg or car.jpg, but results not cap.jpg [!...] Matches any character not enclosed. cat [!0] results in cata.jpg and catb.jpg, but not cat0.jpg results Matches character in the specified range. cat [a- ...] 9] any in cata.jpg, [...- f0- catf.jpg and cat0.jpg, catb.jpg, cat1.jpg, ..., cat9.jpg Blocks the use of other wildcard characters that are also wildcards, are brackets square Because \ a such square name, name file a for file as in permitted characters if you wanted to search bracket, a contains that brackets: [ ]. The * and ? characters are not permitted in must you the them. work not does function this so names file precede with bracket with a backslash: ACD\ [123\] results in ACD [123].gif semicolons. or spaces with Patterns are not case- sensitive. To use multiple patterns, separate the names pattern To containing a space or semicolon, enclose the pattern in double quotation marks. If you a match not include the * wildcard in your pattern, the pattern is matched as a sub- string. For example, cat do would match cathy and bobcat, and cat, equivalent to the pattern *cat*. is Using Selective Browsing specific You use selective browsing to browse for files that are located in a specific folder, assigned a can date, adjusting and/or to a specific Catalog classification. By assigned the selective browsing criteria, you can quickly browse. include or exclude files from the File List pane, and view only those files you want to browsing, it the To get the most out of selective in files is recommended that you catalog and organize your helpful ACDSee The more information you enter for your files, the more . you will find the selective database feature. browsing To Use Selective Browsing: Open the Selective Browsing panel by clicking View | Selective Browsing . The panel appears on the left side of the File List pane. Browsing Setting Selective Criteria Folders, The panel is divided into three areas: Browsing Catalog, and Calendar, each of which Selective corresponds the the Manage mode pane of the same name. When the Selective Browsing panel is open, to browsing current the Contents bar in the File List pane is replaced by the Selective Browsing bar, which lists all of criteria. of Page 88 334

89 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard you add folder, date range, or organize method to the Selective Browsing panel, ACDSee excludes any files When a to not criteria. You can add or remove criteria that narrow or broaden your results. do that match Selective Browsing Criteria: To Add Selective any panel open, do the of the following: With Browsing Folders more , select one or the folders. In pane more Catalog , select one or the categories, and/or a rating. In pane the Calendar pane In select one or more date ranges. , As criteria is added to the Selective Browsing panel, ACDSee searches its database for files in that folder, that each the List range, and are assigned to the classification, and displays them in the File match pane. You can then date you those and use the select features to edit, share, move, and view them however files want. ACDSee You also adjust or refine your can in the Selective Browsing panel: criteria To remove a selected criteria from the Selective Browsing panel, right- click any of the criteria, and then select Remove Scope . From the exclude a certain type of criteria, click the bar above of list, and toggle the option to include that To all in the scope. For example, to exclude the listed folders from the type click the Folders bar, and scope, then Include Folders in Scope . The folders you selected will still be click in the Selective displayed Browsing panel, but will not factor in the results. To remove all criteria of a certain type, click the bar above the list, and select Clear All . is The for categories in the Selective Browsing panel behavior to display files that match any of the default categories listed. You can refine your results by choosing to display only those files that are assigned to all of the the specified To toggle between behaviors, right- click categories. bar above the categories you selected, and All Match or . select Match Any Tips for Selective Browsing that add to the Selective Browsing panel, you are indicating criteria the files you want to browse must you a When attribute. For example, if you select a folder in have Folders pane, then ACDSee displays only files in that that the If select a rating in the Catalog pane, you displays only files assigned to that rating. folder. ACDSee can combine criteria to refine your selective browsing category further. For example, if you select a You and a even date then ACDSee displays only those files that belong to both the category and date range you selected. range, does unless display items that fall within the date range ACDSee they are also assigned to the correct category, not also and display files assigned to that category unless they not match the date range. does Hiding the Selective Browsing Panel You can use the Auto Hide feature to automatically hide the Selective Browsing panel and increase space for the the File List pane. When panel is set to auto- hide, it rolls away when you click outside it, leaving only an edge displayed. You access the panel again by moving the cursor over the edge. can with Categories Searching Auto you have hundreds, possibly thousands, of images? Do you use more than one camera? Do different members Do your your share cameras? Or do you have images on family computer that were captured by friends and family? of If you answered yes to any of these questions you should consider using auto categories to search for images. click You auto categories in the Catalog pane, below Labels. Double- see or click the plus sign ( + ) to expand will auto category groupings. Double- click or click the minus sign ( - ) to collapse the auto category groupings. images Some category information is added to your auto by your camera. For example, cameras will record length used, you focal information such as the camera make and model, the white balance settings you used, the of Page 89 334

90 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio the aperture. may want to supplement that information with the city, province/state, or country in which and You the you well as keywords or copyright. You can do this by manually entering information in images, captured as pane. the Properties When an auto category, ACDSee searches for images belonging to that category. For example, imagine click you on Properties more one camera. You can expand the Photo than and Camera Model groupings, then use that you category representing your camera model. All images select with that camera model will display. the captured imagine your brother captures a lot of images and sends them to you. You can expand the Photo Similarly, that Photographer from then select your brother's name and the list of photographers. All Properties groupings, by will brother captured display. images your some searching for are with auto categories. tips Below Used Search Categories Commonly Identifying there are certain auto categories in the Photo Properties grouping If you use frequently, you can save time by that adding to the Commonly Used grouping. Some Photo Properties groupings are available in the Commonly them grouping by You can add as many auto categories as you want to the Commonly Used grouping, and Used default. easily Used any grouping from the Commonly can grouping when you no longer need them. you remove Grouping: Add Category Grouping to the Commonly Used Auto To an Expand the Photo Properties grouping. 1. Right- click the auto categories grouping that you want to add to 2. Commonly Used grouping, and select the Add Commonly Used . The grouping is added to the Commonly Used grouping. to remains in the Photo Properties grouping as well. It visible Remove an Auto Category Grouping from the Commonly Used Grouping: To Expand the Commonly Used grouping. 1. to Right- the auto categories grouping 2. you want click remove from the Commonly Used grouping, and that Used Commonly from select . Remove The grouping removed from the Commonly Used grouping. is Your Auto Search Refining Categories one refine auto categories search by can more than your auto category. For example, imagine that You selecting are learning to combine aperture and shutter speed you to properly expose images in a variety of lighting settings and want find images taken at specific settings. If you click the Easy- Select indicator beside the f/16 aperture you auto category and the 1/30 s shutter speed auto category, ACDSee will search for images that belong to both of those auto categories. control you more than one auto category you When further select the search by selecting Match All or Match can Any from the Match Any/All drop- down list at the top of the Catalog pane. If you select Match Any, ACDSee will If display images associated with the selected auto categories. any you select Match All, ACDSee will display only those are images that associated with all of the selected auto categories. You can refine your auto categories search by selecting a category or rating. For example, imagine that you also on the Photographer auto category and found over 1000 images. However, you only want to see clicked best the Catalog by photographer. Click the Easy- images indicator beside 1 in the Ratings area of the that pane. Select Only images by that photographer with the rating of 1 will display. a You can also use the Selective Browsing pane to refine your auto categories search. For example, imagine that you over clicked Camera Model auto category and ACDSee displayed the 1000 images. However, you only want to on see the images that you took on a specific date. Display the Selective Browsing pane by clicking View | Selective the Browsing then select the Calendar pane and select , appropriate date. Only the images taken with that will displayed. day be camera model on that of Page 90 334

91 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Duplicate Files Finding any use Finder plug- in to search for duplicate files on your hard drive. Once you locate Duplicate the You can can or delete them to better rename your file collection. you duplicates, manage steps are a basic overview of how to use the Duplicate Finder. There is also extensive The following context- Help the plug- in dialog box to provide you with additional information. sensitive in search or selecting only a portion of the photos your images in a folder. Limit by Find Duplicate To Files: images Manage select a In or mode, to search for duplicates. 1. folder Click Tools | Find Duplicates 2. . 3. the Duplicate Finder dialog box, on the Select Search Type page, add any other files and folders you In to search. want one the following: 4. of Do duplicates within the files and folders you added To the list, select Find duplicates find to this list of files . within compare files between the list you created and another group of files, To Find duplicates select between files and another list . these Click . 5. Next If you are comparing the files with another list, add the files 6. folders you want to compare to the second or list, and then click Next . with files just Search 7. On the the Parameters page, specify whether you want to find exact duplicates, or same name. for Select only if you only want to search images image files. 8. Find Click Next . 9. If 10. duplicates are found, click OK and refine your search or click Cancel to exit the Duplicate Finder. no 11. If duplicates are found, specify from which list you want to delete the duplicates, and then select the or checkbox to the files you want to delete. You can also right- click a file name to open, rename, next delete file. a 12. Click Next to review your changes, and then click Finish . Finding Images Quickly can You of click on the name a saved search to quickly re- run the search. You can select Special Items in the that Catalog locate all of the images in your database , or list all of the images to you have not yet assigned to a pane category . To Re- Run a Saved Search: In Manage mode, in the Catalog pane, click the name of a saved search. in The the search display of the File List pane. results To Find All of Your Images at Once: | 1. Manage mode, click Panes In Catalog to open the Catalog pane. Image . Well click 2. In the Catalog pane, under Special Items, of Page 91 334

92 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Locate Uncategorized : To Images Manage 1. Panes | Catalog to open the Catalog pane. mode, In click The Catalog under Special Items, click Uncategorized . the Image Well and Uncategorized In 2. pane, display images that have been cataloged in the database ; they do not features your hard drive only search specific types. for file Images Haven't Been Keyworded: Locate That To Manage mode, click Panes | Catalog to open the 1. pane. In Catalog In Catalog pane, under Special the click No Keywords . 2. Items, Files with Sharing ACDSee ACDSee it easy to share your images and other files with friends and family. You can email files directly makes with ACDSee images to a Web site, create your own Web pages upload the HTML Album plug- in, or print a from , sheet. contact includes a Burn Basket pane, to help you burn ACDSee images safely onto a disc. You can also create your slideshows screensavers that you can give to anyone with a computer— and do not need ACDSee to view they them. Taking a Screen Capture You screen. utility select You can use the ACDSee Screen Capture can to create images from different areas of your what areas capture, how you want to perform the capture, and where to store the captured image. to Take To Screen Capture: a click In mode 1. View mode, Manage Tools | Screen Capture... or 2. In the Source area of the Screen Capture dialog box, identify the part of the screen you want to capture. description See below for a table of the Source options. the 3. If you want to include your cursor in the output image, select the Include mouse cursor checkbox. identify 4. In the Destination area, where image. you want to place the output want 5. capture area, identify how you Initiate to take the screen capture. the In Click Start to launch the screen capture tool. 6. icon appears in the Taskbar Notification area. An area Prepare your screen to show the want you 7. to capture, and then follow the steps that appear in the bubble the Screen Capture icon. above 8. To exit the Screen Capture and without taking a screen capture, right- click the Screen Capture icon, utility . then select Exit Screen Capture Screen Options Capture of Page 92 334

93 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Current monitor an image of the entire area displayed on the Desktop Captures screen. Entire Captures an image of the entire Window window. active window not Captures only of the window contents (does an Content image the frame or title bar). include Fixed size Captures an image of Region fixed area on the screen. a Click drop- down button and select a dimension the the or , and enter Custom dimension in setting select pixels. region Captures a selected area Selected the screen. Click and drag of your to surround the cursor you want to capture. area Object Child window Captures an image of sections of the window. For example, a or button. toolbar under cursor selected menu commands. Menu Captures cursor mouse the cursor in the screen capture. Include Includes options Clipboard Places Destination copy of the image on the Clipboard. From the a Clipboard can paste the you in a new location. image File Displays the Save dialog box to save the file; you can specify location, and file name. format, Opens Editor captured image in the default editor. the Initiate Capture the Hot key Designates a keystroke combination to trigger options capture. screen To set the Hot keys press a key or combination of Key, the in type not (e.g., CTRL + S) on the keyboard; do box. Timer screen capture after a designated period. Takes a enough to set up your desktop or window Choose time the screen capture. The maximum setting is 60 for seconds. Emailing Images can use the Send Email Wizard to from images directly You ACDSee without opening an external email send application. To use the Send Email Wizard, you will need an active email account, and have a default email to application up on your computer, or have access set an SMTP server. To Email Your Images : . 1. In the File List pane, select the images you want to email, and then click File | Send | Email Images you want If . OK to add other images , click Add . When you have finished adding images , click The If want to delete images , select an image and click Remove . you image is removed from the wizard, but not deleted from ACDSee . maximum If you want to set email and image options, such as the conversion size for emails or the have of JPEG, click Options . When you to finished selecting options, click Apply . images If an want to change the email account settings, to use either your default email client or you settings, click SMTP server, click Change . When you have finished changing your email account OK . of Page 93 334

94 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In the Email Wizard, click Next . 2. Send selected If your default email client , the wizard adds your images and email Send you using then new message. You can edit the message and a send it as you normally information to email would. selected Send through an SMTP If , in the wizard, enter the email address you want you server send email to, a subject for the email, and a message. Click Next . the to Finish the have been sent, click images to close the wizard. When 3. Internet- based email applications such as Hotmail and Yahoo Some accounts) do not support SMTP (free and be used with the Send Email Wizard. For others, such as Gmail, Yahoo (upgraded accounts), cannot types AOL, configure the account for POP/SMTP. To learn how to configure these must of email and you visit their specific websites and search for SMTP. accounts, / Email Using ACDSee 365 Share you ACDSee activated your account with Once 365, you can share your images through 365.acdsee.com. have Email Images: To Your In the File List pane, select the images you want 1. share, and then click File | Send | Share/Email to using ACDSee 365 . photos album a select 2. In the Share/Email with ACDSee 365 dialog box, enter a Name for your and of Location from existing online folders. your send Enter more email addresses to or the images to. 3. one can click the Share with button to pull You from your address book. names 4. an upload size from the Select down list. drop- 5. Click Upload . 6. A new window opens providing the option to enter a message, enable download of full sized JPG, and create an password. access Click OK 7. . Creating a Desktop Screensaver You can create a desktop screensaver using your own images. You can set the screensaver options to adjust how apply long each image is displayed, set the background color, and transition effects, add header or footer text. To Create Screensaver: a of In in the File List pane, select a group mode, images, and then click Tools | Configure 1. Manage . Screensaver for In ACDSee Screensaver dialog box, click Add to browse the more images to add to your screensaver, or 2. select images you do not want to include and click Remove . described 3. , specify the options as Configure below, and then click OK. Click 4. To automatically use the screensaver on your desktop, select the Set as default screensaver checkbox. with 5. you are satisfied When your choices, click OK . Computer: Your on Screensaver To Activate the of Page 94 334

95 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard select the tab in your Windows Display Properties dialog box, and then Saver ACDSee Select Screen from the drop- down list. Screensaver ACDSee Screensaver Options Select transitions Displays a list of transitions for you Basic select and plays each transition, to variation, effect in the Preview as you select it. or randomly. all Selects Select the transitions and displays them : all Clear all : Clears any selected transitions. These transitions do not work with the 2- up, 4- up and Collage variations. Variations the drop- down list to select from the following: Click Uses variations None: no and Zoom : Zooms in and Pan across each slide during the time pans it is displayed. 2- up : Displays two images at a time. 4- : Displays four images at a time. up Collage : Displays images as a collage where images overlap each other. select Click the drop- down list to Effects from the following: None: Uses no effects. grayscale. in images all Black & white : Displays Sepia : all images in sepia. Displays brighter. : the saturation of the images Vivid make colors Increases to Soft : Blurs images slightly for a softening effect. Background color Specifies the background color. Click the color picker to select or change the color color. to set a custom Other in the Color dialog box. Click Slide duration image. Specifies how long you want the screensaver to display each (sec) or General settings Select Advanced clear the following options: to Stretch images : fit screen Enlarges small images to fill the entire screen. embedded embedded Plays any audio clips : in the Play audio images. order Select one Slide the following options to specify the order to display your of images: Forward Shuffle Text Display header the Displays a text caption at the top of each image. Set the options to specify text you want to display. text Display footer Displays a text specify at the bottom of each image. Set the options to caption to want you display. text the text of Page 95 334

96 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Text Options Screensaver the of the text captions. Alignment alignment Specifies Specifies Background background color for the caption text. color a Specifies the text to display as a caption. Text your Font Font dialog box where you can select or change the font options for the Opens text. called Metadata Inserts file- specific Insert caption. metadata into the information Tag Click to open the Choose Properties dialog box and select the metadata you want to insert. Viewing Configuring a Slideshow and mode can a slideshow of images and/or You from Manage view or from View mode. You can also configure videos your slideshow to start automatically whenever you run it, and set the slideshow options to adjust how long each transition image displayed, set the background color, apply is effects, and add header or footer text. Mode: Manage in Slideshow To Start a 1. of the following: one Do the File List pane, select a group of images. In the Folders pane, select a folder. In multiple the Easy- Select bar to select images. folders that contain Use 2. Tools | Slideshow (keyboard shortcut CTRL+ S ) Click To Start a Slideshow in View Mode: Click Tools | Slideshow . To Configure a Slideshow: following: 1. In Manage mode, do one of the In the images. of File List pane, select a group select In Folders pane, select a folder or use the Easy- Select bar to the multiple folders that contain images. 2. Click Tools | Configure Slideshow . the 3. In Slideshow Properties dialog box, select or change the slideshow options as described below. behavior, 4. save your settings as the default slideshow To select the Save current settings as default checkbox. OK . 5. Click Options Slideshow of Page 96 334

97 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard media Slideshow Specifies which of the following contents to include in the File Selectio slideshow: n in current folder : Displays all the All media (images video) in the folder you have files or selected. media in current folder and subfolders : All all files in the currently selected Displays the and its subfolders. folder media Displays Selected only the files that you : before opening the Slideshow Properties selected dialog box. Always use these contents for and setting contents Slideshow current the Retains the start type selection this starts automatically and next time you launch the automatically slideshow. slideshow for Select Displays a list of transitions transitions you to select and plays Basic each transition, variation, or effect in the Preview as you select it. transitions all Selects all Select : and displays the them randomly. Clear all : Clears any selected transitions. 2- These do not work with the transitions up, 4- up and Collage variations. from select following: the Variations Click the drop- down list to None : variations. Uses no Zoom Zooms in and pans across each and : Pan the time it slide displayed. during is up : Displays two images at a time. 2- up : Displays four images at a time. 4- : Displays images as a collage where Collage overlap other. images each Click the drop- down list to select from the following: Effects : None no effects. Uses & White Black Displays all images in grayscale. : Sepia : Displays all images in sepia. Vivid : Increases the saturation of the images to make colors brighter. : images slightly for a softening effect. Soft Blurs color Specifies the background color. Click Background color picker to the select change the color. Click or to set a custom Other color in the Color dialog . the Slide Specifies how long you want (sec) slideshow to display each duration image. Advance options: General settings Select or clear any of the following d Stretch images to fit screen : Enlarges small the fill screen. entire images to of Page 97 334

98 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio embedded audio Plays any audio clips Play : the embedded images. in fit to Enlarges video files video screen : Stretch screen. entire fill to the : Hides Autohide slideshow control bar the the stops moving for controls cursor whenever few seconds. a more than Repeats the slideshow after displaying Loop : the image. last to Select the following options to specify the order of one Slide order images: your display Forward Shuffle Music music from the previously- selected folders, or directory Displays can click Browse to find a new folder. you Display header text Displays a text Text at the top of each image. Set the caption options specify the text you want to display. to footer text a text caption at the bottom of each image. Set Displays Display to specify the text you want to display. options the current settings as default Retains the current settings on all of the tabbed pages and Save them applies next time you view a slideshow. the Text Options Slideshow the alignment Alignment the text captions. Specifies of color Specifies a background Background for the caption text. color Text Specifies the text to display as a caption. for options font the Font Opens your Font dialog box where you can select or change the text. Insert Tag Inserts file- specific information called metadata into the caption. Metadata metadata to the Click Properties dialog box and select the open you want to Choose insert. Sharing Slideshows and Screensavers You can view a slideshow of your images from Manage or View mode at anytime by clicking Tools | Slideshow you (keyboard in Manage mode). With ACDSee , CTRL+S can also create slideshows and screensavers of shortcut your favorite photos, and send them to friends and family, or display them on your website. You can even save slideshow your project or screensaver to edit at a later time. To Create Slideshow: a | In click Tools | Create mode, Slideshow File . 1. Manage On the Welcome 2. to create a new slideshow, select the Create a new slideshow radio button. To page, specify what type of slideshow you want to create, select one of the following options: (.exe) Standalone Creates a single executable file : containing all of your images and slideshow everything computer, to view them. You can share this type of file with anyone who has a needed own . not ACDSee even if they do of Page 98 334

99 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio screensaver : a standard Windows screensaver file (.scr) that can be stored Windows Creates on any system. and used Windows (.swf) slideshow a compact Adobe Flash file Creates that you can Player® Adobe : Flash Web site. display on a Load an slideshow or screensaver project, select the existing an existing slideshow project edit 3. To and then click Browse to locate your project (.asw file). radio button, Next Click continue. 4. to in the images page, you can view the images included your your slideshow, in the default order On Choose 5. be displayed. Click Add they Remove to change the images, and use the arrow buttons to reorder will or Click Next when you are ready to continue. them. On the Set file specific options 6. click the underlined words beside each thumbnail to set the page, individual for each image. These include transitions between photos, the duration of the transition options slide, text and audio files to play when the image is displayed. Note that the options and captions, all on choice depend output file format, and not all formats support your options. Click Next available of you are ready to continue. when On the Set slideshow options page, set the 7. for each slide to automatic or manual, the order to timing display and whether or not to hide the controls. You can also add audio files to play in slides, the background, adjust the quality, or speed, of the and Click Next when you are ready to transitions. continue. set file. project the 8. On the following pages, and the options for image size, location of your slideshow file 9. Finally, , and wait a few moments while ACDSee generates your slideshow. When complete, you click Next your wizard. and exit the launch can slideshow as assign audio file to an you image, as well an to the whole slideshow on the Set slideshow If individual page, then both audio files will play simultaneously when that slide displays. options a Creating Slideshow Desktop window can ACDSee Showroom to create a slideshow of your photos and display that slideshow in You small use a on computer desktop. You can run up to your different slideshows on your computer at once. 16 You can configure the ACDSee Showroom window to always stay on top of other application windows. You can also when configure it to open you start your computer. You do not have to open ACDSee to use ACDSee Showroom. To Create Desktop Slideshow with ACDSee Showroom: a desktop In mode, navigate to a folder containing images that you want 1. add to the Manage slideshow. to 2. one of the following: Do Click | Create | ACDSee Showroom . Tools Click Start | Programs | ACD Systems | ACDSee Showroom . in The immediately and the ACDSee Showroom icon appears starts the taskbar. slideshow Using the ACDSee Showroom Slideshow Controls There are a number of slideshow controls in the ACDSee Showroom window. the Click Back or Forward buttons to display the previous or next photos in the slideshow. displayed. particular is photo Click the Pause button to pause the slideshow while a of Page 99 334

100 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard you cannot these slideshow controls in the ACDSee Showroom window, click anywhere in the If see enjoy controls while The slideshow is playing so you can fully disappear your photos. window. the Create More Than One ACDSee Showroom: To ACDSee Showroom With do one of the following: open, Right- in the ACDSee Showroom window and select New Showroom . click . the Showroom icon Click the taskbar and select New Showroom ACDSee in To Close ACDSee Showroom: Do one of the following: Click Close in the ACDSee Showroom window. Click the Showroom icon in the taskbar and select Exit ACDSee Showroom . ACDSee will you configured ACDSee Showroom to If when you start your computer, it have automatically open open next time you start the computer. your Creating a PDF You can use ACDSee to combine your images into PDF (portable document format) files. The Create PDF Wizard will your guide through the process of creating one or more PDF files from you images, or adding images to a PDF slideshow. To Create a PDF: you share. to want 1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select the images 2. Click | Create | PDF . Tools one On Welcome page of the 3. PDF Wizard, select the of the following options, and then click Next : Create Create a PDF slideshow : Combines all of your images into a single PDF file that you can view as a slideshow. all one file containing all images : Create PDF of the selected images into a single Combines PDF file with multiple pages. Converts Create PDF file for each image : one each image into a separate PDF file. the 4. On can Choose images page, you change the selected images, and use the arrow buttons to reorder them. Click to continue. Next Do of the following: 5. one you selected to create a If slideshow, set or change the transition options by clicking the PDF hyperlink next to each image. Click Next to set the order, color, and file name options for your slideshow. Next when you are ready to continue. Click If you selected to create one or more PDF files, specify a file name and location, and then click Next . return . ACDSee to 6. Click Finish to close the wizard and of Page 100 334

101 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a PowerPoint Creating Presentation the create presentation quickly from inside ACDSee using PowerPoint Create PPT Wizard. The wizard can a You through walks process of creating or editing a presentation using your photos. You can set slide duration, you the location of the file, number of images per slide and whether or not to use the design template as a background. a You also add captions, a title, or notes to each slide. can feature computer. works if you have Microsoft PowerPoint® installed on your This The feature does only files support not so you will need to convert RAW RAW to another format. files, To Create a PowerPoint Presentation: 1. In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select the images you want to share. 2. Click | Create | PPT . Tools images. On Choose images page of the Create PPT Wizard, click Add if you 3. to add more the want 4. Next . Click one On Presentation Options 5. do the or all of the following: page, In the Presentation Options area, if this is a new presentation, set the duration that you want each slide display. to presentation you editing a presentation, If Existing are to activate the Path field, and select browse to your presentation. Select whether you want to Insert slides at the beginning or end of the presentation. more select one, than Select the Number of images per slide from the drop- down list. (If you the Title options on the next page do not appear.) and Notes to than file if you want your images to stay linked to ACDSee rather Link be Select Image the in presentation. embedded a design template if you want to Click a background template and browse to the folder Use use are computer to select it. (PowerPoint templates on usually under Microsoft Office | your Templates Presentation Designs.) | Click . 6. Next On the Text Options page, do one or all of the following: 7. its On tab, type in a caption and select Caption background color and alignment. You can also the select a different font, or insert metadata like file name or picture dimensions. Captions appear at the bottom of the slide. On the tab, type in a title for the slide and select its background color and alignment. You Title also or a different font, can insert metadata. select to the tab, type in On notes that you want Notes appear in the Notes section attached to each any slide. These notes do not appear on the slide itself. 8. Click . Create like presentation in PowerPoint where you can The it opens any other presentation. edit Burning a CD or DVD You a use the Burn Basket to burn a CD or DVD of your photos and files, to use on a computer. You must have can use Burn the Basket. CD or DVD writer installed in your computer to of Page 101 334

102 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio the Burn you can organize, arrange, and store your photos and files until you are ready to burn them With Basket, use disc. Basket allows you to create your own folders, Burn existing folders, or have the Burn Basket a to The folder structure automatically. create the a or DVD: Create To CD open the Burn Basket pane, do one of the following: 1. To mode, click Panes | Burn Basket . In Manage CD mode, Tools | Create | Manage or DVD . In click From the drop- down list in the toolbar of the Burn Basket, select the device you want to use to create your 2. The options in this drop- down list depend on the CD/DVD hardware you have on your computer. disc. to Click Options button. The Format Options dialog box will open. Check or uncheck the box Format 3. the whether want to include any ACDSee you associated with your files. specify Metadata You can use the left side of the Burn Basket to create a folder 4. to organize the photos and files on structure the To create a new folder, right- click the name of a folder, "Volume Label" by default, and disc. select New from the context menu. Type a name Folder the new folder and then press Enter . for select or Basket, Burn 5. To add photos or other files to your disc, drag them from the File List pane to the Burn the to add and then click Edit | Add to Burn Basket . You can use the buttons on the want you files toolbar, explained below, to adjust the contents of the as Basket, or to save or load projects. Basket Burn When you are ready to create your disc, bottom Burn , located in the 6. right corner. click In to be able to browse the contents of your disc while it is ejected, you may want to create order an ACDSee Disc . Photo Basket Buttons Burn Toolbar Options Opens the Format Format dialog box, where you can specify Options whether or not you want to add a catalog to your data disc. Burn Add to Basket Adds the currently selected files or folders to the Burn Basket. Remove Burn Basket Removes the currently selected files or folders from the Burn From Basket. Remove Clears the contents of the Burn Basket. All Folder a New new sub- folder. Creates Rename the currently selected file or folder. Renames Save Project Saves the current contents and settings of the Burn Basket as a project you can edit later. file Project Load a previously saved Burn Basket project. Opens Creating an HTML Album photo You use the HTML Album Wizard to prepare can collections for posting on the Internet. The HTML album style and templates then includes slideshow controls and a thumbnail display. You can select from a list of gallery of Page 102 334

103 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard can the adding your own logo as an image or text to the header or footer. You by also change the customize gallery and used in the gallery. colors fonts an HTML Album: Create To In Manage mode, in the File List pane, select the images you want to share. 1. Click 2. | Create | HTML Album . Tools On from Style Settings page of the Create HTML Album Wizard, select a Gallery Style 3. the Web page the styles box. can you a Gallery Style and other settings, After select click Preview Gallery to see how those you selections affect the appearance of your HTML album. You can also generate your HTML album from any page in HTML Album Wizard by clicking Generate Album . the Click . 4. Next On the Gallery Customization page, do one or all of the following: 5. want the In text box, type the title that you Gallery to display at the top of the Web page. Title Select Include header to display a header at the top of the Web page, or clear the Include header checkbox remove the header. to of Include to display a footer Select the bottom footer the Web page, or clear the Include at footer checkbox to remove the footer. header If want to display an image in the you or footer, select Use image and click Browse and the in display header. select a company logo, a photo of yourself, or another image to If you display text in the header or footer, select Use information and click Set want to add to the text that you would like and display. Information enter you Folder section, click the and select the folder where settings would like to save In Browse HTML album files. the Click Next . 6. On and Thumbnail 7. Image page, do one or all of the following: the the of settings section, adjust the appearance and format In the thumbnails in the Thumbnail album. format Image settings section, adjust the appearance and In of full size images in the the album. In the Slideshow duration section, specify how long to display full size images during a slideshow. section, In the Color and font settings click Color and font , adjust the colors and fonts used in the page, and then click OK . Web Save If to save the settings that you select for specific Web page styles. Click you save the Settings style settings, quickly reapply them to a Web page can from the Style Settings page of the Create you HTML Album Wizard. to 8. to create your HTML album. You may need Next wait a few moments while ACDSee generates the Click thumbnails and creates the Web page. click 9. Create Another Album to create another album, or Click Finish to exit the wizard and return to ACDSee . site. Web your to You will need to use FTP or another method to post the HTML album files of Page 103 334

104 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Images to Websites Uploading Photo upload You or images directly from ACDSee to sites like Flickr, SmugMug, Facebook, Zenfolio, and your can photos pictures course, do need an account before you can upload Of to these sites. You can create an sites. FTP you part of account first upload process from ACDSee if you wish. as the can almost any image file type, including RAW and TIFF, and ACDSee will convert select file to JPG You the before automatically uploading. Photos Upload a Photo Website: To to can quickly You your photos to photo sharing websites without having to leave ACDSee . upload 1. Manage mode, select one or more images and click File | Send | To < Photo Website >... In In follow Uploader dialog box, press the Help button in the lower right corner and 2. the the instructions. Uploading to Facebook Images can upload your images directly to Facebook from ACDSee. You will Facebook a You username and password to log in. need Images to Facebook Uploading To Upload Your Images to Facebook: go Manage in or, In Manage or View mode, select the images for upload, and Facebook... to File | Send | To mode, Send To Facebook... on the Main Toolbar. | Log Facebook: To into In the Email text box, type your account 1. (email address). ID 2. In the Password text box, type your password. 3. Click Log In . To Posting Images to Facebook from ACDSee: Authorize After you have logged in, you will need to authorize the ACDSee Facebook app to enable direct uploading from ACDSee. 1. Click the Continue as [your name] button. apply 2. Facebook will ask you who can see ACDSee's posts on your Timeline. This setting will to the photos and albums upload directly from ACDSee. Choose a setting from the drop- down menu. The strictness you overridden level from the drop- down will not be choose by the privacy setting you choose on you individual albums in the Facebook Uploader. For example, if you choose Only me from the drop- down, but will then album for upload to Public, only you your be able to see your uploaded album. set 3. Press OK . you If choose the Not Now button, you will encounter an error upon upload. Use the Uploader: Facebook To of Page 104 334

105 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard images. In Uploader dialog, you will see your selected Facebook Configure the settings as described 1. the below: the in photos the of This will create a new album within your Facebook albums, which will house Upload all photos Facebook Uploader. a to new album Enter name for the album. Name a Enter a location where the photos Location the album were taken. in Descriptio Enter a description of the album. n Who can privacy this If Select your privacy settings for the album from the drop- down menu. will these setting is different from the permissions setting you gave to ACDSee, the setting see strict. default whichever setting is the most to For example, if you set the photos? permissions for ACDSee to Friends, but then try to set the album privacy setting to Public, setting will default to Friends. the Upload Facebook existing your of one to This albums. add the photos in the Facebook Uploader will photos an to existin g album down drop- the menu. Select an from Select the album you would like to add the photos to album... 2. Upload . Click button. To your uploaded photos, click the View 3. Facebook view in 4. Click Finish to return to ACDSee. Troubleshooting Errors If you disable permissions for ACDSee, you will not be able to post photos using the Facebook Uploader. your If encounter issues with permissions or uploading images, you can remove ACDSee from you apps on Facebook start again. and To Settings: ACDSee from Your App Remove the your (near page 1. While logged into Facebook, click the drop- down arrow in the top right corner of name). From the drop- down menu, choose Settings . 2. 3. From the left menu, choose Apps . Remove 4. the App Settings page, click the On button next to the ACDSee icon. removed, 5. Once ACDSee has been above begin the log in and authorization steps by going to Send | To Facebook... a Contact Sheet Creating You can create contact sheets— thumbnail previews to your images arranged on pages — that you can use of contact your in sheets organize and share your images. You can use the Create Contact Sheet utility to save 105 334 of Page

106 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard image formats, as HTML image maps. You can save your options as a preset for future use. multiple and sheet of size depends on how many columns and rows the contact the displays, and how much The thumbnails is displayed between them. space Create a Contact Sheet: To 1. In mode, in the File List pane, select the images you want to include. Manage Click | Create | Contact Sheet . 2. Tools In the Contact sheet format area, set 3. Contact sheet format options. the 4. the Output Settings area, In the Output Settings options. set 5. If desired, add or change the text on the page. 6. Click . OK you named not specify an output file path, the Create Contact Sheet utility places a file If Contact do contact in default image folder. For multiple- page your sheets, the utility adds a number to Sheet. the file name; for example, Contact Sheet3.bmp . Contact Sheet Options Format and settings Specifies the number Thumbnail columns Size rows to create of on each page. Spacing Creates a frame around each thumbnail. Specifies the amount space between rows or columns. In the of to and Vertical spin boxes, type a value Horizontal space of display. to indicate the amount Frame options frame Creates a frame around each thumbnail. thumbnail Use the width of the frame. Specifies Margin color Specifies the frame's color. Click the color picker to Solid a color. define image Specifies an image to use as a frame. Click Browse to Tiled locate image you want to use. the Thumbnail options Colored drop shadow Creates a drop shadow effect around each thumbnail. Click color picker to define a color. the Colored edge fade Creates a fading frame effect around the image. Click the color picker to define a color. Click Colored matte Uses a solid color as a background for the page. the color color. a picker to define This Beveled a beveled edge effect on each thumbnail. Creates edges effect is not displayed in the Preview window. Page background options Solid color Uses a solid color as a background for the page. Click the color picker to define a color. image Tiled the Uses a tiled image as background for the page. to Click locate the picture you want to use. Browse Creating Archives of Your Files You can Creator the Archive Creator plug- in to create archives of your images and media files. Archive use and password supports multiple archive formats, and helps you manage your files using compression, encryption, tools. protection of Page 106 334

107 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Create an To Archive: Manage mode, the File List pane, select a folder or group of files. 1. In in | | Archive . Tools Create Click 2. Create Archive dialog box, in the 3. area, click the Archive Type drop- down list and select the In the Options you want to create. archive format formats archive additional settings that you can adjust by clicking the Settings button. Some have any the following: Do of 4. the contents of any subfolders you selected, select the Include subfolders To include checkbox. include hidden files in your archive, any the Include hidden files checkbox. To select remove the selected files and folders from your To drive once they have been added to the hard archive, the Delete files after archiving checkbox. select protect the of your archive with a password, select the Password Protect Archive To contents all type password into and field beside it. Note that not a archive types support checkbox, the and some formats require them. passwords, Type a path and file name into the Output 5. field, or click Browse to locate a folder on your hard drive. File 6. one of the following: Select only to archive : Adds your files to an existing Add This option is existing available if archive. the specified in the archive File field already exists. Output creating. are you archive Overwrite existing archive : Replaces any existing archive with the This option only available if the archive specified in the Output File field already exists. is When archiving are satisfied with your choices, click Create to begin 7. your files. you Archived Files Extracting (.zip) can extract archived (.zip) files very quickly You easily without leaving ACDSee . You can either extract the and files to a folder or simply double- click and view them. To an Archived File to a Folder: Extract 1. In Manage mode, navigate to the folder containing the archived file, using the Folders pane . 2. the archived file in the File List. Click 3. Click Edit | Extract to Folder . to 4. In the Extract dialog, Folder navigate to, and select the folder where you want to keep the files. 5. To a new folder, click Create Folder , type in the name of the folder and then press Enter . create want Use Overwriting duplicate files drop- down list if you the to specify what do so with files in the 6. folder that have the same name as those you are extracting. You can select any of the following: do Ask be asked what to To about each individual file. : Rename : Duplicates are given a new name. Replace Duplicate files are overwritten. : Skip : No duplicates are extracted. 7. Click OK . Archived Inside an File: To View Files of Page 107 334

108 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Manage navigate to the folder containing the archived file. 1. mode, click 2. file. the Double- archived File contents the archived file the in the of List pane. Thumbnails of open Images Printing ACDSee print utility, you can print your images on any size of paper, With any orientation, and at any the in your can support. You can also use the print utility to create and printer contact sheets, complete resolution print headers, footers, and captions specific to each image. with you change the options in the Print dialog box, you can view a dynamically As preview of the image and its updated position the page. You can adjust the output size, print multiple copies of each image, and change the on of the on each page. orientation images Your Print Images: To the image or 1. you want to print. Select images Do one of the following: 2. Manage click File | Print . In mode, View mode, click File | Print All Images . (If you want to In a single image in View mode , print select Image .) Print Under Print 3. do one of the following: layout, page list. Format the Select Full from and then choose a print size format Select then set the Contact sheet and options to define the appearance sheet Contact your contact sheet . of the Layout then choose one of and available layout options. Select the On want Printer Options tab, specify the printer you 4. to use, the paper size, the orientation, the pages number copies you want, the range of of that you want to print, and image resolution. widths. 5. On the Page Settings tab, specify the image position on the paper and the margin you are 6. Specify the number of prints of each photo. If option this printing a Full page or a Contact sheet a is on the Page Settings tab. If you are printing available Layout this option is available below the list of layouts. if 7. Add captions, headers, or footers . You can only add captions, headers, or footers a you are printing Full page or Contact sheet . a 8. Print . Click Setting Printer Options When printing your printer with ACDSee , you can specify which printer you want to use, and set the images dialog box. options on the Printer Options tab in the Print Options Printer of Page 108 334

109 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Specifies the you want to use. Select a printer from the drop- down list and click the Printer printer Help to its options. Refer to the printer manufacturer's set file or manual for Properties button information. more size Specifies the size of Paper paper, e.g. Letter, Legal, A4. the Orientation Portrait or Landscape page orientation. Specifies Specifies number of copies you want to print. Copies the range Select one of Print following options: the All Prints all of : pages in the document. the in Pages from : Prints a range of pages. Specify the first and last pages of the range the fields. image. a in pixels- per- inch (PPI) for Specifies resolution The higher the value, the more Resolution the per inch, and the higher the resolution of the printed image. For example, 600 PPI is dots x (600 inch. 600) pixels per square 360,000 images. Filter resampling filter to use when printing the Click the drop- down list and Specifies select one of the following: jaggies Box Displays considerable tiling or : when you resize an image. displays Triangle : Produces good results for image reduction and enlargement, but lines. transition sharp Bicubic : results with photo- realistic images and with images that are Produces good complex. interpolation to minimize the raggedness normally or irregular Uses image expansion. associated with Smoothes the image. Bell : may : smooth Spline but Produces cause excessive blurring. B- transitions, : Produces the sharpest images, but may also introduce some ringing Lanczos artifacts. Mitchell smooth transitions when enlarging Produces realistic images. This : photo- is good compromise between the ringing effect of Lanczos and the blurring effect filter other filters. of a Applies gamma correction to the printed images. Type to number from 0.10 Gamma 3.00 in the the Gamma to adjust the gamma of the image. Higher values make field image appear value brighter, while lower values make the image appear darker. Use EXIF optimize will printer, your Your camera may capture EXIF information that, when shared with your and printing results. Select this option if 2.2 camera printing printer support EXIF 2.2 printing. when available Setting Image Size and Positioning are can use the Page Settings tab in the Print dialog box to adjust and control the size of the images you You each printing, and the positioning of images on page. Page Options Settings of Page 109 334

110 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio position Specifies to place the image on each page. Page where Top the the margins. Type a value or click the arrows in the of , Margins Specifies size Left , and Right spin boxes. , Bottom prints Specifies how many copies of each image to print. The print utility adds pages as Number of required. the Specifies whether you want Automatically print utility to determine automatically which utility based rotate changes orientation to use for each picture If you select the checkbox, the print image. format each page's orientation to best print the image you are printing. on suit aspect aspect Specifies whether Maintain want the print utility to maintain the original image's you ratio Select one of the following options to indicate how the print utility should handle ratio. aspect ratio oversized images: the for the to print format : Prints only image part of fit image that fits Crop the the print format. within image to fit print format : Prints the entire image, reduced to fit Shrink the inside format. print Text Pages Adding to can add headers and footers to pages, and captions beneath your images. You To Add to Your Printed Images: Captions In 1. Print dialog box, click the Caption tab. the Select . text caption 2. Use 3. Click to open the Font dialog box and set the font options. Font In you text box, type the text 4. want the caption to display. the information 5. Metadata to insert file- specific Insert into the caption for each image. Click 6. In the Text alignment drop- down list, select the caption positioning. each 7. the maximum number of text lines for set caption to display, select the Number of lines To checkbox, and then specify a number in the field. Pages: To Headers and Footers to Your Printed Add 1. Do one of the following: Use Click the Header tab and select header . text Click tab and select Use footer text . Footer the Click Font to open the Font dialog box and set the font options. 2. want In text box, type the text you the the header or footer to display. 3. To number insert the current page number or the total 4. of pages into the text, click Insert Page Number , and select an option from the menu. then 5. In the positioning. alignment drop- down list, select the header or footer Text number 6. To set a maximum number of text lines, select the Number of lines checkbox, and then specify a field. the in of Page 110 334

111 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Contact Sheet Options Setting Printing sheet format of the print utility contains settings you can adjust to control the appearance, The Contact area you of thumbnails. size you saved your format options as a preset your can select the preset. layout, and If Format Options Sheet Contact Thumbnail Specifies the number of columns and rows to create on each Size page. settings or the space between rows of columns. In Spacing amount Specifies and Vertical spin the type a number to Horizontal boxes, the amount of space to display. indicate options Use thumbnail frame Creates a frame around each Frame thumbnail. Margin the width of the frame. Specifies color Specifies frame's color. Click the color picker to define a Solid the color. Browse an image Tiled use as a frame. Click Specifies to locate image to image you want to use. the options Colored drop shadow Creates a drop shadow effect around each Thumbnail Click thumbnail. the picker to define a color. color around edge a fading frame effect Creates the image. Click the Colored fade picker to define a color. color Click matte a matte effect around each thumbnail. Creates the color Colored picker to define a color. on effect This thumbnail. Beveled edges Creates a beveled edge effect each is not in the Preview window. displayed background Click Solid color Prints a solid color as a background for the page. Page the color to options define a color. picker the image a Tiled image as Prints background for the page. Click tiled Browse to locate the image you want to use. About Editing Batch In ACDSee you can make one type of edit to many images. For example, if you need to resize multiple images you multiple can the Batch Resize tool. Or, if you need to rotate use photos by 90 degrees you can use the Batch Rotate/Flip tool. speed You can up the batch editing workflow by tagging your files. For example, you can quickly tag the files you pane. want then click Tagged in the Catalog pane to display all the tagged files in the File List change, Then you to can the files and choose a batch select tool. Converting Multiple Images to Another File Format You can convert multiple images to any supported file format. You can set the options for each format individually, defaults specify to handle multiple- page images, and apply the conversion how automatically. The Convert File Format Wizard guides you through the process. to File Another Format: To Convert an Image of Page 111 334

112 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 1. of mode, In or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Convert File select one Manage . Format click Tools | Modify | mode, File Format . In View Convert the Select a format page, select a new format for your image or images from 2. list displayed on the On the tab. Format wizard. the tab to change the settings for this Options Advanced 3. Select Next to continue. Click 4. 5. Set output options page, identify where you want to place the converted images, and specify how On the want the wizard to handle any file name you by selecting one of the following options from the conflicts Overwrite files drop- down list: existing : Prompts when overwriting a file. Ask you Cancels and operation if there is a file with the same file name : extension. Skip the : Overwrites file without prompting for confirmation. Replace the Prompts you to rename the file. Rename : Click Next 6. continue. to 7. the Set multiple page options page, you can specify how you want to handle any multiple- page images On you are converting. convert, you not select any multiple- page images If did and did not specify a multiple- page image to on options file page. format as your output this format, you can skip the 8. When are satisfied with your choices, click Start Convert , and wait a few seconds while the wizard you your converts images. or Flipping Multiple Images Rotating angles. can or flip You images at preset rotate multiple To Rotate or Flip an Image: 1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Rotate/Flip . you 2. the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog box, select the angle of rotation In want to apply. See below for an explanation of each angle. rotation 3. If you select an image with multiple pages and want to apply the selected angle of to all of the pages, select Apply to all pages of the current image checkbox. the Do of the following: 4. one Next Image to move on to the next selected image. The Click Image button is not available Next if Apply to all the images box is checked. selected If you select multiple images and you want to apply the same angle of rotation to all of them, select the to all selected images checkbox. Apply Click Options to specify how you want to save and store the images. rotations 5. you are ready to apply the When to your images, click Start Rotate . Flip / Rotate Angles of Page 112 334

113 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard the image clockwise 90 degrees. Rotates counter- image 180 degrees. Rotates the the image clockwise 90 degrees. Rotates the Rotates according to any EXIF data contained within image image. (Does not affect images the without EXIF information.) Flips the image along the vertical axis. Flips image along the horizontal axis. the Flips the image along the vertical axis, and then rotates it counter- clockwise 90 degrees. and Flips image along the vertical axis, the then rotates it clockwise 90 degrees. rotation. of angle custom You can also use the Rotate tool in Edit mode to rotate an image using a Setting and Flipped File Options Rotated You can change the settings in the Batch Image Rotate/Flip Options dialog box to control where ACDSee places specify modified how to handle file duplication conflicts, and images, whether you want to preserve the last- Batch modified date of the file when you use the Rotate/Flip Images tool. To the Rotate and Flip Options: Set 1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Rotate/Flip . button. 2. the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog box, click the Options In described 3. the options as Set below. 4. Click OK . and Rotate Options Flip of Page 113 334

114 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard lossless JPEG Rotates JPEG images without decompressing and re- compressing the JPEG Force As quality result, the image does not lose operations when rotated or flipped. information. a Select options to place the new images. where one of the following options: File Specifies original files : Remove/replace the original file with the new Overwrites image. folder modified place in source and : Adds identifying Rename images to the image names and places them labels the same folder as the in originals. folder modified in the Place images : Places the converted following a select and image in a folder that you can specify. Click the Browse button folder. when Ask : Prompts you file. overwriting a existing Overwrite files : Cancels the operation if file is a Skip with the same file name and there extension. Replace : Overwrites the file. Rename : Prompts you to rename the file. Preserve last- file. the Retains the date and time properties of dates modified Remember and apply an rotate you time Automatically image. the same settings the next applies rotation last the performed been have images Auto- close progress after box dialog adjusted. Automatically closes the all all if dialog succeed operations next Save current Rotate/Flip Stores the current settings and applies them the settings time you use the default Images Wizard. as Resizing Multiple Images of can resize a group a images by specifying their dimensions in pixels, specifying You percentage of their original print size, by constraining them to a physical or size. To Resize a Group of Images: . 1. In Manage mode, select one or more images, and then click Tools | Batch | Resize following options: 2. In the Batch Resize Images dialog box, select one of the a Percentage : Resizes the images to original percentage of their original size. of Size in pixels : Resizes the images to a specific size in pixels. images Actual/Print : Resizes the size to specific printed dimensions. 3. selection Set the options for your as explained in the table below. images. 4. Options to specify how you want to save and store the Click your 5. you are satisfied with When choices, click Start Resize . . mode You can also resize an image, and use alternate resampling filters, in Edit Resize Options of Page 114 334

115 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Enter of how to resize the images. Specifies a percentage less than Percentage Percentage to reduce the images, and greater original 100 to enlarge 100 than them. Specifies whether the resize is applied to the height, width, or Apply to both. in pixels Width Specifies the Size width for the images in pixels. new Height the new height for the images in pixels. Specifies Specifies the to scale the images. Select one of Resize following how options: are Enlarge Resizes only those images that only : smaller than the specified height and width. Reduce only : Resizes only those images that are larger than the height and width. specified the or Resizes all images to : specified Enlarge reduce and width. height original images. original Retains the width- Preserve height ratio of the to- ratio aspect is within whether the Fit ratio Specifies maintained based on the aspect specified width. For more information about how the different options combinations images, see Pixel resize the and affect resulting action . Actual/Print measurement. Units Specifies the units of size images. Specifies the new width for the Width Height Specifies the new height for the images. the for resolution images. Resolution Specifies the print Preserve original images. Retains the width- to- height ratio of the original ratio aspect within Specifies whether the aspect ratio is maintained based on the Fit width. more specified information about how the different For combinations the images, see Pixel resize options and affect resulting action . Adjusting For Multiple Images Exposure In ACDSee , you can lighten or darken the colors of an image or a group of images with the Batch Adjust Exposure the Wizard. can adjust each image individually and preview You changes before applying, or make adjustments to automatically an image and all apply the same changes to of the images you selected. You can save your settings as a preset for future use. also Adjust Exposure: To Image In Manage mode, select one or more 1. and then click Tools | Batch | Adjust Exposure . images, 2. In the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box, do one or more of the following: select To exposure, contrast, and fill light level, image the Exposure tab and adjust the adjust options. To precisely adjust the contrast and light levels in your images, select the Levels tab and set the options. and set options. the To adjust image exposure automatically, select the Auto Levels tab of Page 115 334

116 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio precisely adjust RGB color channels in your image, select the Tone Curves tab and set the To the options. Do of the following: 3. one Apply settings to all selected images checkbox Select apply the current settings to all the to the images you selected. of select Apply settings to all selected images and click Next De- to move to the next Image image, then repeat step 2 for each image you want to adjust. and Click the to specify how you want to save and store 4. images. Options Click . All Images 5. Filter levels can adjust your image's You and color also in Edit mode. exposure Adjusting Batch Exposure Options images. options four are You can use the There in the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog to correct the exposure of your and tabs Exposure section: Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, the Tone Curves. in Use the To Options: Exposure In the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box, use the following options. Exposure Options image. Exposure Specifies the amount of light to add to all areas of the the brightness Auto Automatically corrects the exposure based upon image. the of and Contrast the amount of difference between color Specifies brightness in an image. Moving the to slider in the right darkens the shadowed areas an image, while moving the slider to the left brightens them. image. the Fill Light Specifies the amount of light to add to the darkest areas of Options Levels of Page 116 334

117 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Specifies the or color channel you want to adjust. Channel brightness the point of an image. Specifies black Shadows slider or type a number Move 0 to 255 into the spin box to define the blackest the from of an image. area the value increases, the dark colored areas of the image become As darker. Specifies gamma correction in an image. Midtones the the slider or type a number Move 0.00 to 2.00 into the spin box to set the amount of from gamma correction. Higher values make the image appear brighter, while lower values make the appear darker. image Specifies white point of an image. Highlights the the slider or type a Move from 0 to 255 into the spin box to define the whitest number area of an image. As the value increases, the light colored areas of the image become lighter. Clipped Indicates how much of the image detail % lost due to black point and white point is correction. icon Black Click the button with the black eyedropper Point to adjust the black point. Select the area the for image. Eyedropper After in the Before image that you want to set as the black point Mid Point Click the button with the gray eyedropper icon to adjust the gamma correction value. want Select area in the Before image that you Eyedropper to set as the gamma correction value. the White Point area Click the button with the white eyedropper icon to adjust the white point. Select the the Eyedropper Before image that you want to set as the white point for the After image. in Auto Levels Options Strength Adjusts the amount of exposure applied to the image. differences, Auto and channels. Adjusts color Contrast brightness, and image color Color color Auto Contrast Adjusts the and differences brightness only. Auto Color color within the whole image. Balances Curves Tone Options Channel Specifies the color channels to adjust. Histogram Toggles the histogram display. Show levels Histogram visual representation of the color information a in the image, based on the Displays selected channel. Click and drag the line to manipulate the curve. Renaming Multiple Files You can the Batch Rename tool to rename You files. use can specify a template with a numerical or multiple alphabetical sequence, save your template for future use, replace specific characters or phrases, and insert file- specific information into each new file name. a Group Files: of To Rename of Page 117 334

118 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio click In select one or more files, and then mode, Tools | Batch | Rename . 1. Manage In the 2. Rename dialog box, do one or more of the following: Batch Select the Template tab to specify the Template options. Replace and Search to Select the Search and Replace tab options. set the settings Select Options tab to adjust the Advanced for the Batch Rename tool. the your the changes to the file names in Review Preview field. 3. Click Start Rename . CD- You cannot rename any file on a read- only file system, such as a ROM. Options Rename Batch of Page 118 334

119 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Select the Template to rename files checkbox to create a renaming template. You can Template Use numerical specify sequence for the new file names, and use the original file or a alphabetical or names based on image metadata. names, new names, the to use to rename the files. Displays Template template asterisk (*) to insert the original file name into the template. Type an or Use number signs (#) to insert numeric or alphabetic one more which you selected. depending options characters, arrow on the drop- down list to select a recently- Click template. the used Templates the recently- used templates from Clears Templates drop- down list. Clear the numbers to numeric any Replaces Use number signs (#) in the template with sequential replace #'s characters. letters to Use Replaces any number signs (#) in the template name with sequential alphabetic replace #'s characters. Specifies the first letter or number of the sequence. Start at Inserts information specific Metadata into the file name template. Insert file- and the the Template field, in then click Insert Position cursor Metadata open the Choose Property dialog box. Select the metadata to you to insert, and then click OK . want name file Specifies upper or lower case for file names and File format extensions. case rename and the Use Search and Replace to Search files checkbox to replace certain letters or Select upper Replace change with letters words in the file names. You can replace spaces case underscores, or to lower combine your changes with any naming template. case, and replace Identifies characters you want to for in the file names. Search the with Identifies the characters to use in place of the original text. Replace search sensitive whether you want to limit the Indicates to the same case you Case in the typed Search for field. adjust Advanced any of the Advanced Options to Select the behavior of the Batch Rename tool. Options Automatically is process renaming the Closes the Batch Rename dialog box when wizard close complete. when finished Save current rename Stores you current settings and loads them the next time the files. settings as defaults if you Warn about the of Provides a warning part as have changed the file extension changes extension template. resolves any naming Automatically by adding an underscore Automatically conflicts name. of resolve a sequential number to the end naming each file and conflicts About the ACDSee Database The ACDSee database stores image and media file information automatically when you browse your folders. This the process is called cataloging. The database increases speed with which you can browse your computer, and filter you use the information stored in the database to sort, organize, search, and can your images and media files. You can also backup, restore, and share database information. file on You can store cached thumbnail previews, and add or edit the following information for each image or media computer: your of Page 119 334

120 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Categories Notes Keywords Labels Color Authors Dates Ratings Captions to exclude folders from the database, and keep also contents of those folders separate from You can choose the and media files. your other images linked ACDSee to a file in ACDSee , the file is Metadata to the database. If you then copy, add you When rename your move, using programs other than ACDSee , such as Windows Explorer, the link to the or files is and this can cause the loss of ACDSee Metadata. database broken Metadata Files ACDSee in Embedding edit or add ACDSee Metadata to your files, If automatically adds the new data to its database. If you you ACDSee the Display have ACDSee metadata reminder checkbox selected in the Options dialog box, (click Tools embed | | Database ), next time you close ACDSee , the Embed ACDSee Metadata in Files dialog box opens and Options Embedding to new data into the changed files themselves. the ACDSee Metadata in the files as well, offers embed a safe way to back up this data and make it easier to retrieve if you should need to. is example, once you have assigned ACDSee Metadata to a file, the file is linked to the database. If the file is For the using Explorer, or any application other than ACDSee , Windows link will be broken. However if you have moved using Metadata ACDSee file embedded this data in the the and the link is broken, you can still retrieve the embedded data the files. in even can to rename, move, or copy the file— ACDSee to another computer— and the embedded ACDSee You use will transfer Metadata the file. with To ACDSee Metadata in a File When You Embed Prompted: Are 1. Do one of the following: To embed data in files that are on a network, select the Include Network Drives checkbox. file To information to a sidecar file if the the format does not support embedding inside the write file, select the Write sidecar files for formats that do not support embedded XMP . and To the current selection in the dialog accept have these options happen automatically in select future, Do not ask me this again . 2. Click to embed the data in the files. A progress bar appears, followed by the Embed Summary Report Yes that the following: dialog lists Selected : Indicates the number of files that you selected. Items actually Processed Indicates the number of files : that were processed. (If you selected Items files that did not need to have date embedded, this number may be different from the Items Selected.) Succeeded Indicates the number of : that had data embedded. files Failed : Indicates the number of files that, for a variety of reasons, could not have data embedded. (To see the Error Log, click View Errors .) . Close 3. Click of Page 120 334

121 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Embed ACDSee at Any Time: To Metadata embed You files at any time. data can in Metadata select Embed ACDSee Metadata , and then | one of the following: | Click Tools Files : Embeds data for all files. All in Embed Selected Files : Embeds data for any Embed that you have selected. in files uses to embed ACDSee Metadata into each file. Only some file formats and file extensions ACDSee XMP In XMP. GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, PSD, and TIF. include the case of these file formats, the support These Metadata is embedded inside the file and so you can rename or move the file outside of ACDSee ACDSee still and able to retrieve the ACDSee Metadata. For formats that currently do not support XMP, be file RAW the ACDSee Metadata is written to a sidecar ABR, that is stored in the same folder including and its file. Because a sidecar file is separate from the file itself, you need to rename or move them as or Metadata could lose the ACDSee together, permanently. you Embed Flag The Pending Manage mode, in the File List pane, the following overlay icon appears on top of files that have In Metadata ACDSee stored the ACDSee database that has not yet been in to the file: written Right- click and choose either: the to metadata Metadata Embed ACDSee file. : Writes the the Clear Flag : Clears this overlay icon, but does not write Pending metadata to the file. Embed Viewing Files That Have Data to Embed If you want to see the files that have data that needs to be embedded, there is a quick way to list them using the Embed Pending option. View That Have Data to Embed: To Files the In pane, under Special Items, click Embed Pending . Catalog All the files that have data to embed are displayed in the File List. Retrieving ACDSee Metadata That is Embedded in Files the If you simply browse to the folder where the files are located, some of Metadata ACDSee is retrieved and written to database. Categories and keywords, however, are not. the to safest to retrieve all the ACDSee Metadata, The categories and keywords), is way click Tools | (including Database | Catalog Files . Then the following applies: If the files are GIF, JPEG, DNG, PNG, and TIF formats, all the data will be retrieved and written to the database. If files still have their sidecar files in the folder, the they still have the same file name, the database and information is retrieved and written to the database. sidecar If files have become separated from their the files or renamed, their ACDSee Metadata cannot be will lost. be and retrieved of Page 121 334

122 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Folders From Database Excluding the choose You folders from the database, and keep the contents separate from your other images and to can exclude excluded default, Program By and Windows folders on your hard drive are automatically the from media files. Files database. the To Manage Your Excluded Folders Settings: Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Excluded Folder Settings 1. In . In Excluded Folders dialog box, do one of the following: 2. the a hard from the database, click Add . Browse to a folder on your exclude drive, and then To folder OK . click folder a from the excluded folders list, To a folder in the list, and then click remove select . Remove To reset excluded folders list to the default settings, click Reset to Defaults . your When you satisfied with your choices, click Close to return to ACDSee . 3. are in Database Files the Cataloging adds file information and thumbnails to ACDSee database as you browse. You can use the Catalog automatically the box to add groups of files to the database without having to first browse dialog folders. This can be particularly the useful using ACDSee for the first time, and when browsing or managing large collections of images as it when the required time reduces for these folders. loading to first you run ACDSee The you are prompted time catalog your files. , To Catalog Your Files: Catalog | click . 1. In Manage mode, Files Tools | Database 2. In to Catalog section, select the checkbox next to the folders you want to catalog. the Folders select want add folders that you not in the list, click Add folder , to the folders you want to include, If are then click OK . and In the Options section, select the information to add the 3. database. to 4. Start . Click cataloged. progress your files as they are shows A bar Click Finish . 5. you are cataloging a large collection of files, do If disrupt the process, or use other software while it is not running. large file collections, it For best to run cataloging overnight. is About the ACDSee Indexer and The ACDSee database stores image media file information automatically when you browse your folders. This process is cataloging. The database increases the speed with which you can browse your files in ACDSee , called sort, and use the information stored in the database to can organize, search, and filter your image and media you files. You can also use the Catalog dialog box to add groups of files to the database without having to first browse not the during this time, you will though, be able to use ACDSee . folders, However, and ACDSee Indexer allows the cataloging process to be undertaken when your computer is idle the or experiencing to disruptions ACDSee is not running. This allows you to avoid having to browse all of your folders, of Page 122 334

123 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio computer's speed usability, or cutting into the time that you are using ACDSee . If the files are modified in your and to the the ACDSee Indexer will automatically catalog them again folders, keep the ACDSee database selected of any date. to up set which folders you would like to be cataloged and how long you You like your computer to be idle can would the Indexer begins to catalog your files. To configure these options, see ACDSee the ACDSee before Setting Options . Indexer Creating and Switching Between Multiple Databases allows you to create multiple databases and switch between them at any time, giving ACDSee complete you organizational over your file collections. control you open for the first time, (and up until you create additional databases), you will be using the When ACDSee called It database is located in: C:\Users\\AppData\Local\ACD original Default.dbin. be All #>. that you create will additional stored in this same location, Systems\Catalogs\\ACDSee.exe" /db "C:\Users\\AppData\Local\ACD of Your . Database>.dbin" Systems\Catalogs\\

124 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio an Older Converting Database use the Database Convert Wizard to take database information from previous versions of ACDSee and You can ACD with to database. This ensures that any information associated current your files using a previous it add your ACDSee is referenced properly in the current database. version of have you added information to your current ACDSee database, it is recommended that you If already backup an your database before converting a older ACDSee database. create of an Database: Convert To Older | Manage click In | Database mode, Convert Database . 1. Tools On the Welcome page, click Next to select your conversion 2. options. 3. the Database Convert Options page, specify the version of the database files you want to convert, as On as the where the database files are located on your hard drive. Click Next . well folder information automatically image thumbnails, IPTC and EXIF rebuild after the conversion process is 4. To select the Rebuild thumbnails, EXIF and IPTC data for local complete, checkbox. images 5. automatically update your database after converting, select the Optimize database files after To checkbox. convert Click Next . 6. On the Summary page, review your 7. and then click Next to convert your database. selections, Importing Database Information database import to or You can use the ACD Database Import Wizard to import archived database information, information that sent to you with images from another ACDSee user. After you import the information, ACDSee was it the associates appropriate images. with ACDSee you already added information If your current have database, it is recommended that you to create a backup of your database before converting an older ACDSee database. To Use ACD Database Import Wizard: the Import In mode, click 1. | Database | Manage , and then select Database . Tools 2. Click Next to start the wizard. of 3. the Import Options page, select the type On exported database information you want to import. image You can import or information from a compressed database version, information from an XML- based text file. to Click button to locate the database you want Browse import, and then click OK . 4. the Select the 5. database files after import checkbox to optimize the database after exiting the Optimize wizard, and then click Next . 6. On the Summary page, review your selections. Click Back to make changes, or click Next to begin importing the information. database Click Finish to 7. the ACD Database Import Wizard. close If you to importing database information sent to you by another ACDSee user, ensure that the images are your drive. on hard which the information applies are in an identical location and folder structure of Page 124 334

125 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio File Information Other Sources Importing From files import into your database from other sources, including ACDSee Photo Discs and information file can You versions of ACDSee . previous from Importing Photo Discs of ACDSee (versions 4.0 and 5.0) created separate database files with a .ddf file Previous for versions extension Discs. can import the Photo Disc database files into your ACDSee database. Photo You a Disc: Import Photo To Manage mode, click Tools | Database 1. Import , and then select Photo Disc . In | In the Open dialog box, locate 2. select the photo disc file you want to import. and 3. Open . Click you import from Photo Discs created with ACDSee 6.0 or later, information must convert and To the the entire database. import Importing Albums previous versions of ACDSee, you could create albums in an .ais file format that consisted of In organized shortcuts your images. Now you can use categories to create albums of images that do not require a to separate file You can, however, import your albums from extension. versions of ACDSee, and add the information previous import. you album each from the albums to the database. ACDSee creates a new category for To Import Information into the Database: Album In . mode, click Tools | Database | Import , and then select Album 1. Manage file In 2. dialog box, locate and select the .ais the you want to import. Open 3. Click Open . Working with Descript.ion Files a In of ACDSee, file descriptions were stored in versions separate descript.ion file in each folder that previous contained images. ACDSee now stores file descriptions as captions in the database, along with other file information such as notes and keywords. the You can use files Descript.ion tools to import your old descript.ion and add the information to the database, or export your file captions to a descript.ion file. existing Import Descript.ion File: To a In Manage mode, click Tools | 1. | Import , and then select Descript.ion File . Database 2. In the Open dialog box, locate and select the descript.ion file you want to import. 3. Click . Open Export To to a Descript.ion File: Captions 1. In Manage . click Tools | Database | Export , and then select Descript.ion File mode, the File field. name 2. In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the descript.ion file in of Page 125 334

126 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Click Save 3. . Information Exporting Database information the Database Export Wizard to save can database ACD in a compressed format, and use You selected then as a backup, or share it with other ACDSee users. You can also choose to export your category and store it definitions to a text keyword file. Exporting database information differs from creating a backup in that you can choose to export only the parts your on your that you want of share or store with specific files, such as those database a CD. Other ACDSee users can to import your information without affecting their existing database. To create a backup of your entire database, including image or media files, use the ACD Database Backup Wizard . To back the contents of a local folder to a remote location, such as a network drive, use the ACD Sync Wizard . up Use the ACD Database Export Wizard: To specific If want to export your 1. information for a you group of images or media files, select the database files in the File List pane in Manage mode. 2. Click | Database | Export | Database . Tools Click Next to begin using the wizard. 3. 4. On the Content and Format Options page, specify how you want to export your database information by options, selecting of the following one and then clicking Next : Exports : entire the Export entire ACDSee database to a read- only, compressed version contents of database to a compressed version that can be shared with other ACDSee your ACDSee users. database for selected items to Export read- only, compressed version : a information selected all database information for the images your in the File List pane. Exports of database information to a text based : Exports the selected information to an XML- Export file text Select the checkboxes next to the information you want to include. file. a On Location Options page, specify 5. location for the exported information, and the name for the text file, a if necessary, and then click Next . 6. On the Summary page, review your choices. You can click Back to make changes, or click Next to begin your exporting database information. 7. Click to close the wizard and return to ACDSee . Finish File Generating Lists can generate a text file that lists all of the You in the folder currently displayed in the File List pane. The text files file places the file name, size, image file format, modified date, image properties, caption, and rating for all of the text files folder into a table, and creates a single the file. in To Generate a List of Your Files: In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Export , and then select Generate File Listing . a ACDSee generates the file listing and opens it as automatically text file in your default text editor. You can text save the file. then edit or of Page 126 334

127 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Up Your Backing Database use You Backup Wizard to back up all of your database information, which you can then restore in the can ACDSee image, a failure of other event. You can also choose to back up your system media, or archive files the case or the relevant database information. with along Backup Wizard The a series of files in a specified location that contain your entire database. The ACDSee creates is using your folder structure and is unique to your computer. To back up portions of your generated backup use to database information with another ACDSee user, share the ACD Database Export Wizard. or database, some suggestions about managing your database backups, see Database backup tips and strategies For . To Up Your Database Information: Back In Manage click Tools | Database | Back Up Database . 1. mode, the new page, select whether you would like to create a On backup, or update an existing 2. Welcome Next Click backup. . please choose update an you backup, to go to step #5. If existing On the New Backup page, select the 3. you would like to back up. Click Next . information 4. the Backup Location page, click Browse and specify a location for your backup, and type a name for On backup Click the Next . file. you On Backup Summary page, review 5. settings. If the chose to update an existing backup, click the your . Next Click backup. Backup to update drop- down list, and then select the existing Backup Information Options of include thumbnails from the backup, saving a substantial amount Excludes storage Do not on your hard drive. space thumbnails Include thumbnails such Includes only thumbnails for files that do not reside on your hard drive, for files as PhotoDiscs. offline thumbnails Includes all thumbnails in the database. This will require more space on your Include drive store hard the backup. to with files Backs up the specified file types type the database information. Select from the Backup of file types: following : Image image files in the backup. Includes : Media audio and video files in the backup. Includes Archive : Includes archive files in the backup. all All of specified types Backs up files specified files on your hard drive. drives on your local hard up All specified types drives. network and drive hard your Backs of all specified files on files hard network and local on drives All files of specified types and button Browse the Click Backs up all specified files in a specified folder. back (including a in select the folder to folder up. subfolders) Database Backup Tips and Strategies The ACDSee database stores information about your files, including EXIF information, file name and folder location, you thumbnails, ratings, and any other information categories, add using the Properties pane. The more more information, the important information you store in the database, and the more time you spend entering that of Page 127 334

128 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio is to up your database, and to have a good strategy for managing your backups. Losing hours of work to a it back or system event is something that should, and can, be avoided. other crash uncontrollable Schedule Backup or to back How depends on how often you add you change information in the database. A good rule often need up would be to back up your data as often as you want to avoid retyping it. You can use the backup reminder use to on Database page of the Options dialog box to set a regular reminder for yourself to back up the data settings your often you think appropriate. Business environments and as users should back up every day. as professional is also recommended that you back up your database before It any major adjustments to it, such as performing importing from another ACDSee user, or converting a database from a previous version of ACDSee . information Location Backup good idea to consider where you back up your data, as well as how often. If you're backing up to a hard It's your ACDSee a new folder for each day. This helps creates avoid overwriting your backup, and gives you drive, to increments from which you can restore. Also helpful several a monthly backup that is stored in a different is physical than your computer, such as a network drive. location Size Backup keep the size of the backup small, choose to back up database information only, To back up your images and separately, on a regular basis. also Backup Tips and Strategies Database folder and name stores The ACDSee database location, information about your files, including EXIF information, file thumbnails, categories, and any other information you add using the Properties pane. The more ratings, you information, in the database, and the more time you spend entering that information the more important store strategy is it up your database, and to have a good to for managing your backups. Losing hours of work to a back system crash or other uncontrollable event is something that should, and can, be avoided. Backup Schedule add often need to back up depends on how often How you or change information in the database. A good rule you to use would be to back up your data as often as you want to avoid retyping it. You can use the backup reminder box settings on the Database page of the Options dialog regular to set a reminder for yourself to back up your data as often you think appropriate. Business environments and professional users should back up every day. as is any recommended that you back up your database before performing It major adjustments to it, such as also from importing another ACDSee user, or converting a database from a previous version of ACDSee . information Backup Location It's a good idea to consider where you back up your data, as well as how often. If you're backing up to your hard helps drive, a new folder for each day. This creates to avoid overwriting your backup, and gives you ACDSee different increments from which you can restore. Also helpful is a monthly backup that is stored in a several a drive. network as physical location than your computer, such of Page 128 334

129 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Size Backup the size of the backup small, choose to back up database information only, and back up your images To keep on a basis. separately, also regular From Backup Information a Database Restoring the ACD Database Restore You to restore previously backed up database information. can use Wizard Database Information: To Restore Manage | click Tools | Database In Restore Database . 1. mode, select the click Next to page, the backup. On Welcome 2. the Restore Options page, select 3. backup and date from which you want to restore, or browse to the On the of your backup and select a location file. .bkup 4. Next when you are ready to restore your database. Click restoring a from a series of backup files, ACDSee will only restore the information included When backup it and the selected backup file. Therefore, unless required, to is recommended that you select the in prior file in the backup sequence. last the Maintaining Database is recommended that you regularly perform database maintenance and optimization to increase hard drive It remove increase or extraneous information, and space, overall ACDSee performance. redundant box can the tools You the Database Maintenance dialog use to update folders, or to identify folders whose in a displays box you thumbnails and database information list would like to delete. The Database Maintenance dialog specific of on your system, and uses icons to indicate the status of database information within folders folders. the Database Icons Content contains files with Folder thumbnails stored in the database. cached Folder contains files that were changed without a database update. For example, a folder or file was . renamed outside of ACDSee moved or To Perform Database Maintenance: 1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Database Maintenance . folders 2. the Database Maintenance dialog box, browse for In marked with the database content icons. If you there are no marked folders, maintenance do not need to perform database and can exit the Database Maintenance dialog box. to Select folder and click one of the following buttons to identify the maintenance you 3. a perform on want that folder: information Thumbnails Removes all Remove : for the selected folder. thumbnail Remove All DB Info : Deletes all database and thumbnail information for the selected folder. or Remove : Deletes any out- of- date Folders broken references to missing files or Orphan on for the selected folder. It is only possible to check for orphans in folders located information network. a located on your computer. This option will not be visible if the folder is of Page 129 334

130 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Binding : all location references for the selected orphaned folder to another Change Changes folder retains information. The default binding database is My Pictures. and folder, all Database Maintenance tool will delete records, creating unused space in your database. To reclaim 4. The space, , Optimize Database unused and follow the instructions in the wizard. the click Close Click 5. . Database Optimizing the redundant use Optimize Database can to quickly remove the or outdated database records. Optimizing You Wizard database, along with performing regular database maintenance , helps regain hard drive space and improves your overall the of ACDSee . performance you are large numbers of files regularly, it is helpful to optimize weekly, or after an extended cataloging If the This also a good time to backup is database. session. cataloging Optimize Your Database: To In Manage mode, click Tools | Database | Optimize 1. . Database 2. the Database Optimization Wizard, click Next . In Select or both of the following: 3. one the database tables and fields : Removes obsolete Optimize from the database, information reduces space used by database the and re- indexes the tables. fields, files by caused Remove or orphans from database : Removes any orphan database entries, folders deleted programs. by other Next Click . 4. the wizard has finished, click Finish to 5. to ACDSee . When return Drives For an Incoming Database Mapping you are upgrading to ACDSee or are importing or restoring your ACDSee database, the Database Drive Mapping If re- displays mappings (in the incoming database) will be drive established in the ACDSee database. You how dialog use this dialog to change how each drive will be mapped in the database. can Select New Drive Mappings: To Database In the select Drive Mapping dialog, 1. a drive and do one of the following: To create new drive map, select Create new database entry. a Drive map drive to a local drive, To a drive from the Local the drop- down list. select 2. Click Done . Rebuilding Thumbnails and Metadata Situations can develop in which your images will be out of sync with the thumbnail images displayed in the File List the pane the embedded metadata. You can use and Rebuild Thumbnails and Metadata tool to immediately the regenerate the thumbnails for selected images and rebuild metadata. Thumbnails: Rebuild To of Page 130 334

131 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Manage do one of the following: 1. mode, or Select in the File List pane. more one thumbnails in Folders pane. folder the Select a | Metadata | 2. Thumbnails and Metadata . Click Tools Rebuild Files Quarantined has trouble reading a corrupted or incomplete image or media file, or a file causes If plug- in to generate ACDSee a error, will quarantine that file. You can view a list of quarantined files, and remove a file from ACDSee list. an the View Files: To Quarantined | Manage click In | Database mode, Quarantine Files . 1. Tools To remove a file, select it in the list, and 2. click Remove . then 3. disable the Quarantine feature, clear the Enable Quarantine checkbox. To Click OK close the Quarantine Files dialog box and return to ACDSee . 4. to Plug- with ins Working in is a software module that adds functionality to A larger program. ACDSee comes standard with many plug- a plug- ins. different of Plug- ins Types Decode Converts Image a file from a binary format to the image displayed in ACDSee . Decode plug- ins : view ACDSee display images allow many different file formats. The files that you can to with ACDSee of depend which decoding plug- ins on installed on your computer. are Converts allow ins plug- Image Encode : Encode the image displayed in ACDSee to a binary file format. and ACDSee (or convert) images to many different file formats. The files that you can edit save save to with depend on which encoding plug- ACDSee are installed on your computer. ins Archive : Allows ACDSee to display and save archives of many different file formats. The archives that you archive can create with ACDSee depend on which and plug- ins are installed on your computer. view Camera : Allows ACDSee to browse images on your digital camera and transfer them to a folder on your hard drive. a Command Extension : Adds functionality to ACDSee . For example, there is use plug- in that you can to share your over the Internet. images Extension digital Adds a pane to ACDSee where you can perform tasks like order prints of your Pane : images. certified ensure the quality of plug- ins that are not We by ACD Systems. As with any other piece of cannot software, you are trusting that the plug- in is free of viruses and that the company that produced the plug- is trustworthy. in Managing Plug- ins The Plug- in Settings dialog box displays also list of all the ACDSee plug- ins installed on your computer. You can a ACDSee ins uses. plug- use the Plug- in Settings dialog box to control which of Page 131 334

132 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Access the in Settings Dialog Box: To Plug- . mode, Tools Manage Plug- in Settings click In | a Plug- in Disabling can disable a plug- in in the Plug- in You dialog box so that ACDSee no longer uses it. Settings To a plug- in: Disable select In Plug- in 1. dialog box, the one of the Plug- in tabs. Settings 2. Clear the checkbox beside the name of the plug- in that you do not want ACDSee to use. 3. Click . OK the in Order Changing Plug- file formats can be supported by more Some one plug- in. However, when this happens, you can control than which plug- in is used to read or write a file format. The order that plug- ins appear in the Plug- in Settings dialog read box the order that ACDSee uses the plug- ins to is or write a file. To Change the Plug- in Order: the tabs. in Plug- 1. In the Plug- in Settings dialog box, select one of 2. Select in in the Plug- ins list. a plug- one the following: Do of 3. Move up button to Click the plug- in higher in the list. the move the Move down button to list. the plug- in lower in the Click move 4. OK . Click Plug- Properties and Getting Help Viewing in can view and set You for certain plug- ins. properties To View Plug- in Properties: 1. In the Plug- in Settings dialog box , select one of the Plug- in tabs. 2. Select a plug- in in the Plug- ins list. 3. Click Properties button. the View Plug- in's Help File: To a In the Plug- in 1. dialog box , select one of the Plug- in tabs. Settings 2. Select a plug- in in the Plug- ins list. 3. the Plug- in Help button. Click ACDSee SeeDrive™ The ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane ACDSee direct access to your ACDSee 365 account. You can use the provides an 365.acdsee.com, downloads to SeeDrive™ to manage your ACDSee 365 images, and monitor your uploads and of Page 132 334

133 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard purchase sharing service. An ACDSee 365 account requires a membership or the storage of additional image and which you can obtain at 365.acdsee.com. storage, SeeDrive™ allows you to ACDSee through your online images without having to launch an Internet browse browser. you can go to 365.acdsee.com with an Alternatively, browser. To view the SeeDrive™ pane, go Internet to Panes | SeeDrive . To Use SeeDrive™: ACDSee ACDSee the SeeDrive™ pane, press Connect and In your ACDSee 365 login credentials. If you do not have enter an ACDSee 365 account , select Create an account . Alternatively, you login through 365 mode . can Your ACDSee 365 Files with SeeDrive™ Managing mode. can create, rename, and delete ACDSee 365 folders directly from ACDSee SeeDrive™ in Manage You a Create Folder: New To click 1. ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, right- the your username and select New Online In Folder... 2. In the New Online Folder dialog, enter a name for your folder and press OK . drag To a newly created folder to an existing folder hierarchy, add the new folder to your desired location inside of it. Create To Folder: a New Folder Inside an Existing folders 1. ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, expose your the by clicking the arrow next to your In username. 2. Right- click your desired folder and select New Online Folder... for 3. the New Online Folder dialog, enter a name In your folder and press OK . To Rename a Folder: select . Rename and In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, right- click the folder of Page 133 334

134 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Delete a To Folder: select ACDSee in Manage mode, right- click the folder and pane Delete . SeeDrive™ the In a File: Rename To the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, 1. to and open your desired folder. In navigate In File List pane, right- click the file the select Rename . 2. and Delete a File: To In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, navigate to and open your 1. folder. desired 2. the File List pane, right- click the file and select Delete . In Uploading Uploading to ACDSee 365 with SeeDrive™: Files upload a folder : Select a folder from the Folders pane and drag it into your desired folder in To ACDSee SeeDrive™. pane upload files : Select your desired files in the File To individual and drag them into your List desired folder in ACDSee SeeDrive™. and SeeDrive™ Manage Transfer selecting your uploads by right- clicking any folder in ACDSee Manager... Use Manager controls as described in the table below. Transfer the Downloading Files from ACDSee 365 with SeeDrive™: Downloading Select your destination folder in the Folders pane. 1. ACDSee Select folder you would like to download in 2. SeeDrive™, right- click and choose Download . the Manage your downloads by right- clicking any folder in ACDSee SeeDrive™ and selecting Transfer Manager... Use as the Transfer Manager controls described in the table below. Transfer Manager Options the or Downloads tab. Choose Uploads Restarts paused transfer Pauses transfer Cancels transfer Retry transfer Select all Clear finished Making Folders Private or Public ACDSee You set folders to private or public in the can SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode. When you make a folder or 365.acdsee.com. browse search public, anyone can find and see the images in that folder when they of Page 134 334

135 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio folders are to private by default. New set Using an Folder to Public 365 ACDSee SeeDrive™: Change ACDSee To the ACDSee SeeDrive™ 1. expose your folders by clicking the arrow next to your username. In pane, Right- click the folder you want to make public, and select Make Public . 2. Change To ACDSee 365 Folder Back to Private Using ACDSee SeeDrive™: an In to ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane, expose your folders by clicking the arrow next 1. your username. the select Right- 2. folder you want to make private, and click Make Private . the Sharing and Downloading with ACDSee SeeDrive™ ACDSee within right online You can perform sharing and downloading actions on your SeeDrive™. content from downloads You view and manage the progress of your uploads and also with the Transfer Manager. can a Folder with Sharing SeeDrive™ ACDSee You can share your ACDSee 365 folders with others right from your ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane. You can share using widget. Email, post to a social networking site, or create a To Share SeeDrive™: ACDSee Your Folders Using your next the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, expose In folders by clicking the arrow 1. to your username. the 2. Right- click folder you want to share and select Share Folder . described below. 3. In the Share window, select your sharing method and enter your information, as Share Options of Page 135 334

136 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Scroll through images at the bottom of the window and uncheck any photos you Email your wish entered include. After you have not the information below, press OK . do to Addresses Email your recipients' email addresses. Separate Enter Recipient addresses with commas. email multiple Message Enter a message for your recipients. Your download Allow largest of largest Allow your recipient (s) to download the JPG versions of your images. available available me too Select this checkbox to receive a copy of your Email email. Optional access password If you would like your album private be to password protected, enter the password here. The to in password will be available (s) your recipient enter the your email, which they can then of body to gain access to your album. Facebook™ Scroll through your images at the bottom of the window and uncheck any photos you completed do wish to include. After you have not the steps listed below, press Upload . Press Upload to Facebook™ to this button launch Facebook™ in a browser and your login credentials. enter menu, existing From Select drop- down Facebook™ select one of your the albums existing Facebook™ photo album you would like your added to. photos Or create a new one new you would like your photos uploaded to a If the of Facebook™ photo album, enter the name album here. Twitter™ Scroll your images at the bottom of the window and uncheck any photos you through not completed to include. After you have do the steps listed below, press wish . Upload Press this button to launch Twitter™ Twitter™ a browser in and enter your login credentials. Shorten URL with bit.ly Shortens the length of your album's URL, allowing you more for your message. characters Preview a preview of your post. Displays Characters left Displays how many characters you have left of your message. Allow download of largest available largest Allows viewers to download the JPG available versions of your images. a Widget A photo widget is can sort of an image viewer or slideshow that be placed on a website or This option generates a piece of html code that you can copy and blog. the onto website or blog. paste through your images at the bottom of your Scroll window uncheck any photos you and not wish to include. do Orientation Select the orientation of your photo widget from the drop- menu. down widget Select color theme of Theme photo the from your the drop- down menu. Size Select the size of your photo widget from the drop- menu. down Sharing Your Folders by SeeDrive™ and Pasting its URL Using ACDSee Copying else. email, anywhere or You can copy the URL of a folder from ACDSee SeeDrive™ and paste it in a browser, of Page 136 334

137 ACDSee Standard 2018 Photo Studio You can only copy an URL from a public folder. Copying and Pasting a Folder's URL: your to next arrow 1. In the ACDSee SeeDrive™ pane in Manage mode, expose your folders by clicking the username. want 2. Right- click the folder you . to share and select Copy URL Right- URL. the paste 3. to click and select Paste , or press CTRL + V , wherever you would like of Page 137 334

138 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard 4: Photos Chapter Mode Mode Photos Using is a quick and convenient way to view Photos entire image collection by date. Photos mode displays mode your that have been cataloged . Images in Photos mode are images by the date they were taken, as indicated displayed in images' EXIF data. If the EXIF data does not contain a the taken, Photos mode will display the images based date on the modified date. You can modify the date taken by using Batch Adjust Time Stamp . Photos mode two areas: contains cataloged pane pane displays all of your This photo collection by date. Date : pane : This Timeline displays the year and month of your photos and how many photos are in each. pane Viewing Images of Images displayed in Photos mode by date. To toggle viewing them by year, month, or day, do one are the following: pane. the Year , Month , or Day Click at the bottom right of the Date buttons Day to Month view. Use the forward and back arrows at the top left to move from Year to Choose View Year / Month / Day . | an view. to move from Year to Month to Day Click image to on Click entry in the Timeline pane a navigate to the images from that time. year/month To View Only Your Microsoft OneDrive® Photo Collection: Click the drop- down menu and select OneDrive . Filter View All of Your Photo Collection (Including OneDrive): To Click the Filter drop- down menu and select All . To View Photos from Your Pictures Folder Only: and Click the Filter drop- down menu Pictures select . To View from Your Desktop Only: Photos the drop- down menu and select Desktop . Click Filter View Orphaned Files with Your Photo Collection: To the Click Orphan Files button at the top of Show Date pane. Orphaned files will appear in sepia. the To View a Larger Version of an Image: Do one the following: of click an Double- to open it in View mode. image Select an image and press Enter to toggle between View mode and Photos mode. To Open an Image in Another Mode: of following: one the Do of Page 138 334

139 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio an click in Day view and select image option from the context menu. Right- the + right- click the image Ctrl Year or Month view and select an option from the context menu. in To Locate an Image in Windows Explorer®: context the from File Right- click the image in Day view and select Show in menu. Explorer and Ctrl right- click the image in Month or Year view + select Show in File Explorer from the context menu. Cataloging only Photos mode will display images that have been cataloged. You can catalog your images by: Browsing your folders in Manage mode . top Photos of mode. Using the Catalog button at the of Page 139 334

140 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard 5: View Chapter Mode interface. is main viewing component of mode user the View the View mode, you can: In to pan around large Click+hold+drag images. Press keyboard shortcut F to toggle in and out of the screen view . full Zoom in or out on your images. . slideshow a View images in audio to audio files , and add and video your image files . Play Add captions to your images. categories, Catalog files by tagging them, adding keywords, and other metadata. Previewing Your Images with Auto Lens them to the You can use Auto Lens View to preview your images with a number of filters without actually applying file. To View Image with an Auto Lens: Your Open View image in 1. mode. an 2. On Toolbar, press the Auto Lens button. the 3. Select a filter to preview your image in. preview 4. the Filmstrip or Previous/Next button to Use more images with your selected filter. View The Lens will remain turned on in until mode you turn it off. To Turn Your Selected Auto Lens: Off button. On Toolbar, press 1. Auto Lens the the 2. Select None . Light EQ™ You can view your image with an instant exposure adjustment in View mode with Light EQ™. You will need to select Light EQ™ for each image you view. with Image EQ™: Light To View Your of Page 140 334

141 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Open an in View mode. 1. image the 2. the Light EQ™ button. press Toolbar, On On Images Rotating rotate images in Manage and View modes using the You icons in the bottom toolbar. can Rotate you unedited JPEG images, ACDSee performs rotate lossless rotation. When a Rotate Images: To In Manage mode or View mode, select one or more images. 1. 2. Click Rotate Left or Rotate Right icon in the bottom toolbar. the Icons Rotate Rotates the image Left to the left. Rotate 90° Right Rotates the image 90° to the right. Rotate the Using Histogram Histogram displays a graphical representation of the distribution of intensity levels of The for each color pixels channel an image. in To and Use the Histogram: Display mode. Edit in Histogram 1. In View mode, click Panes | Histogram , or View | 2. On Histogram, select or clear the following checkboxes: the : Shows or hides the red color channel. R G : Shows or hides the green color channel. B Shows or hides the blue color channel. : L : Shows or hides the lightness of the image. Viewing Images with Auto Advance Advance You can use the Auto quick feature to create a slideshow preview of a group of images , or all the images in a folder. Start Advance: To Auto Open a 1. of images in View mode. group 2. Click View | Auto Advance | Options . the 3. the Auto Advance dialog box, set In options as described below. 4. Click Start . Space , press . 5. To advance to the next image of Page 141 334

142 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard To return the previous image , press Backspace . 6. to Pause stop restart Auto Advance, press To . 7. or Advance Options Auto Determines the order that you want to display your images . Select one of the following Sequence options: Forward Reverse Random restarts the slideshow after the Automatically image has been displayed. Repeat last Specifies how long to display each Delay . Drag the slider or type a value from 0 to image 864000000 to set the time (in milliseconds). Sound Select the Play audio clips checkbox to play any audio embedded in the selected images . Displaying Text Images in View Mode on images can the Header/Footer tool to display You with your use in View mode. The text is displayed while you text are viewing the image, but does not modify the original image. You can also hide the headers and footers without changing settings. the To add text directly to your photos and save . as part of the image, see Adding text to an image it and Headers Image Footers: To Edit 1. In mode, click View | Edit Header/Footer . View Do the or both of 2. following: one at the Select to add text Header the top of the image. checkbox Select the Footer checkbox to add text at the bottom of the image. below. 3. change the text options as described or Select 4. Click OK . Text Options Alignment Specifies the justification of the captions. text. Background a background color to the Adds Click Color to specify a color. see Description Displays the text you want to on your images. Type the text you want to appear, or click the field to set an insertion point for inserting metadata. inside Metadata into file- specific information Insert the text for each image. Inserts color Sets font, size, and the of the caption text. Font To Insert Metadata in Image Text: click 1. the cursor in the Description text box where you want to display the file information and Position Insert . Metadata 2. In the Choose Properties dialog include. select the file information you want to box, Click . OK 3. of Page 142 334

143 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio information you is inserted as a placeholder that will be replaced by the specific text for each The added image. Image Hiding Text hide either the header or footer, or disable both at once without changing or deleting the information in You can and fields. header the footer the Text: Hide Image To View mode, click View | Edit 1. . In Header/Footer Do one or both of the following: 2. the Clear checkbox to remove text from the top of the image. Header Clear Footer checkbox to remove text from the bottom of the image. the Click . 3. OK show or hide both headers and footers simultaneously, click View | Show Header/Footer . To Part an Image Selecting of can use the Select tool in View mode to You a rectangular area of an image. You can then zoom in on the select the as selection the selection, copy the selection, save the selection as a new image, print the selection, and use desktop wallpaper. Select of an Image: To Part Click the Select Tool icon. 1. image Drag cursor across the the to create a marquee. 2. 3. Right- click inside the marquee and select one of the options described below. the 4. the selection, click an area of cancel image outside of the marquee. To Selection Options Zoom To Zooms in on the selected area. Copy Copies the selected area to the Clipboard. Crop Save the As Saves selected area as a new image. Print Prints selected area. the it and desktop wallpaper using the selected area Wallpaper centers Creates on your desktop, shrinking it to fit if necessary. Centered Wallpaper Tiled Creates a tiled desktop wallpaper pattern using the selected area. Viewing Properties in View Mode File You can view an image’s properties in View mode and edit the information in the Properties pane. To View an Image’s Properties: Properties | . Panes In View mode, click of Page 143 334

144 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard more information the Properties pane, and adding or editing ACDSee Metadata, see Using the For about . Pane Properties and Using Brush Files Viewing view brush files in Manage mode just You fonts or other files. This means that you can assign ratings or can like them just like any other file in organize . Because many .abr files are actually groups of images in one file, ACDSee you to open them in View mode to see the individual images. need icon file an .abr brush This in ACDSee . indicates View Files: To Brush folder Manage navigate In the mode, containing your brush files. to To see just the top image in any .abr file, hover over the thumbnail to activate the pop- up, or click it to see the image the Preview pane. in file view other images in the .abr file, double- click it to open it in To mode. The the opens in View View mode the individual images in a showing on the left- hand side. pane To see the number of images, and select them by number, click the down- arrow at the top of the sidebar, and select the number of the image. then To scroll through the images, click image. right and left arrows at the top of the sidebar, or on each the in Files Photoshop®: Adobe To Use Brush With both Photoshop® and ACDSee open, drag the file from the File List (in Manage mode) onto the Adobe window. Photoshop® though nothing appears to happen, the brush is Even into the Photoshop® brush library. To view the new loaded brushes, open the library and scroll to the bottom of the pane. can To even easier to use brushes in Photoshop®, you it configure it to be your default editor . Then make you can use CTRL + ALT + X to open Photoshop® and use the brush right away. Playing Video and Audio Files playback You can play video or audio files in many formats in ACDSee . You can control and volume, create an image from video frame. a Play or Audio Files: To Video Manage mode, in the File List pane, do one of the In following: Double- a video or audio file. click Select or more files and press Enter . one Select one or more files, right- click a selected file, and then select View . extract Use toolbar to adjust the volume, pause, loop, or Media frames from playback. the Automatically Playing Audio and Video Files You can configure your settings to play audio and video files automatically, as soon as you open them in View in mode, as you view them or the Preview pane in Manage mode. Playing Media Automatically: Files To Start of Page 144 334

145 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Manage or View mode, click Tools | Options | Preview . 1. mode the Autoplay or video clips checkbox. 2. Select audio . Click 3. OK The Media Toolbar use the Media toolbar to quickly access common media viewing and editing tools. You can Buttons Toolbar Media the media file or selection. Changes into the Pause button when a Plays Play or is file playing. media selection copy, Opens menu you Frames use to a save, and extract video frames. Extract can are extracted at Frames resolution you viewed them at, (your the screen resolution). Continuously plays media file or selection. Loop the Frames Images Video as Saving extract an individual frame from You video and save it as a still image. can a Extract and Save a Single Video Frame as an To Image: 1. one of the following: Do the want is playing, click the Pause button at the frame you While to save. video you to 2 as the exact frame step want to extract is playing. Skip 2. the On button. Frames Extract the Selection and media controls toolbar, click your 3. Current Frame dialog box, select a folder in which to save Extract file. the In In the File name field, type a filename. 4. Click the Save as type drop- down format. and select a file 5. You can click the Options button to select list or any options associated with the file format. change Click Save . 6. Adding or Editing Image Audio ACDSee supports images with embedded audio and images with associated audio files. TIFF Images with embedded audio are or JPEG images with audio saved inside the image file. You can embed audio inside image file by adding audio to the image. an Images with associated audio are image files paired with separate WAV audio files. Image files and their associated the audio contain the same file name and are located in files same folder. You can associate any WAV file with an to image. the audio image file by giving them the same name and placing them in the same folder, or by adding of Page 145 334

146 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard you move rename either an image file or the audio file associated with it, both files must be renamed If or This the folder or they will no longer be associated. same does not apply to images with embedded and in audio. Add Audio to an Image: To Do one the following: 1. of an in Manage mode. Select image an image in View mode. Open Click Tools | Image Audio | Edit . 2. box, In Edit Audio dialog 3. click the Browse button. the 4. Select a WAV file and click Save . checkbox, 5. would like to truncate or clip the audio file, select the Use markers you and drag the Start If marker End marker sliders. and one of the following: Do Click the Truncate button to remove the beginning and end of the audio file (the sections outside of start and end markers). the Click the Clip button to remove the section of the audio file inside the start and end markers. the 6. hear a preview of To file, click the Play button. 7. . OK Click Recording Audio an Image to images. can your own audio files and add them You your record When you add audio to a JPEG or TIFF image, to the audio is embedded in the image. With other file formats, the audio file is associated with the image; the audio is file in the same folder and saved played when the image is viewed. is To Record and Add an Audio File to an Image: 1. one of the following: Do Select an image in Manage mode. Open an image in View mode. 2. Click Tools | Image Audio | Edit . 3. In Edit Audio dialog box, select or change the Record sound settings options as described below. the Click 4. and do one of the following: Record a microphone and record a sound. Use Play audio from an audio player on your computer. 5. Click to stop the recording. Record Click 6. As to save the audio file. Save 7. In the Save Sound File dialog box, type a name in the File name field, and then click Save . 8. Click OK . Sound Options Settings Record of Page 146 334

147 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio device Specifies of your computer's devices you want to record the audio. Capture which Determines which rate and audio type are used to record the sound. The Input format sample on you sound card depend have installed on your computer. formats displayed the marker recorded from the Start audio slider location. Replaces Overwrite the the recording with the existing audio file. Mix Combines using start Inserts the recording at the start marker location. Drag the Start marker slider to Insert a select marker position. sound recording Adds the Append to the existing audio file. to file new Replaces the entire audio file with the Replace recording. sound file Images in View Mode Printing the ACDSee print utility, With can print your images on any size of paper, in any orientation, and at any you resolution printer can support. You can also use the print utility to create and print contact sheets, complete your headers, footers, captions specific to each image. with and a change options in the Print you box, you can view the dynamically updated preview of the image and its As dialog on the page. You can adjust the output size, position multiple copies of each image , and change the print orientation the images on each page. of Print Single Image: To a In View mode, select the image 1. want to print. you 2. Click File | Print Image . 3. size. print a choose Under Format , use, 4. Options tab, specify the printer you want to Printer the paper size, the number of copies you the On the range of pages that you want to print, and image resolution. want, on On Page Settings tab, specify the image position the the paper and 5. margin widths, and specify the the number of prints of each photo. 6. Add headers, or footers . captions, 7. Print . Click To Print All Images: 1. In View mode, click File | Print All Images . 2. Under Print layout , do one of the following: list. Select Full page and then choose a print size from the Format set appearance the Select Contact sheet and then the define Contact sheet format options to of your . contact sheet the and choose Layout of then available layout options. Select one On the you Options tab, specify the printer 3. want to use, the paper size, the number of copies you Printer want, the range of pages that you want to print, and image resolution. the 4. On Page Settings tab, specify the image position on the paper and the margin widths. are 5. the number of prints of each photo. If you Specify printing a Full page or a Contact sheet this option the list of is available on the Page Settings tab. If you are printing a Layout this option is available below layouts. of Page 147 334

148 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard are Add or footers . You can only add captions, headers, or footers if you headers, printing a Full 6. captions, or Contact sheet . a page Print . Click 7. an Image as Setting Desktop Wallpaper the You select any image and set it as the Windows desktop wallpaper. You can can automatically stretch a also wallpapered to fill the screen, image restore your previous wallpaper. or To Set an Image as the Desktop Wallpaper: 1. Do of the following: one Manage Wallpaper select an image, and then click Tools | Set In . mode, . In click Tools | Set Wallpaper mode, View 2. Select one of the following: Centered : Places the image in the center of the screen. If the image is larger than the screen, it is to fit. shrunk Tiled : Places the image desktop. a tiled pattern that fills the entire in the fit to screen. Stretched : Stretches the image The selected is saved as ACD Wallpaper.bmp in the Windows folder. ACDSee automatically changes the image image. settings wallpaper Control Panel Display properties to display the in the To Automatically Stretch Wallpapered Images to Fit the Screen: 1. Click Tools | Options . 2. the Options dialog box, click General . In 3. On the General page, select the Automatically stretch wallpaper to fit screen checkbox. 4. Click OK . To Display the Previous Wallpaper: | Click Tools Set . Wallpaper | Restore Synchronizing to a Folder Mode View can use the Sync to Folder option to change the images being displayed in View mode. You Synchronize to a Folder: To Sync In View mode, click File | To 1. Folder . button 2. the path to the folder you want to synchronize, or click the Browse Type to locate the folder. New 3. or change the Select Images options as described below. . 4. Click OK Options Images New of Page 148 334

149 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard new images Displays images as soon as they appear in the folder. If this option is cleared, new Show are end to the immediately of the slideshow. images added slideshow files adding open new file to the Delays until the transferring application has finished Ignore a or downloading the file. moving by Sort Sorts the images displayed in the slideshow by their file name. name Stop to a Folder: To Synchronizing View mode, click File | Sync To Folder . In Offline Images Viewing on stores and database information for ACDSee contained thumbnails CDs or other removable media as images Photo Discs. You can then browse the thumbnails and view the information for those images even when the disc is not in CD- ROM drive. your Add Photo Disc: To a Place a disc containing images into your CD- ROM 1. drive. 2. Manage mode, click File In New | Photo Disc . | 3. In the New Disc dialog box, type a name for your disc in the Title field, and then click OK . in You browse the contents of the Photo Disc then the Offline Media section of the Folders pane. can If can add or remove images from a disc that you have already added to ACDSee as a Photo Disc, you you right- then and click update the information stored in the database. Insert the disc in your CD- ROM drive, the name the disc in the Folders pane and select Update Photo Disc . of default, is identifies Photo Discs by their serial numbers. This By the most reliable setting to use when ACDSee or with Discs, particularly if you are importing Photo converting Photo Discs from previous versions of working ACDSee . with, However, are working with, or planning to work you multi- session discs, the serial number may be if regenerated or changed each time you change the contents of a disc. Therefore, the volume label is the required Photo method identification for multi- session of Discs. Rebinding Photo Discs does Depending on the method used to identify Photo Discs, ACDSee may encounter a Photo Disc that it not recognize. This most common when you are using the serial number method to identify Photo Discs and you is a as session disc. ACDSee may not recognize the disc, insert serial numbers are likely to change when multi- a multi- session disc. updating identification can the Rebind option You update the use information, and associate the correct database to information with your disc. To a Photo Disc to its ACDSee Database Information: Rebind 1. In the Rebind Photo Disc dialog box, carefully review the Current disc information to be sure that the correct is in the drive. disc 2. Select the Photo Disc record that list. want to rebind to the current disc from the Photo Disc Name you 3. . Rebind Click of Page 149 334

150 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio ACDSee Quick Using View view View image viewer that you can use to quickly an images without opening ACDSee . For Quick is ACDSee that example, want to view an image that someone sent to you in an email. If you double- click the imagine you it will open in Quick View, which is like a pared- down version of View mode in ACDSee . image Quick View you can quickly scroll through your images, temporarily rotate images, and zoom in and out. If With are as a particularly appealing image in Quick View, you can also set the image you your desktop wallpaper viewing print image. or the can easily switch from Quick View to ACDSee . You You have the option to open an image in Manage, View, or also Edit mode. use shortcuts those of If you are accustomed to using keyboard and mouse shortcuts in View mode you can most in Quick well. View as an Open in Quick View: To Image With ACDSee closed, double- click an image. For example, double- click the image in Windows Explorer or 1. in an email message. below 2. viewing options described the to view the image. Use ACDSee Quick View Viewing Options Previous View the previous image. Next View the next image. left. Rotate Left Rotate the image to the to right. the Rotate Right Rotate the image Zoom the image at a higher magnification. View In Out View the image magnification. a lower Zoom at Delete Move the image to the computer's Recycle Bin. You can close ACDSee by pressing ESC . To Open the Image in ACDSee : Click , View , or Edit mode. Manage Wallpaper: Set an Image as Your Desktop To Quick in displays 1. Click Previous or Next until the image that you want to make your desktop wallpaper View. of Page 150 334

151 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Click Tools Set Wallpaper and select one of the following: 2. | of Displays in the center image the desktop. : Centered the Displays the image in one or more tiles until the desktop is covered. If the image is small it Tiled : two in appear on the desktop. If the image is large it may appear in only one or several may tiles tiles. Stretches the image proportionally to fill : much of the desktop as possible. Stretched as Restore Your System to the Default Desktop To Wallpaper: Click | Set Wallpaper | Restore . Tools Print the : To Image File Print . Click | 1. Format 2. choose a print size. Under , On the Printer Options tab, specify the printer you want to use, the paper size, the number of copies you 3. the want, of pages that you want to print, and image resolution. range the On Page Settings tab, specify 4. image position on the paper and the margin widths, and specify the the number of prints of each photo. or headers, Add . 5. footers captions, 6. Click . Print Windows Gestures™ with Quick View Using Touch you have a Windows Touch Gestures™- enabled device, If can use it with ACDSee Quick View for quick, easy you viewing of photos. To Use Windows Touch Gestures™ with Quick View: Open image in ACDSee Quick View. an Swipe on the image to scroll through images one at a time. through Hold swipe slowly in one direction to go and all of the images in the folder. let Hold down on an image, and then achieve go to the same results as right- clicking with a mouse. Double- tap image to launch it in ACDSee . the toward two Move to zoom in, and fingers each other to zoom out. apart After zooming in, you can pan the image with your finger. To return, choose View | Zoom | Fit Image . Viewing in Another Application Images You can open a file in another program from within ACDSee . For example, you can open documents in the application used to create them. Edit and Commands: Open To Use the Shell of Page 151 334

152 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Manage click File | Shell . 1. mode, one the following options: Select 2. of Opens the file using the application that Windows associates with its file extension. Open : dialog : file using the default system application, or opens a the box where you can Edit Opens an application. select Showing Originals you make changes to your images, the original image is saved so that you can When the image to its restore original settings. Show the Image: To Original has View an image that select been edited. In mode, 1. 2. hold the Show Original button in the bottom toolbar. Click and you release the When button, the edited image is displayed. mouse Committing Changes saved you changes to your images, the original image When make so that you can restore the image to its is edited you image, original original settings. If you decide that you want to keep your your image and save that as saved, can to the image. This deletes any sidecar files or originals that have been changes and the commit the overlay icon that indicates Edited image has been edited. removes the Commit Changes to an Image: To edited. In mode or View mode, select an image that has been Manage 1. . Click | Commit Changes Tools 2. an Image Zooming use View mode you can or the Zoom tools to enlarge In reduce the size of the image you are viewing. When an you image to a larger size than the View mode window, zoomed can use the Scroll tool (hand icon) to pan or is scroll the image. To an Image In or Out: Zoom Click once on the view. to toggle between your default view and Actual Size image menu Click Tools | Zoom , and then select one of the Zoom options. Menu Zoom Options of Page 152 334

153 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Increases magnification of the image. Zoom the Decreases Zoom of the image. the Out magnification the at its original dimensions (100%). Displays image Size Actual the image Fit the largest magnification that fits in View mode window. Image Displays at Fits the image within the left and right Fit of the View mode window. Width sides Height the image within the top and bottom of the View mode window. Fit Fits current Displays images at the zoom option of the Lock image. If the zoom level is Zoom all the new zoom level is applied adjusted, all images that you view. to Zoom Opens a dialog box where you can select a zoom level . To Lock Locks panned area of an image. Pan the image select Image you can you the previous or next Fit by pressing the left and right arrow If display on your keyboard. keys change click default image view, To Tools | Zoom and select Actual Size, Fit Image (standard), Fit your or Height. Width, Fit can also quickly access the Zoom Lock on You Toolbar by toggling the Zoom Lock button. the Setting the Zoom Level level to mode. View You can use the Set Zoom Level dialog box in set a specific zoom To Set Specific Zoom Level: a Click | Zoom | Zoom To... 1. Tools In the Zoom level area, select one of 2. following: the Fit image : Zooms the image whole fit entirely within the window. to Fit width : Zooms the image to fit the width of the window. fit Fit Zooms the image to : the height of the window. height Specify : Specifies a zoom percentage. Type a number in the field or click the drop- down list and select a zoom level. View 3. To use this setting as the default select mode zoom level, the Lock at this zoom level checkbox. View mode all images based on the specified zoom level. displays Click . 4. OK you select Fit whole image you can display the previous If next image by pressing the left and right or arrow keys on your keyboard. Automatically Shrinking or Enlarging Images to You use the settings on the Display page of the Options dialog box to automatically enlarge or shrink images can how fit size of the ACDSee window. For information about the the combination of the choices affects the display of table results Resize below. images, see the Zoom mode and of Page 153 334

154 ACDSee Photo 2018 Studio Standard Shrink To Images: or Automatically Enlarge Options mode mode, click Tools | View . Manage or In 1. 2. dialog box, click View mode | Display . In the Options the Zoom options area, select one of the following options from the Default 3. mode drop- down In zoom list: : Keeps images at their original size. Actual Size : the images to fit the width of Width View mode window. Fit Resizes of Height images to fit the height Resizes the View mode window. Fit : Image : Resizes images to fit the size of the View mode window. Fit Select 4. the following options from the Resize drop- down list: one of : of large images to fit the size Only the View mode window. Reduce Reduces size Only smaller images to fit the Enlarges of the View mode window. Enlarge : or Enlarge : Reduces large images, and enlarges smaller images to fit the size of the Reduce mode View window. OK . 5. Click Zoom and Resize Results Mode Image Fit Width Fit Height Fit Reduces Only large to images large Reduces Reduce fit to images large Reduces fit the between left and right and top the between images to fit the size View the sides of the View mode mode the of bottom of mode View window. window. window. Images are are that Images smaller that Images that are smaller than smaller mode than the the mode than the View View window displayed at View at mode window window are displayed are are size. their original size. displayed at their original original their size. Enlarges small to to Enlarge small Enlarges Only Enlarges small images images fit images to fit the size and left the between fit and top the between Viewer. mode the View View the right sides of the of bottom of window. mode window. Images are that than larger View larger the are larger Images that are Images that mode than View are window than the View mode mode the at at displayed displayed at their are window window are displayed size. size. original their original size. original their and and Reduces large images large Reduces and Reduce images large Reduces and to small images to enlarges enlarges images Enlarge enlarges small images small fit top the to images and fit between the left and fit between of the View of the size of the View bottom the mode View right sides window. window. mode window. mode right- and left- display If you select Fit Image you can arrow the previous or next image by pressing the keys on your keyboard. Page 154 of 334

155 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio the Navigator View Select Areas of an Image Using to Navigator pane display a thumbnail overview of images that are larger than the View mode display area. to Use the image a indicates the area of the marquee that is visible. Navigator, the In and Use the Navigator Pane: To Display View mode, click Panes | Navigator . 1. In the View to increase or decrease the magnification of the image in Drag mode. 2. slider would the to the area of the image you Drag like to display in View mode. 3. marquee Use the To Navigator Pane: Quick 1. View mode, click and hold the Navigator button in the bottom toolbar. In to Drag to the area of the image you would like marquee display in View mode. 2. the a Magnified Image Panning View mode, you can pan large images by moving them vertically, horizontally, and diagonally across the display In the to specific areas of the image. When an image is larger than the ACDSee window and you use view Scroll area tool, cursor changes to a hand. the To an Image: Pan Do one of the following: want you Drag view. to the image to center the area hold Press You can hold the CTRL key to pan quickly, or key. the SHIFT key to pan more slowly. arrow an Pan Lock Using can use the Pan Lock setting to automatically center mode. same area of a series of larger images in View You the To Pan Lock: Use to In mode, pan over a 1. image View a specific area you want to view. large 2. Using the Zoom menu, zoom in on the image until you reach the magnification you want to use for all of your images. Click 3. Tools | Zoom | Zoom Lock to keep the current zoom level. 4. Click | Zoom | Pan Lock . Tools panned you through your images, each one As be automatically zoomed and move to the same area. will Magnifying Specific Areas of an Image You can view specific areas of an image at a higher magnification in the Magnifying Glass pane. To the Magnifying Glass Pane: Use 1. In . mode, click Panes | Magnifying Glass View Magnifying the pane. Glass 2. Move the cursor over an area of the image to view that area in of Page 155 334

156 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio doing Change Glass pane settings by Magnifying any of the following: 3. the the slider Move the bottom of the Magnifying Glass pane to increase or decrease the at magnification. the Clear image. the Select the Fixed checkbox to apply the slider setting to the original size of the Fixed to apply the slider setting to checkbox magnification of the zoomed image in View mode. Smooth Select the checkbox to apply anti- aliasing to the magnified portion of the image, or clear pixels. view individual the the Smooth checkbox to of Page 156 334

157 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 6: Edit Chapter Mode tuned final Edit mode, where you can apply fine- in adjustments on the more limited RGB image your Make edits the tools in Edit mode for any touch- ups to specific areas of your images. data. Use Mode Edit Can: In You Selection the to select and apply edits to a specific part of the image. Use tools specific Edit to paint an effect onto Brush areas of your image. Use the flaws , or red Remove . eye Add , borders , vignettes , a tilt- shift , special effects , and drawing tools . text , , resize , and rotate . Crop flip lighting using the Exposure , Levels , Auto Levels , Tone Curves , and Light EQ™ tools. Adjust color the Adjust White Balance , or Color Balance tool. using Noise details your image using Add , Blur , Remove to , Add Noise or Clarity tools. Sharpen Using Edit Mode eye, effects. special apply In Edit mode, you can use the editing tools to fine tune your image, remove red and Editing an Image Edit Image: To an 1. Select Edit mode. Do any one or more of the 2. following: At top of the panel, use the Selections or Drawing tools . the In the Repair group, click Red Eye Reduction or Repair Tool . Effect In Add group, click Text , Borders , Vignette , Drawing tools , Tilt- Shift , or click Special the and select an effect. In the Geometry group, click Rotate , Flip , Crop , or Resize . Exposure/Lighting In the group, click Exposure , Levels , Auto Levels , Tone Curves , or Light EQ™ . In the group, click White Balance or Color Balance . Color , the group, click In , Blur , Clarity Detail or click Noise to remove or add noise. Sharpen 3. You have several options in saving your images. See Saving images in Edit for more information. Reverting Original Settings to You can discard your Edit settings and revert your the original settings for your image. For steps to revert to Restoring see . originals image, of Page 157 334

158 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio and Image Controls Histogram Viewing an image, can adjust the magnification with the zoom controls, located in the bottom right While you editing corner. The preview for the current image. histogram histogram provides a Displays the Histogram of the intensity level of pixels within each color channel. graphical representation either at of the graph indicate clipped colors. Keeping the histogram open Spikes end useful reflects adjusting exposure, as the histogram particularly all is when you them. as make adjustments also display the You by selecting View | Histogram . can Histogram Undo to discard all changes made on the current tab. Redo to Undo/Redo to the options return that had selected prior to clicking Undo. In Edit, Undo and Redo buttons display you changes you undo or redo. the can image on Reset Click to reset the the to its default settings. Reset button Full Screen Displays the image on a full screen. Press F to view full screen and to return to Edit Display mode. Actual Returns the current image to its actual size. Size Pane Navigator Window : When Automatic Window is enabled, the Navigator pane Automatic Drag as appears you zoom in on a photo. soon your cursor to the section of the as area an like the image you would of to see magnified. Release the cursor to settle on image. Right- on the Navigator pane to switch from Automatic to Manual. click Window enabled, When Manual Window is Manual you can view the Navigator : Navigator pane the Navigator icon. The selecting icon only appears when the by image is magnified or if the Actual Size icon has been clicked. Click and hold the your Navigator display a small duplicate of to image. Then drag your cursor to icon the section of the image you would like to see magnified. Release the cursor to settle on an area of the image. the Right- click on from Navigator icon to switch Manual to Automatic. Fit Image the image to fit within the Edit mode area. Reduces the Previous the Show on or off, to compare Toggles current image to the last saved changes version. Zoom slider Increases the size of the image if you drag it to the right, decreases the size if you drag to left. the of drop- list Displays Zoom list down zoom sizes to select. a Using Presets in Edit to Many editing tools and special effects allow you ACDSee save your settings as presets. This is convenient when or tool effect. particular you frequently use the same settings for a of Page 158 334

159 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio most tools, automatically saves the last option settings you applied to an image when you clicked Apply For ACDSee This is called Last Used. Done. preset or Preset and Delete buttons are located at the top of an editing tool's panel. The Save a To Save Preset: settings. Edit select a tool and In its mode, 1. specify Click the Save Preset button. 2. In the New Preset dialog box, enter a 3. for your preset, and then click OK . name The preset will appear in the tool's Presets drop- down list. new Use a Saved Preset: To Previously which Edit select In tool for mode, you created the preset. 1. the Click the Presets drop- down list 2. select the preset you want to apply. and To a Preset: Delete for In mode, select 1. tool Edit which you created the preset. the delete. to want you 2. Click the Presets drop- down list and select the preset 3. Click button. the Delete the Delete dialog box, click Yes . In Confirm 4. Undo/Redo Button Using the when undo redo your changes and editing an image. can You Undo Change: To a In mode, do one of the following: Edit pane. the button found at Click bottom of the left Undo the Use the keyboard shortcut CTRL + Z . To Redo a Change: mode, In Edit do one of the following: Click the button found at the bottom of the left pane. Redo the keyboard shortcut CTRL + Y . Use Restoring Originals If you have committed changes to an image, you cannot restore the original. image. You discard all your changes and revert to the original can To Revert an Image Back to the Original in Edit: Original Restore to . In Edit mode, select File | of Page 159 334

160 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Revert an Back to the Original in Manage or View Mode: To Image the image. 1. Select | Restore 2. Original . Tools Select to Edit Brush Using the of tools the mode allow you to make a variety in global adjustments, sometimes you may only want to While Edit specific areas of your adjust For example, instead of blurring an entire photo, you may want to blur certain photos. areas, as the background. To do this, and other local adjustments, you can use the Edit Brush. such simply The allows you to selectively edit your photo by Brush brushing on the effects. The Edit Brush is Edit current determine the of essentially creating a mask that is used to settings which pixels will be affected by the chosen operation. Edit Brush The Edit Brush button displays at the center of the top editing panel toolbar for all applicable Edit mode tools. To the Edit Brush: Use 1. In Edit mode, select the tool you want to use. 2. controls. Click the Edit Brush button to enter Brushing mode and open the Brush Or, toggle with the open and closed panel the B key. Brush described Specify the brush settings in the panel or on the fly as table in the 3. below. 4. painting the effects on your photo. Start 5. want. the sliders to get the effect you Adjust strokes. 6. Press Done to apply your brush Edit Controls Brush of Page 160 334

161 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio brush Add while holding the left mouse button down. stroke Brush stroke Erase holding the right mouse button down. Brush brush while adjust the of the brush. You Adjusts use the mouse wheel to size nib width or Nib Width can Nib Width slider. the adjust the slider to control the Feathering of the transition between the brush strokes Adjust softness the Use SHIFT + mouse wheel to adjust the amount of feathering or and image. Feathering the adjust slider. strength the to Adjust the slider of the brush. Pressure control between and EQ™ Light as such clicking For filters that involve drawing or Alternating on the image, tool. mode Brush White Balance, hold down the ALT and to switch from Brush mode to using the key cursor- tools applied all brush Clear strokes all from the image. brush strokes Removes brush Invert all strokes Toggle to invert brushed strokes. This makes brushed areas no this option brushed and untouched areas brushed. This is useful if you want the longer of image majority brushed and a small section untouched. Simply brush only the small brush you don't want affected and invert the the strokes. area last Load applied strokes brush and effects the area Applies recently brushed to applied . most Show brush strokes your color the in When this option is checked, displayed brush strokes will be shown. This helpful when brushing a complex area with a subtle effect, as it can is the difficult tell if be have missed a spot. Alternatively, hold down to S key to you see your brush strokes on the image. When you click the Edit brush and enter Brushing mode, you need to apply brush strokes in order to see any of adjustments. your exit Brushing To toggle the Edit brush button. mode, The Edit Brush is enabled in many of the editing tools and special effects filters. When it does not make sense to available have this option, it is omitted. The Edit Brush is not in the following tools: Crop, Resize, Rotate, Flip, Text, Red Eye Repair Tool, and Selections. Reduction, the Tool Using Gradient the tools in Edit mode allow you to make solid, global adjustments, sometimes you want these effects While to gradually over your photo. For example, instead of applying progress blur across an entire photo, you may want a a blur that advances across the image, or advances over a section of the image. Use the Gradient tool to gradually progress effect across an image. an Gradient Tool The Gradient tool button displays at tools. center of the top Editing panel toolbar for all applicable Edit mode the Gradient Use the Tool: To of Page 161 334

162 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard In Edit select the tool you want to use. 1. mode, 2. the tool button to enter Gradient mode. Or, toggle the Gradient panel open Click and Gradient the key. with G closed the gradient settings in the panel 3. on the fly, as described in the table below. Specify or Position the guides 4. your photo. Inside the guide boxes, the gradient is transitioning. On either side of on the the effect being applied by the Gradient tool is at full strength or not applied at all. To boxes, this make clearer, the Show gradient mask checkbox. Move the check to define where the effect will begin boxes angle, 45° SHIFT or end. Hold down the for key while positioning the effect to lock to the nearest straightness. 5. sliders to get the effect you the Adjust want. Press Apply or Done . 6. Tool Options Gradient gradient Invert this option to invert the Toggle By pressing the Invert button after gradient. applying a gradient beginning at the top of the image, the gradient would now and begin at the bottom, vice versa. Show gradient mask will this is checked, your When mask option be displayed in the color gradient shown. Alternatively, hold down the S key to see the mask on the image. Click the drop- down arrow to select another display color. as Light EQ™ and such image, the on clicking or drawing For filters that involve between Alternating ALT the using to White Balance, hold down the mode key to switch from Gradient tool the Gradient and tool. tools applied cursor- exit mode, toggle the Gradient tool button. To Gradient maintain your gradient mask while switching to Edit Brush mode , hold down SHIFT and click the Edit To button. the allows you to add to Brush gradient mask or erase parts of it that you don't want. This special Gradient is enabled in many of the editing tools and The effects filters. When it does not make sense to tool Crop, Resize, tools: following have this option, it is omitted. The Gradient tool is not available in the Rotate, Reduction, Drawing Borders, Text, Repair Tool, Red Eye Vignette, and Selections. Tools, Using the Radial Gradient Tool While the Edit tools allow you to make a variety of adjustments, sometimes you want these effects to draw attention sharpening to a specific area of your photo. For example, instead of applying an across entire photo, you may want to to the center subject. Use the Radial Gradient tool sharpen apply effects around, or directly to, a center only point. Radial Gradient Tool the The Gradient tool button displays at the top of Radial Editing panel toolbar for all applicable Edit mode tools. Gradient the Use Tool: To 162 334 of Page

163 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard In Edit select the tool you want to use. 1. mode, 2. the Gradient tool button to enter Click Gradient mode. Or, toggle Radial Radial the Radial panel open and closed with the R key. Gradient Specify the Radial Gradient settings in the panel or on the fly, as described in the table below. 3. Position 4. guides on your photo. Inside the circle, the image is unaltered. At the perimeter of the circle, the full effect applied by the Radial the is transitioning between not applied at all (inside), and being Gradient strength To make this clearer, check the (outside). gradient mask checkbox. Hold down the Show circle. perfect a SHIFT key while positioning the effect to change the radial gradient to 5. Adjust sliders to get the effect you want. the Press Done . 6. Gradient Tool Options Invert gradient Toggle this option to invert the radial gradient. By pressing the Invert button, of the will be applied to the center effects the image (inside the circular guides), outside and will of the radial gradient be unaltered. Show gradient mask mask this is checked, your When gradient option will be displayed in the radial color shown. Alternatively, hold down the S key to see the mask on the image. Click the drop- down arrow to select another display color. Light EQ™ as and such image, the on clicking or drawing involve For filters that between Alternating to key using to White Balance, hold down the ALT mode switch from Radial Gradient Gradient the Radial the tool. cursor- and Tool tools applied exit Gradient mode, toggle the Gradient tool button. To Radial maintain your radial gradient mask while switching to Edit Brush mode , hold down SHIFT and click To Edit add button. This allows you to the to the gradient mask or erase parts of it that you don't want. Brush tools Radial tool is enabled in many of the editing Gradient and special effects filters. When it does not make The following Radial Crop, Resize, sense to have this option, it is omitted. The tools: Gradient tool is not available in the Reduction, Rotate, Vignette, Borders, Text, Repair Tool, Red Eye Tools, and Selections. Drawing Using Blend Modes and Opacity When using a tool in Edit, at the top there are blend mode and opacity tools. These tools give you creative control two and let you combine the to create a new image. You can apply blend modes and opacity to an entire image or to a part of an image. selected Opacity The Opacity slider changes the opacity of be edited image. It gives you control of how much of the edit should the image. visible the on 163 334 of Page

164 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo Blend Modes opacity besides and be The ability to control how the edits can the image merge means that other blend modes used to affect the final image. 334 of 164 Page

165 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Pixels in edited image are combined with those in the original. Only opacity affects this Normal the blend. Combines image color with the inverse of the original photo color, resulting in a the Screen edited the or is lighter. color that same to edited color with the original photo image produce a darker color. Combines Multiply the color with black produces black; multiplying any color with white leaves the Multiplying any unchanged. color Dodge edited image color with the original pixels in the photo to produce a lighter the Combines color. Combines edited image color with the original pixels in the photo to Burn a darker produce the color. or shadows and Overlay of the lower layers while applying either Multiply the Preserves highlights blend based on the original mode area's color values. Screen image Subtracts the edited image color from the color of Difference original photo. Any white in the edited the image a true negative of the color in the image, while black produces no effect. produces Applies pixels the edited image that are darker than the original image. Pixels in the edited Darken in are disappear than the original image that (based on RGB values). image lighter the pixels Applies edited image that are lighter than in original image. Pixels in the edited Lighten the that are darker than the original image disappear (based on RGB image values). Hard Adds strong highlights or shadows by applying Multiply or Screen based on the original Light area's values. image color Light Adds soft highlights or shadows by darkening or lightening based on the original image Soft color values. area's image Applies hue value of colors in the Hue the to the color of the original image areas. edited of image original the Saturation Applies the saturation value of colors in the edited image to the color areas. Color hue and saturation of the edited image to the image. This blend does not affect Applies the of original image. luminance the the the lightness value of colors in the edited image to the color of the Luminosity image Applies original areas. some pixels from the edited image layer Applies the original image, resulting in specks Dissolve onto color. The Opacity slider controls the amount of speckling. of Like Exclusion but with less contrast, Exclusion subtracts the blend color from the color of Difference, underlying of Any white in the blend color produces a true negative the the color in photo. image, produces black the no effect. while pixels Light the blend color Vivid the underlying Combines in the photo by increasing or decreasing with contrast to produce a lighter or darker color, as determined by the blend color. When Pin Light the light source is lighter than 50% gray, the pixels darker than the light source are replaced. Pixels than the light source remain the same. When the light source is lighter than Pixels gray, the pixels lighter than the light source are replaced. darker darker 50% the the source remain than same. light the Light or burns by Linear or darkening Dodges brightness value, depending on the blend lightening color. Hard Mix Applies red, green, and blue channel values of the blend color to the RGB values of the image. Subtract the blend color from the Subtracts (base) color in each channel. image Divide Divides the blend color from the image (base) color. image Darker From the blend color and the Color (base) color, the lower channel values are chosen. are channel values chosen. Lighter Color From the blend color and the image (base) color, the higher of Page 165 334

166 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard can use Edit Brush to paint an effect onto specific areas of your image, and then the You the blend and opacity slider to change mode way the effect is applied. the set blend mode and opacity controls apply to many of the The tools and special effects filters. When it does not editing make to have these controls, they are omitted. The blend mode and opacity controls are sense on the following not tools: Resize, Rotate, Flip, Text, Crop, Eye Reduction, Repair Tool, Selections. Red Saving Images in Edit Mode Saving Images of you editing an image, you can choose from one finished the many options for saving your image, When have on what depending want to do next. you To the Image and Return to the Mode Save Were in Previously: You 1. Click Done . 2. Select one of the following: Save Save changes. your image as a copy of Save edited Save with a new name or format. your Depending on your file type, any of the following checkboxes appear in the bottom left corner of the Save as dialog box: new the with image. Preserve Metadata: Retains metadata Preserve database your catalog information, such as ratings. information: Maintains with Profile Image: Retains color Color selected in Color Management in Embed profile new image. your Discard Discard your changes. Remain on the same image in with your changes intact, without saving the image. Cancel Save To Image and Continue Processing Other Images: the Click . 1. Save Select one of 2. following: the Save : Save your changes. Save As : Save a version of your edited image with a new name or format and switch to the updated image. a Save a Copy : Save copy of your edited image with a new name or format, and continue to work on the file. original an a is useful for making multiple Save of Copy image while continuing to work from the versions original file instead of a new processed copy. For example, if you take a RAW image and save a copy of it you as JPG, instead of switching to this lossy JPG image, a remain on the RAW file with the settings still intact. RAW a to file. Save is not available for RAW file formats because you cannot directly save changes of Page 166 334

167 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Discard Changes the Image and Return to the Mode You Were in Previously: To to . or keyboard shortcut ESC the Click Cancel use Selections Using to isolate an area of a photo in order to apply edits or filters to only that area, rather than the whole Use Selections The are different selection tools and each selects an area of a photo in a unique way. four controls photo. There change on which tool you select. depending available a Selection Tool: Use To In Edit mode, at the top of the 1. select the button for one of the following selection tools: Rectangular panel, selection Elliptical selection tool, Lasso selection tool, Magic wand selection tool. See below for more tool, steps for these tools. detailed using use Edit with the following can tools: You Selections Special Effects, Tilt- Shift, Drawing tools Add: Vignette, Exposure, Levels, Auto Levels, Tone Curves, Light EQ™ Exposure/Lighting: Color: White Color Balance Balance, Sharpen, Noise, Clarity Detail: Blur, The Selection Tools Lasso : Click the left Freehand button and drag the cursor to draw around the area that you mouse mouse, the release you wish to select. As you draw, a line appears showing where you have drawn. When the the the line joins to the start automatically to complete of selection. The whole selection animates end and looks like marching ants. Magic Wand : Click on any area of the image and all the pixels the same color are included in the color selection. choose whether to select only the same can pixels that are actually touching the one You you clicked, or all the pixels in the photo that are similar. You can increase the threshold to include more more pixels in the selection. The lower the threshold, the has similar a pixel to be to the one clicked in the order included. The greater the threshold, the more different a pixel can be and still be in be to selection. rectangle or : Click and drag either Rectangular Elliptical or an ellipse that begins where a you first click and ends when you release the mouse. Using the Tools Selection Use the To Lasso: 1. Select the Lasso button. 2. On the image, select. and hold down the left mouse button as you draw around the area you want to click selection. the to complete 3. Release the mouse button of Page 167 334

168 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard the To selection, click anywhere on the image (for the Lasso , Rectangular, or Elliptical selection). 4. clear To 5. to an existing selection, hold down SHIFT , or press the Add to selection button in the Context add bar, and draw a shape that includes any part of the original selection line. to When the mouse, the original selection expands release include the outer edge of your addition. you 6. To the multiple areas into your selection, hold down SHIFT , or press the Add to selection button in add part image. the of Context bar and draw around any other As you do not touch the line of any as selection, you can add several separate areas to a long selection. or 7. subtract from a selection, hold down CTRL , To press the Subtract from selection button in the bar, Context of and draw a shape that includes part the original selection, or encircles it completely. the 8. you wish to apply edits or effects to the outside areas of If image, you need to click Select | Inverse to reverse the selected area. area outside selection. the Now the selection includes all the outside areas of the image with the central of Page 168 334

169 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard down can selection mask by holding the the Preview button: You preview can select an editing tool or a special effect to apply to the selection You . To the Magic Wand: Use Select Magic Wand button. 1. the Click any color 2. the image. in 3. Do any of the following: Slide the Threshold slider to adjust the number of pixels to be included or excluded. The one Threshold how similar a pixel needs to be to the sets you clicked in order to be included slider in the selection. Click the Connected checkbox if you want to include only pixels that are touching the one you clicked. Hold SHIFT and click around down selection to include more pixels. the selection. down CTRL and click around the selection to remove pixels from the Hold one following: the of 4. From the Wand type drop- down list, select area Brightness similar in brightness to the pixels of the image you clicked. Selects : : Selects pixels similar in hue and brightness to the area of the image you clicked. Color is generally your best option. Color similar : pixels with red, green, RGB blue combination Selects to the area of the image you and clicked. You can preview the selection mask by holding down the Preview button: tool You can select an editing or a special effect to apply to the selection. To Use Rectangular or Elliptical Selection Tool: the 1. either the Rectangular or Elliptical button. Select 2. Click and drag to draw the selection on the image. 3. any of the following: Do To add to an existing selection, and down SHIFT , or use the Add to selection button , hold and mouse Release the drag another selection that includes any part of the original selection line. of Page 169 334

170 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard selection now the additional area. the includes and multiple to your selection, add down SHIFT areas drag as many as you want. To hold subtract from an existing selection, hold down CTRL , or use the Subtract from selection To button , drag another selection that intersects with the one you want to reduce. Release and mouse that any part the was inside the new selection is removed. and holding can the selection mask by preview down the Preview button: You You can select an editing tool or a special effect to apply to the selection. Combining the Tools example, can the Selection tools separately or in You For use you can use the Magic Wand to select combination. most of a particular color, then switch to the Freehand Lasso to add to, or subtract from, the selection. Or you the could the Rectangular selection to select a large general area, then refine it using use Freehand Lasso. To Selection Tools: Combine 1. Choose selection. tool and make a a to Switch tool. another 2. 3. Press to selection button. the Add Make selection. 4. another Saving Selections as Presets: can save your settings as a preset for future use. After you have made a selection, click Select | Save You Selection... To a previously saved selection, click Select | Load Selection... use Selections... delete To selection, click Select | Manage a saved Applying Edits or Effects to Selections You can use the Selections tools to isolate an area of an image. Once selected, you can apply many of the editing tools, such as color and exposure, or any of the special effects filters, to the selected area. An active selection in an image looks a line of marching ants. like Apply to Edit or Effect To a Selection: an 1. the Selections tools to create a selection. Use 2. Select a tool to use from any of the following groups: Exposure/Lighting Color Detail Add (Special Effects) Ensure that the Use Selection button is toggled on. 3. Use the tool to edit the image. Selections These Special Options: Use Any of of Page 170 334

171 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard selection Click show or hide the marching ants around the selection. Hiding the to line Show/Hide effect it to judge the easier of various effects. makes Selection Selection Click to use the selection or apply the edit or Use to the whole image. This control effect means can edit just the selection, then deselect Use Selection and apply you selection. edit the whole image without clearing the another to Invert Selection Click to invert the selection. Feathering Drag to increase or decrease the blurring between the edge of the selection and the edit or effect. the prevents or sharp transition between unnatural selection and the Feathering an of the rest as it blends the edges. This control also makes it unnecessary for image your selection to be perfectly on the edge of the area you want to select. Reducing Eye Red You can use the Red Eye Reduction tool in Edit mode to correct red eye in digital photographs. To Correct Red Eye: Red . Reduction Eye 1. In Edit mode, in the Repair group, select You can access the Red Eye Reduction tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. also enlarge Use Zoom tools in the bottom right corner to 2. and center the eye you want to correct. the 3. Click within the red portion of the eye. sliders 4. Red Eye Reduction group, adjust the the as described below. In Red Eye Reduction Options Size Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the area being darkened, or to the left to decrease. to Darkening Drag the slider the right to intensify the fill color, or to the left to lighten. cannot Click clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you to Reset reset settings. your reset can click a You to right- to the default value. slider Scroll with your mouse to adjust the size of the area you would like to darken at anytime. the You show or hide the outline of can darkened area by toggling the Show Outline checkbox. eye red selected adjustment. Use the Delete key to remove the currently of Page 171 334

172 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Flaws Removing use the Repair Tool to remove flaws, such as: You can blemishes Skin Telephone other unwanted objects and wires from snowflakes or windows Flash flares and water drops Lens scratches are two options available for the Repair Tool: the Healing Brush and the There Brush. Cloning When select the Healing Brush, the Repair Tool copies pixels from one area of a photo to another, but it you also the in the source area before copying them. It pixels analyzes the pixels in the target area, and then analyzes blends the pixels of both source and target, to match the surrounding area. This ensures that the lighting and particularly color replacement pixels integrate with the surrounding area. The Healing Brush works the well of with that involve complicated photos like skin or fur. textures When you select the Cloning Brush, the Repair Tool copies the exact pixels from one area of a photo to another, textures creating identical image area. The Cloning Brush is more effective for photos that have strong, simple an to or colors, as it is more difficult uniform identify the copied pixels in the finished photo. preset use. future for You can save your settings as a To Remove from a Photo: Flaws In Edit in the Repair group, select Repair Tool . 1. mode, or also the Repair Tool can the Filter drop- down menu access Filter toolbar. You from Select one of the following: 2. : Copies the pixels from the source Heal to the target area, and blends pixels into the area surrounding area. image : area. the pixels from the source area to the target Clone Copies as 3. Nib Width and Feathering sliders the described in the table below. Drag 4. Right- click the image to set a source location. Pixels will be copied from this location and used in the target location. 5. and drag over the area that you want to cover. If you selected the healing brush, ACDSee analyzes Click replaces pixels and when you release the mouse button. the Do the of 6. following: one Done to Click your changes and close the tool. apply Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool. your Click reset the sliders. If you saved to changes, you cannot reset your settings. Reset Scroll with to mouse to adjust the brush size on the fly, or press the SHIFT key while you scroll your adjust feathering. Tool Repair Options of Page 172 334

173 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Width Sets width of the brush. The maximum brush width is relative to the size of your Nib the image. transitions to feather on the edge of the brush to prevent sharp amount Sets Feathering the original and healed part of the photo. the between set as a percentage of the nib width, not as a specific number of pixels. Feathering is that have do not means to adjust the feathering when you reset the Nib Width, This you automatically nib to a percentage of the new it width. as adjusts to setting source point for After Clone tool, adjust the slider a control the strength of Pressure the effect being applied. the can right- click a slider to You to the default value. reset Adding to an Image Text can use Add Text tool in Edit mode to add formatted text to a photo, or add talk and thought bubbles to You the text comic- effect. You can also adjust the opacity of the book to create a watermark effect, which is useful create a putting copyright information onto your photos. for can save your settings as a preset for future use. You Add Text an Image: To to group, Edit In the Add mode, select Text . 1. in can also access the Text You from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. tool 2. the text you want Type add in the Text field. to 3. justification, or italics as In the Font area, specify the font you want to use, the formatting options, such and the the text. Drag the Size slider to specify a point size, and then drag the Opacity slider to color of transparency text. the the specify of image, and the text marquee to reposition it Click on your drag or drag the marquee's handles to 4. anywhere it. resize Select an option from the Blend Mode drop- down list to specify how you want the text to blend into the 5. image. underlying Do one of the following: 6. the Bubble Text checkbox, and set the Bubble Text settings as explained in the table Select be Note other text effects cannot that applied to bubble text. below. Select one or more of the Effects , Drop Shadow , and Bevel checkboxes to customize your text. as Click button to adjust the settings for each of these options Settings explained in the table the below. 7. Do one of the following: Click Apply to add the text to your image, and keep the Text tool open so you can add more text. can The creates a new, empty marquee, and you tool return to step 3 in the list above. Text Click Done to add the text to your image, and leave the tool. If you still have an empty marquee open, it will be discarded. the Click Cancel to discard your changes and leave tool. Options Text Add of Page 173 334

174 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Text Settings Encloses your text in a comic- book text bubble with a Bubble Talk stem. pointed your text in a comic- book Encloses bubble with a Thought text stem. dotted Angle Specifies the direction of the text bubble stem. Drag Stem arrow the adjust the angle. to Specifies thickness of the text bubble border. Thickness the Specifies the length of the text bubble stem. Length Specifies Fill background color of the text bubble. the the arrow to select a color. Click Border Specifies the color of the text bubble border. Click the arrow to a color. select to Settings the effect you want Specifies apply to your text. Effect Effect effect has different Each that control its options appearance. the sliders to adjust Drag the appearance of the text. Drop Shadow Settings Distance Specifies the distance between the drop shadow and shadow the higher the value, the farther the The text. and the higher the text appears. If a drop shadow is cut off, or has a noticeably sharp the edge, may need to increase you size of the text rectangle. to applied drop the Blur Specifies the amount of blur shadow. Sharp to seem less realistic shadows tend with slight blur. those a than the darkness of the drop shadow where it Opacity Specifies the falls on image. the direction Specifies the imaginary light source Angle of creates the drop shadow. to the arrow that Drag adjust angle — note that this also adjusts the the of text bevel. shading the Settings Bevel Specifies how much of each letter's Bevel is bevelled. edge Higher give the text values more rounded, smoother a look. Strength Specifies the difference between the highest and the lowest points on text. Higher values heighten the difference between flat portions of the text and the the edges. bevelled Specifies the height of the imaginary light source that Elevation the shadowed creates effect. Lower values bevel's longer produce on the text, while a higher shadows value produces a more direct lighting effect and shorter shadows. Specifies the direction Angle the imaginary light source of that creates the bevel effect. Drag the arrow to adjust adjusts the — note that this also angle the angle of the drop shadow. value. to default the You can right- click a slider to reset of Page 174 334

175 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo Adding Drawings to Your Image your to arrows and You can use the Drawing Tools in Edit mode to add lines and shapes, such as squares, circles, of your You can also adjust the width, feathering, and blending image. brush, which is useful for creating subtle and dramatic drawings. Your Draw on Image: To of Page 175 334

176 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard In Edit at the top of the panel, select from the following tools: 1. mode, Instructions Tool Hand Hand tool to exit out of any other drawing or the Use tool If have a scrollable image, the Hand tool. selection you allows you to pan it. also Drag over the image to create rectangle. Rectangle SHIFT as you Press draw create a square. To fill your shape with color, ensure to the checkbox is selected. that Fill Drag over the image to create an ellipse. Press SHIFT as you Ellipse color, to a circle. To fill your shape with create ensure draw that the Fill checkbox is selected. Line Drag over the image to draw a straight line. Press SHIFT as you draw create a vertical or horizontal line. to arrow. Drag image to create an the Press SHIFT as you Arrow over to create a vertical or horizontal arrow. draw Click to set the corner points of a polygon, then double- click Polygon points connect start and end the to complete the polygon. to To fill your shape with color, ensure that the Fill checkbox is selected. Curve over the image then release. Next, move your Drag to mouse create the curve and click to set. Brush Drag over the image to draw a free- flowing line. Left- click with your mouse to draw with the foreground color, and the with color. background right- click to draw Use the wheel to adjust nib width or use mouse panel, Nib at the top of the slider near the Width Opacity slider. the SHIFT + mouse wheel to adjust Use amount the of or adjust the Feathering slider at the feathering of the panel, near the Opacity slider. top Fill Select the Fill button, and click on a pixel to shade every pixel of same color value with your selected color. Your that color is defined in the color box, as described selected below. Use the Threshold slider to adjust the number of pixels be included or excluded. The Threshold slider sets to how similar order pixel needs to be to the one you clicked in a in to be included the selection. Enable the Connected checkbox in Context Bar to fill all of the connected pixels the the color. same of Use the Gradient tool to draw gradients across your image, or Gradient area. radial use to draw a gradient around an the option Select the Gradient tool, then configure your color, opacity and blend mode using the Context bar. For a radial gradient, select the Gradient button in the Context bar. Then Radial draw gradient by dragging across the image. To discard your your gradient, press the Discard button in the Context bar. Rearrange gradient as desired, then press the Commit your button by the Context bar. You can undo your commit in . Edit Undo | pressing Ctrl + Z or selecting of Page 176 334

177 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio select Use Dropper tool to Eye colors from your images. the Eye Dropper color in image, which will appear in the color Click a the then top the panel. You can of apply this the right boxes at drawing tools, such color the Brush tool. using the as select background color (bottom the the color can You of right- clicking on your image. boxes) by select can color from outside of the application by left- You a to your dragging your cursor and the color on clicking image the application. When you release your mouse outside of color the be selected and shown in the color will button, the top right of the panel. at boxes Select from one or more of the following options ( Note : options vary 2. on the tool selected): depending Option Instructions Select a by clicking the color boxes at the top right of the panel Color color which the Background Color dialog , or displays a open Foreground to swatches to choose from. If you dialog drawing a solid shape, of are as rectangle, the top (foreground) a box defines the color such color the outline of the shape. The bottom (background) for box color defines color that fills the center of the shape. If you want your the color to solid color, set both a boxes to match. shape be can reset to black and white by pressing the reset You button directly to the color boxes. next set Width the Nib Nib slider to Drag the diameter of the brush measured Width wheel mouse the can in pixels. You or also adjust the nib width with by right- the image to reveal the Nib Width sliders. clicking on Feathering the button to reveal the Width slider. Drag the Select Nib Feathering to set the blurring radius of Feathering brush. You can slider the right- on the image to reveal click Nib Width and Feathering also the Or, you can also hold mouse SHIFT while using the slider. down wheel adjust the feather radius, represented by the dotted circle. to Drag will Spacing slider to set how far apart each brush segment Spacing the width, This specifies the be. of the size of the nib slider percentage which how smooth or determines the strokes will appear. choppy Use Auto Spacing : Select the Use Auto Spacing checkbox to allow on ACDSee to choose a spacing percentage based the nib width and feathering settings, will create a smooth- looking stroke. which you Select checkbox to fill the shapes Fill draw with the selected Fill the color. Drag the Opacity slider to brush the transparency of the specify Opacity strokes. drop- an option from the Blending Select down menu to affect how Blending your brush strokes blend with your image as you draw. 3. Drag the image to draw. over to can click You slider to reset right- the default value. a Adding Borders You of use the Borders tool to add one or more borders and edge effects to your images. You can set the size can image the within by each side of the border, change the color and texture of the border or pick up a color from of Page 177 334

178 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard on color in the image. clicking that are libraries of edges and textures to get you started, but you can save There own textures or edges to the your ACDSee so that they appear in folder library for you to use. the You can also use Edge blur to soften the edges or blend the image into the background texture. You can also add a Drop third your images using the to Shadow and Raised edge effects. dimension Using combinations of multiple borders and edge effects can add to the mood and atmosphere of a photo, emphasize contrast, and enhance color. future for preset use. You can save your settings as a To Border to an Image: a Add In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Borders . 1. the can also access the Borders tool from Filter You drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. texture, 2. the border by selecting its size, color, Create edge, or edge effects as described in the Borders below. options Do one 3. following: the of and Click apply your changes to close the Border tool. Done Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool. restart 4. To add another border, the border tool and repeat these steps. default Click to clear your changes and reset to Reset settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot your settings. reset Border Options of Page 178 334

179 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Picks up color beneath the cursor when you click on the Eyedropper the border color, to the clicked The which also image. changes pane the box on the Borders in so that you can appears Color it if adjust open the Color dialog box. you The is not available when you are using a eyedropper texture. the Sets the size Border all the sides of Size border of simultaneously. Drag the slider left and right to adjust the width of the border. You can also type in a number or use the up and down different to the size of the border. arrows change text below the Size field shows The final size of the your image with the border added. The final size changes dynamically as you adjust the size of the border. Advanced a fly- out of Opens size controls. Use the advanced a type sliders, up- and down- arrow keys, or size in the controls to set the size of each side of number, border individually. For example, you can set the bottom for space a include border to be larger to copyright information. on the arrow beside Click Size to open the advanced size controls the slider menu. box Activates when you select the Color Color button. radio Do of the following: any on a Click in the image to make the color border that color. The clicked color appears in Color box. the on the Click in the middle of the Color color box to open the Colors dialog, where you can the color in multiple ways. adjust and the down- arrow beside the box Click box hover over the quick- color until you find a you like. When you click inside color quick box, the picked color the color in the Color box and the border appears changes to selected color. the Activates Texture you select the Texture radio when box button. Do any of the following: Click the arrow to open the texture side library view thumbnails of textures to and select. Click the forward and back arrows to a browse the textures one at through time, without opening the library. a line. be straight Edge Straight Sets the edge of the border to of Page 179 334

180 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Activates when select the Irregular radio Irregular you button. any the following: Do of side arrow beside the edge box to Click the edge library and view thumbnails open the to edges select. of forward Click back arrows to the and through browse edges one at a time, the without the library. opening of blur edges of the edge the the image into the Edge Blurs Drag the slider border. the right to increase the to blur, or to the left to decrease the blur. Edge effects Drop to Adds a drop shadow to the image that appears shadow lift off the page. The drop shadow appears it the between it and the border. You behind image, adjust the depth of the can on the edge of the blur shadow, and the transparency of the shadow, which affects how much of the border shows through the You can also change the shadow. direction the imaginary source of light by of dragging the glow on the Light Source ball. of Blur: the blur on the edge Adjusts the shadow when you drag the slider. the the of transparency Opacity : Adjusts drop shadow drag the slider. when you that a to the image edge appears to Adds raised Raised above the border, giving raise a 3D look. The it it effect is applied to the image, between it raised the border. You direction change the and of can the source of light of the raised edge by imaginary the You on the Light Source ball. dragging glow the also the can strength, and color of adjust size, raised edge in the following ways: Size: Drag the slider to the right to of increase the size the raised edge so that it appears The greater the size the higher. rounded effect. more the Drag the slider to the right to Strength: the 3D effect of the raised edge. increase Select this option to apply the Colored: border color to the raised edge. the Light when you click either Activates Drop shadow or Raised Source checkboxes. Click and drag the glow on the ball to reposition the of imaginary source for the 3D effect light the Drop shadow or Raised edge effects. default the to value. You can right- click a slider to reset of Page 180 334

181 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Your Own or Edges Adding Textures Borders possible custom textures and edges to the libraries in the add tool. If you make your own edges or is to It own a collection from the Internet, you can add them to the texture and edge libraries. textures, can also or You existing from the libraries to make room for others. delete files these or have to be textures the following file formats with edges extensions: The in BMP EMF GIF JPG GIF PNG TIF Textures the textures are tiled, it is important to use an image that As be seamlessly repeated. The files are used at can their resolution, not scaled up or down. For example, if your texture image is 100 x 100 pixels and you are full a a image that is 1000 x 1000 pixels, then your texture file will be tiled 10 times. If you use creating bordered file would is 1000 x 1000 pixels, then there texture just be the one texture tile for the whole border. that To Add Own Textures to the Texture Library: Your tool In , close the Borders 1. if it is open. ACDSee files paste folder: this 2. Copy and into your texture C:\Program Files\Common Systems\borders\textures Files\ACD Tools In mode, select the image you want to use and 3. click Manage | Edit . then 4. In the Add group, click Borders . 5. Select the Texture radio button and then click the arrow on the right side of the texture box to open the texture library. of the textures display Thumbnails you to select. for Edges Edge files are grayscale images that are resized to fit the image. The image file shows through any areas in the through edge file that are white, and does not show areas. any black Pixels that are tones of gray in the edge file show through relative opacity depending on how close the pixels are to black or white (in other words, the with the darker pixel, the less it shows through). gray To Your Own Edges to the Edges Library: Add 1. In ACDSee , close the Borders tool if it is open. this 2. paste your edge files into and folder: Copy C:\Program Files\Common Files\ACD Systems\borders\edges 3. In . mode, select the image you want to use and then click Tools | Edit Manage Borders click . group, 4. In the Add of Page 181 334

182 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard edge Select Irregular radio button and then click the arrow on the right side 5. the the box to open the of edge library. of the edges Thumbnails for you to select. display If you open an image with borders already applied, another border will be applied to the image. Adding Vignette a You can use the Vignette effect to add a frame can a subject, such as a person or a bouquet of flowers. You around the of appearance border. change the focal point in the portrait. You can also control the future You your settings as a preset for save use. can Apply To Vignette Effect: a 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Vignette . toolbar. You can also access the Vignette tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter options as 2. Set the below. described 3. one of the following: Do Click Done to apply your changes and close the tab. and Click Cancel to discard all changes close the tab. default Click to clear your changes and reset to Reset settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot your settings. reset Options Vignette of Page 182 334

183 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Specifies the point of the portrait on the horizontal axis. A value of 500 places Horizontal focal in middle of the photo. center the the the focal point of the portrait on the Vertical axis. A value of 500 places the Specifies vertical in the middle of the photo. center zone Specifies the size of Clear clear area around the focal point in the portrait. Drag the the slider the left to reduce the size of the clear area. Drag the slider to the right to to the of increase the clear area. size between zone the width of Transition transition area Specifies the clear zone and the frame. Drag the the slider to the left to narrow the transition area. Drag the slider to the right to widen the transition area. round. Stretches horizontally to make the shape elliptical rather than vignette Stretch the Specifies the shape of the frame: Shape : Select Round if you want the frame to be round. Round Rectangular Select Rectangular if you : the frame to be square. want Show outline Select Show outline if you want to display an outline that shows the outside edge of the clear and the inside edge of the frame. zone vignette Applies Frame special effects to the the frame area around the focal point: following Color : Changes the color of the frame area to the color you select in the color picker. frame : Removes color from the Saturation or objects in the vignette people are they scale. gray so Blur : vignette frame area. Blurs the Applies Clouds effect to the frame area. : a Clouds Applies an Edges effect by tracing the lines and details of people or Edges : neon objects with colors. the : the appearance of waves Waves from Creates focal Radial radiating into the frame area. point Blur : Creates a Radial Blur that rotates and stretches the frame area. Radial Blur Zoom a Zoom Blur to the frame area. : Applies by : the Crayon Edges effect Edges tracing the lines and Crayon Applies around people or objects with crayon. details or : impression that the people the objects around the focal Creates Dauber were painted with a brush. point : Applies a Pixelate effect to the frame. pixel Old : Applies an aging effect to the frame to make it look like an old photo. Glowing Edges Applies glowing edges to all the strong lines in the frame : area. looks Adds Ripple to the frame so that it : like liquid ripples moving ripples outwards from the focal area. Frame settings The settings that display below the Frame drop- down list change depending on the in frame For example, if you select Color select. the Frame drop- down list, a you color picker displays so that you can select the color for the vignette. Similarly, if you a select in the Frame drop- down list, Blur slider appears that you can use to change are the amount of blur surrounding the photo. For some choices, like Edges, there no settings apply. to of Page 183 334

184 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click Tilt- Effect a Shift Adding use the Tilt- Shift effect to create emphasis on specific subjects in your photos, or make your photos You can look miniature like landscapes. the Shift Effect: Use Tilt- To Edit mode, in 1. Add group, select Tilt- Shift . In the can also access the Tilt- Shift tool from the You drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Filter 2. the Tilt- Shift panel, set the options as described below. On Do one the following: 3. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to discard your changes and close the Click panel. Tilt- Options Shift inside the on the image to place the Use The guides boxes represent the points where the focus is effect. the where the will transitioning to blur. Complete blur occurs at effect outside boxes. Move the boxes to define to begin down the Shift key while positioning the effect Hold lock to the nearest 45° angle, for end. or straightness. Select the type of blur you want from the menu. drop- down Blurring Blur Lens Blur Blur Gaussian Blur Types for more information. See Specifies the amount of Amount blur applied. Frequency Specifies how Bokeh the bokeh often shapes occur. Bokeh Brightness Specifies how bright the bokeh appear. shapes Bokeh Sides the number of sides the Defines shape have. bokeh will Drag the slider Saturation the right to intensify the effect. to You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. to, point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 184 334

185 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Special Effect About Filters special use add unique effects to your images. ACDSee includes more than 40 to effect filters, such filters can You Pencil Drawing, and Solarize. Crosshatch, as the Special Effects Filters: To Access mode, In the Add group, select Special Effect . Edit in Filter also the can Effects menu from the access drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. You Special more information about each effect, click the Help For to view a Help file page specific to that effect. button Applying Bathroom Window Effect a them Bathroom divides your images into bars, transforming effect so they resemble the view through The Window glass often found in bathrooms. You can select or change the privacy Window options to apply this Bathroom effect your image. to future can your settings as a You for save use. preset To Apply a Bathroom Window Effect: . Effect Special select 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, menu You the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down access or Filter toolbar. also can Click Bathroom Window . 2. Drag the Bar width slider to set the thickness of the bars Thinner 3. result in a more distorted image. bars. 4. the Bar direction area, select one of the following to In the orientation of the bars in your image: specify Vertical Horizontal 5. Do one of the following: to Click Done accept your changes and close the panel. Click Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. to reset can click a slider to You to the default value. right- You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. point. center to, a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 185 334

186 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a Blinds Applying Effect venetian Blinds divide your image into bars that look like to or vertical window blinds. You can the effect Use characteristics of the blinds you would like added to your customize the image. can your settings as a preset for future use. You save a Effect: Apply To Blinds select Edit in In Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. the can also access the Special Effects menu You the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. from 2. Blinds . Click On the panel, set the options as described below. 3. Blinds one the Do following: 4. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to Click your changes and close the panel. discard Blinds Options from Specifies width of the blinds. Type a Width the 1 to 1000 or drag the slider to number value also blind the adjust the width of each blind. As the of increases, the width increases. Opacity the opacity of the blinds. Type a number Specifies 1 to 99 or drag the slider to from adjust the opacity of the blinds. The higher the opacity, the more the image is obscured. drag Specifies the angle of the blinds. Type a number from 1 to 360 or Angle the arrow to adjust angle. the Blind color Specifies the color of the blinds. to You can right- click a slider to reset the default value. You can the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. use effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying Blue Steel Effect a You can use the Blue tint. effect to give your images a stylish blue Steel Blue Effect: Steel the To Apply of Page 186 334

187 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Edit in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. mode, also Filter the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or can toolbar. You access Blue . Click 2. Steel one the following: Do of 3. to accept Click changes and close the panel. Done your Cancel to Click your changes and close the panel. discard You right- click a slider to reset to the default value. can can onto the Edit Brush to paint this effect You specific areas of your image. use effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can around, point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects to, or directly Applying a Ross Effect Bob give can the Bob You effect to use your images a painted look. Ross You can save your settings as a preset for future use. To Your Photos a Bob Ross Effect: Give 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . Special You can also access the Effects toolbar. menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter 2. Ross . Bob Click On the Bob Ross panel, table the options as described in the 3. below. set 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. panel. Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the Ross Bob Options of Page 187 334

188 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio size Drag Brush size slider to specify the width of the brush strokes in Brush the The value, the wider the brush stroke. effect. the higher the Coverage slider to specify the amount or density of paint on Coverage Drag of photo. "canvas" the your Drag the Paint thickness slider to specify how three dimensional the Paint thickness appears. paint the Colorfulness slider to specify the Drag of color in your Colorfulness amount image. the Image Enable the Image checkbox to use the color in Background image as the color color behind the brush strokes added to the photo. To use background different color the background, disable the Image checkbox and a for new color from the color drop- down menu. select a Indicates the random placement of the paint daubs. When you apply Randomize Bob Ross effect to an image, ACDSee places the daubs randomly. the makes time paint daubs different every This you apply the filter. To the the a random placement of new paint daubs, click Randomize. generate default the to You value. can right- click a slider to reset You can the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. use effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying Bulge Effect a Use the Bulge effect to stretch or shrink areas of your images horizontally and vertically. You can customize the strength, radius and position of the distortion. save You can your settings as a preset for future use. To Apply Bulge Effect: a select In in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. Edit can also You the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access 2. Click Bulge . described 3. Bulge panel, set the options as the below. On 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel. Options Bulge Shrink and of Page 188 334

189 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard position Specifies center of the distortion along the horizontal axis. A lower value moves Horizontal the while towards left side of the image, the a higher value moves it the distortion the right side of the image. towards position Vertical the center of the distortion along the vertical axis. A lower value moves the Specifies value towards bottom of the image, while a higher distortion moves it towards the the top of the image. Radius Specifies the radius of the distorted area. A lower value decreases the radius of the distortion, while higher value increases the radius of the distortion. a negative Specifies Strength of the distortion. A the value shrinks the center of the strength distortion, while a higher value bulges the distortion. Background Specifies the background color for the filtered image. color Select the Image checkbox to use the original image color, or click the color picker to select a different color. the of options: following Bulge direction Specifies the direction of the distortion. Select one or both Horizontal : distortion horizontally. Moves the : the distortion vertically. Vertical Moves can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. You areas can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific your of You image. effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can point. can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center You Effect Applying a Cartoon images a You can use the Cartoon Effect to give your appearance. sketched a You your settings as save preset for future use. can To Apply a Cartoon Effect: Add 1. Edit mode, in the In group, select Special Effect . the You can also access the Special Effects menu from menu Filter drop- down or Filter toolbar. 2. Click . Cartoon the On Cartoon 3. set the options as described below. panel, 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. the panel. Click Cancel to discard your changes and close Cartoon Options of Page 189 334

190 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio strength Specifies strength of the shading in the image. The higher the setting, the Shading the the that is applied to the image. intense more shading Specifies how spread out the shading is. Shading radius Specifies must sharp an edge threshold be in the image before shading is applied. If how Shading the a value, more edges in higher photo will be shaded. specify you Controls how smooth the transitions between similar Smoothness are. colors Outline Specifies how much the details are outlined in black. detail strength Specifies strong the black outlines are applied. Outline how from Remove details Prevents small details Suppression being outlined in Artifact small allowing the image to appear more black, cartoon- like. to can a slider to reset click the default value. You right- can use You Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. the image. your of areas You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific directly You Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or the to, a center point. use can a Childhood Effect Applying can use the Childhood effect look. give your images a dreamy, nostalgic You to To the Childhood Effect: Apply group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Childhood . 3. Do of the following: one Done the accept your changes and close Click panel. to Click to discard your changes and close the panel. Cancel You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. this You use the Edit Brush to paint can effect onto specific areas of your image. your of areas image. You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 190 334

191 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. You the Collage a Applying Effect use the Collage effect to creatively break up a photo into a number of photos. You can save as settings can a preset for future use. You your the Effect: Use Collage To Edit mode, in 1. Add group, select Special Effect . In the can also access the Special Effects menu from You Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. the 2. Collage . Click and Drag to set the Number sliders Size of the photos. 3. the Select a background color by clicking the drop- down arrow to display gradients of colors, or click 4. color the box display a dialog of swatches to choose from. to Randomize If would 5. to reshuffle the photos, click you . like 6. Do one of the following: and your panel. the Click Done to accept close changes Click Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. to and Click to leave Special Effects, 7. return to the Filter menu. Exit You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. can You apply use the Radial Gradient tool to effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying a Edges Effect Colored and can the Colored Edges effect to You the lines use details of people or objects in your images. trace You can save your settings as a preset for future use. To a Colored Edges Effect: Apply 1. In Edit . in the Add group, select Special Effect mode, or menu toolbar. Filter You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down of Page 191 334

192 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Click Colored 2. Edges. below. the Edges panel, set the options On described Colored 3. as Do one of the following: 4. Done to accept your changes and close the Click panel. Click to discard your changes and close the panel. Cancel Edges Colored Options Specifies the amount of color added Intensity the edges within the image. The higher the to setting, the thicker the color that is applied to the image. Edge color the color of the edges. Specifies to detection the edge detection algorithm. The algorithm Edge the formula used Specifies controls detect edges and the the of the edge indicators. direction Blurring Blurs the edges in the image. Select the Use blurring checkbox, and then select a blur to determine how much blur is applied. setting You value. right- click a slider to reset to the default can your of areas image. You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific across You Gradient tool to transition this effect the specific areas of your image. use can to, use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly You a center point. can Applying a Contours Effect on You use the Contours effect to draw contour lines can your image to create a cartoon effect. Select or change image. the rounding, line frequency, color and strength setting to apply to your as a You can save your settings use. future preset for To Contours Effect: a Apply In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Click 2. Contours . the 3. Contours panel, set the options as described below. On 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. panel. the Click Cancel to discard your changes and close Options Contours of Page 192 334

193 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Specifies the of curve in the contour lines. The higher the value, the rounder Rounding amount lines. the Line the amount of space between the contour lines. The higher the value, the Specifies frequency lines together. the move closer the strength of the line. The higher the value, Strength darker the line. Specifies the color Specifies the color of the contour lines. Line can You click a slider to reset to the default value. right- You use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. can can specific the Gradient tool to transition this effect across You areas of your image. use directly can the You Gradient tool to apply effects around, or use to, a center point. Radial Applying a Crayon Drawing Effect to drawing. crayon a You can use the Crayon Drawing effect of give your photos the appearance To Use Drawing Effect: the Crayon select Edit in In Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. the can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter Filter down menu or You toolbar. drop- 2. Crayon Drawing . Click Do of the following: 3. one Done to Click your changes and close the panel. accept Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel. You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying Crosshatch Effect a You can use the image. effect to add crosshatching to an Crosshatch Effect: Crosshatch the Use To of Page 193 334

194 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Edit in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. mode, toolbar. also Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter the access can You Crosshatch 2. Click . one the following: Do 3. of to accept your changes Click close the panel. Done and Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. Click to onto use can Brush to paint this effect the specific areas of your image. You Edit can use the Gradient tool to transition this You across specific areas of your image. effect You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. can a Effect Applying Dauber can use the Dauber effect to make your images look like they were painted with a paint dauber. Select or You the effect of the change you want applied to your image, such as intensity, frequency and more. settings future can your settings as a preset for save use. You To Use the Dauber Effect: Special select 1. . Effect In Edit mode, in the Add group, You can the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. also access Dauber Click 2. . options the panel, On the Dauber as described below. 3. set Do one of the following: 4. Done to accept your changes and close the panel. Click Cancel close discard your changes and Click the panel. to Options Dauber Specifies the amount of Intensity applied with each daub. color Frequency Specifies the number of daubs added to the image. Background color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. to Select checkbox to use the original image colors or click the color picker Image the select different color. a Indicates the Randomize placement of the paint daubs. random When you apply the Dauber effect to an image, ACDSee places the daubs randomly. filter. This the paint daubs different every time you apply the makes You can define a specific random seed to generate identical daubs. seed, click . Randomize To generate a new random of Page 194 334

195 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click specific use tool to transition this effect across Gradient areas of your image. can the You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a You point. can center a Effect Applying Dramatic moody use Dramatic effect to make your images can dramatic and the by drastically changing the You look in specific areas. contrast can save You settings as a preset for future use. your To a Dramatic Effect: Apply select In in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. Edit can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. You Click Dramatic . 2. options On panel, set the Dramatic as described below. 3. the Do one 4. the following: of Click to accept your Done and close the panel. changes close and your panel. Click Cancel to discard the changes Dramatic Options Specifies strength of the contrast being applied. Strength the Specifies how Spread the effect spreads over the details in the photo. far You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. Radial You can use the to Gradient tool apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying an Detect Effect Edge outline can the Edge Detect effect to create You highlighted use of your image. After creating a black image, the a effect uses colored lines to outline the detail of an image where significant color differences exist. Greater outline differences colors in the original image produce brighter between colors. (The Sobel effect is similar to the and sharper outlines.) brighter Edge Detect effect, but produces of Page 195 334

196 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Use the Detect Effect: To Edge Edit 1. the Add group, select Special Effect . mode, In in drop- access also Effects menu from the Filter the down menu or Filter toolbar. can You Special Edge 2. . Click Detect Do of the following: 3. one to the your changes and close Done panel. Click accept Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. Click to can use the Edit Brush to paint this You onto specific areas of your image. effect You use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. can around, can Radial Gradient tool to apply effects the or directly to, a center point. You use an Emboss Effect Applying can effect the Emboss You to add a grayscale relief to an image. use for You your settings as a preset save future use. can To Emboss an Image: select Edit . Effect 1. In Special mode, in the Add group, down You the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- access menu or Filter toolbar. also can Click Emboss . 2. On the Emboss panel, set the options as described below. 3. Do the of 4. following: one Done panel. accept your changes and close the Click to close Cancel discard your changes and Click the panel. to Emboss Options Elevation Specifies the light source's elevation on the image. Lower values produce more shadows and a darker image. Higher values produce fewer shadows and a lighter image. Weight the amount of relief added to Specifies image. Higher values increase the relief the depth. Azimuth Specifies the angle of shadows that extend from the edges of image details. A value of value 0 shadows to the left side, while a adds of 180 adds shadows to the right side. default the value. to You can right- click a slider to reset of Page 196 334

197 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard can use Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. You the across can Gradient tool to transition this effect the specific areas of your image. You use can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center You point. Applying Furry Edges Effect a in can the Furry Edges effect to add fur and bristles to the lines and details of You or objects use your people image. future can your settings as a preset You save use. for To Use the Furry Edges Effect: 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . You can access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. also Click . Edges 2. Furry described On Furry Edges panel, set 3. options as the below. the 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. close Click discard your changes and to the panel. Cancel Furry Edges Options Frequency Specifies how much fur is added to the image. The higher the setting, the more dense the fur that is applied to the image. it. value the As Threshold Specifies how sharp an edge must be before fur is applied to decreases, the of the image that fur is added to increases. area length the the length of each strand of fur. As the value increases, Fur length of each Specifies strand also increases. fur the Specifies much of the fur Variance in how direction indicated by the Hair direction grows setting. The higher the value, the more random the fur direction will be. which Hair the general direction in Specifies fur appears to grow. direction Edge detection Specifies the edge detection algorithm. The algorithm controls the formula used to direction detect edges and the the of the edge indicators. Specifies Background color of the background color the filtered image. Select the Image checkbox to use the image colors, or click the color picker to select a different color. original original color the color of the Fur Select the Image checkbox to use the Specifies image fur. colors, click the color picker or select a different color. to Randomize Indicates the random placement of the fur strands. an When the Furry Edges effect to apply image, ACDSee places the fur randomly. you This makes the fur strands different every time you apply the filter. You can define a specific random seed to generate identical fur patterns. seed, . Randomize click To generate a new random of Page 197 334

198 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click specific use Brush to paint this effect onto Edit areas of your image. can the You use the Gradient tool to transition this effect You specific areas of your image. can across can the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects use or directly to, a center point. You around, a Applying Edges Effect Glowing You use the Glowing Edges effect to add color to the lines and details of people or objects in your images. The can lines details appear to glow. colored and can save your settings as a preset for future use. You To Apply Glowing Edges Effect: a group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in toolbar. Filter or menu You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down 2. Click Edges . Glowing described On Glowing Edges panel, set 3. options as the below. the 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. close Click discard your changes and to the panel. Cancel Glowing Edges Options Intensity the the amount of color added to the edges within the image. The higher Specifies is setting, the more intense the color that applied to the image. Color Specifies color of the edges. the reset can You a slider to right- to the default value. click You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. to, point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 198 334

199 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a Granite Applying Effect appearance use Granite effect to give your can the the of being painted on a rock wall. You images can save your settings as a preset for future use. You To Use Granite Effect: the select In in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. Edit can also You the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access 2. Click Granite . 3. On Granite panel, set the options as described below. the Do of 4. the following: one Done to Click your changes and close the panel. accept Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel. Granite Options Light Angle Specifies the direction from which an imaginary light source is shining on the image. Different Drag arrow to adjust the angle. the light angles will change the highlights the on valleys rock. and shadows in the peaks and onto You Edit Brush to paint this effect the specific areas of your image. use can can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. You or can the Radial You tool to apply effects around, use directly to, a center point. Gradient Applying a Lomo Effect Simulate the retro- effects of a lomo camera. Photos taken with a lomo camera are high contrast, with a golden hue a and noticeable vignette. You can your settings as a preset for future use. save Use Effect: Lomo To the group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Lomo . Click 3. Drag the Color Distortion distortion. to the right to increase the color slider vignette the increase strength. 4. Drag the Vignette Strength slider to the right to of Page 199 334

200 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 5. of to Click changes and close the panel. accept Done your to your changes and close the panel. Cancel Click discard Exit to leave Special Effects, and return to the Filter 6. Click menu. can click a slider to reset to the default value. You right- onto use Edit Brush to paint this effect can specific areas of your image. You the can You the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. use You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. can a Effect Applying Mirror can use the Mirror effect to reflect an image along the horizontal or vertical You Select or change the Mirror axis. options apply mirroring to your to including mirror axis and direction. image, for preset as use. You can save your settings future a Apply To Mirror Effect: a select In in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. Edit can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. You 2. Click . Mirror following On Mirror panel, in the Mirror direction area, select one 3. the the options to indicate which of direction you want to mirror the image: Horizontal Vertical slider 4. Drag the Mirror axis to adjust the position of the mirror. A value of 500 places the mirror in the center of image. the Do of the following: 5. one Done to Click your changes and close the panel. accept Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel. to You right- click a slider can reset to the default value. your areas of image. You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific of Page 200 334

201 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. You the to, use Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly Radial a center point. the can You Negative Effect a Applying use the Negative effect to create You negative of your image. You can also apply the Negative filter to a can a scanned a roll of film from produce a positive image. negative to Create an Image Negative: To In 1. mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . Edit down can the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- access menu or Filter toolbar. You also Click Negative . 2. Do one of the following: 3. Done changes accept your Click and close the panel. to Cancel panel. discard your changes and close the Click to effect can the You Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. Edit your of areas this You can use the Gradient tool to transition image. effect across specific directly You the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or use to, a center point. can Applying an Oil Paint Effect You can use the Oil Paint effect to give your images a painted appearance. a You your settings as save preset for future use. can To Create an Oil Painting from a Photo: Add 1. Edit mode, in the In group, select Special Effect . the You can also access drop- Special Effects menu from the Filter down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Paint . Oil specify On Oil Paint panel, drag the Brush 3. slider to the the width of the brush strokes in the effect. width The higher the value, the wider the brush stroke. brush 4. the Variance slider to specify the color variance in each Drag stroke. Higher values increase the number of colors used in each stroke. in colors image. the 5. Drag the Vibrance slider to adjust the intensity of the of Page 201 334

202 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 6. of to Click changes and close the panel. accept Done your to your changes and close the panel. Cancel Click discard right- click a slider You reset to the default value. can to can the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. You effect can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas You your image. of You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. can the Effect Applying Old can use the Old effect to give your images an antique look. (The Old effect is similar to You Sepia effect, but the produces more realistic appearance of age.) a a can your settings as You preset for future use. save the Apply To Effect: Old 1. In mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . Edit the can You the Special Effects menu from also Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access 2. Click Old . the 3. Old panel, set the options as described below. On 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. and Click Cancel to discard your changes close the panel. Old Options do Specifies intensity or degree of the effect. (The Age the not correspond to numbers how old the photo should appear.) You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. this You use the Edit Brush to paint can effect onto specific areas of your image. of areas image. your You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 202 334

203 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. You the Orton Applying Effect the effect images the Orton effect. Create Orton with mimics a darkroom technique impressionistic beautiful The sandwiching two images together, one of which is slightly created of focus, and both of which are slightly by out overexposed. save your settings as a preset for can use. You future Use the Orton Effect: To In Edit mode, in the 1. group, select Special Effect . Add You also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. can Click Orton 2. . to the Contrast, and Drag sliders Blur, adjust each effect. 3. Brightness Do one of the following: 4. Done and accept your changes Click close the panel. to Cancel close discard your changes and Click the panel. to and Click to leave Special Effects, 5. return to the Filter menu. Exit the to You value. default can right- click a slider to reset You can the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. use effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying Outline Effect an The Outline effect is similar to the Edge Detect effect. You can use the Outline effect to create a highlighted outline of your image. However, with the Outline effect you can control the thickness of the outline, whether an edge is outlined or and the color that displays behind the outlined image. not, future can You settings as a preset for save use. your To Use the Outline Effect: 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . from You also access the Special Effects menu can the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. . Outline Click of Page 203 334

204 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio On the panel, set the options as described below. 3. Outline one 4. following: of Do the accept your to and close the panel. Done Click changes to discard your changes and close the Click Cancel panel. Options Outline The Specifies width of the outline in the Line the higher the value, the wider the width effect. outline. Specifies how sharp an edge must be in Threshold to be outlined. If you specify a higher order value, edges in the photo will be outlined. more the color background color of the filtered image. Click the color picker to select a Background Specifies color. different can right- click a You to reset to the default value. slider You use the Edit Brush to paint can effect onto specific areas of your image. this of areas to image. You can use the Gradient tool your transition this effect across specific directly You the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or use to, a center point. can Applying a Pencil Drawing Effect You can use the Pencil Drawing effect to create a pencil drawing from your images. To a Pencil Drawing from an Image: Create 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . also You can the access the Special Effects menu from Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Drawing . Pencil Do of the following: 3. one Done to Click your changes and close the panel. accept Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel. this You use the Edit Brush to paint can effect onto specific areas of your image. of areas image. your You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 204 334

205 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. You the Pixel Effect a Applying Explosion use the Pixel Explosion effect to explode pixels from a center point in your images. Select or change the You can settings, intensity as Explosion and direction, to apply this effect to your image. Pixel such use. save settings as a preset for future can You your Use the Pixel Explosion Effect: To In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. You Click Pixel . 2. Explosion below. the Explosion panel, set the On as described Pixel 3. options Do one of the following: 4. Done to accept your changes and close the panel. Click Cancel your discard Click changes and close the panel. to Explosion Pixel Options center Specifies the center point of the explosion on the horizontal Horizontal A value of 500 axis. places the explosion at the middle of the image. 500 of value the Vertical center Specifies places center point of the explosion on the vertical axis. A the explosion middle of the image. at the more the of the explosion. A higher Specifies creates a larger, intensity brilliant Intensity value of the pixels in the image. spread direction Specifies the direction of the explosion. both one or Explosion of the following: Select Explode : Explodes the pixels towards the right and left sides horizontally the of image. vertically : Explodes the pixels Explode the top and bottom of the towards image. Randomize Indicates the random placement of the pixels. apply When you the Pixel Explosion effect to an image, ACDSee places the pixels can randomly. the pixels different every time you apply the filter. You makes This define specific random seed a generate identical pixel patterns. to To generate a new random seed, click Randomize . reset You click a slider to right- to the default value. can You can image. the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your use image. your of areas You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 205 334

206 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard directly can Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or the to, a center point. You use a Pixelate Effect Applying pixel is the smallest piece of a digital image, arranged in rows and A When you reduce the resolution of columns. your the size of the pixel increases and produces blurring. You can use image, Pixelate effect to increase the the size of the pixels in your image. You can save your settings as a preset for future use. To Apply Pixelate Effect: a select In in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. Edit can also You the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access 2. Click Pixelate . the 3. the Pixelate panel, drag the Width and Height sliders to set the size of On pixels in your image. Select the Square checkbox to make the width and height equal. of one following: the 4. Do Click Done accept your changes and close the panel. to Cancel close discard your changes and Click the panel. to reset can click a slider to You to the default value. right- You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, center point. Applying a Effect Posterize image. can the Posterize effect to reduce the number of brightness levels You your use Select or change the in Posterize options to apply this effect to your image. You can save your settings as a preset for future use. To Apply Posterize Effect: a group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in toolbar. can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter You 2. Posterize Click . of Page 206 334

207 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio On the panel, drag the Brightness levels slider to adjust the variance of colors in the image. 3. Posterize in the fewer colors used the the image. lower The value, one of the following: 4. Do to accept your changes and close the panel. Click Done Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. Click to can right- click a slider You reset to the default value. to You use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. can can specific the Gradient tool to transition this effect across You areas of your image. use directly can the You Gradient tool to apply effects around, or use to, a center point. Radial Applying a Purple Haze Effect retro, hyper- effect tint. You can use the Purple Haze purple to give your image a To Apply Haze Effect: the Purple select Edit in In Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. the can also access the Special Filter menu from the You drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Effects 2. Purple Haze . Click 3. one of the following: Do Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. changes Click Cancel to discard your and close the panel. reset You click a slider to right- to the default value. can You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. center a point. to, You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 207 334

208 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a Radial Effect Applying Waves center use Waves effect to display waves radiating from a Radial point in the photo. You can change can the You point in the photo and you can also control the appearance of the waves. center the can your settings as a preset for future use. You save a Effect: Waves Apply To Radial select Edit in In Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. the can also access the Special Effects menu from You Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. the 2. Radial Waves . Click On the waves panel, set the options as described below. 3. Radial one the Do following: 4. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to discard your changes Click close the panel. and Radial Options Waves value position the center of the waves on the horizontal Horizontal A Specifies of 500 places the axis. waves in the middle of the image. value waves the places Vertical position Specifies the center of the waves on the vertical axis. A 500 of in the the image. middle of the each and height of Specifies wave. Amplitude depth the amount of space between waves. Wavelength Specifies strength Specifies the amount of light contrast between the top and bottom of each wave. Light color the Background background color of the filtered image. Select the Image checkbox to Specifies color use image colors, or click the original picker to select a different color. the Wave direction Specifies the direction of the waves. Select one, or both, of the following: : Wave horizontally Makes the waves move towards the right and left sides of the image. vertically the Makes the waves move towards the top and bottom of Wave : image. You right- click a slider can reset to the default value. to You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. a point. center to, You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 208 334

209 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a Rain Applying Effect a use Rain effect to make it look like it was raining when can took the photo. Control the amount, the angle, You you and other characteristics of the rain. strength can save your settings as a preset You future use. for To Rain to a Photo: Apply select In in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. Edit can also access the You Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Special 2. Click Rain . 3. On the Rain panel, set the options as described below. 4. Do of the following: one Done panel. accept your changes and close the Click to close Cancel discard your changes and Click the panel. to Rain Options Strength Specifies the length of the rain drops. Drag the slider to the right to increase the length. Opacity the opacity of the rain drops. Type Specifies number from 0 to 100 or drag the a slider to adjust the opacity of the rain drops. The higher the opacity, the more the image is obscured. number drops. rain of Amount Specifies the Angle variance the angle of the rain drops. Type a number from 0 to 50 or drag the arrow Specifies adjust the angle. to the variance how much variety there should Strength in Specifies length of the rain drops. Drag the be slider to the left if you want rain drops to have a similar length. Drag the slider to the If right you want to vary the length of rain drops. if you vary the length of rain drops they look natural. the Background blur Specifies rain amount of blur in the photo. Heavy will block your vision. Use this option to the photo so the rain effect looks natural. blur falling. Specifies angle at Angle the rain drops are the which Color Specifies the color of the rain drops. You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can image. can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your You center a point. to, You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 209 334

210 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a Ripple Applying Effect that use effect to divide your images into concentric circles Ripple resembles what you see when you can the You pebble into water. Select or change the Ripple settings to apply to your image, such drop position, strength a as more. and for save as a preset settings future use. You your can a Ripple Effect: To Apply select Edit in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . In 1. can also access the Special You menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Effects 2. Ripple . Click On the panel, set the options as described below. 3. Ripple one the Do following: 4. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to discard your changes Click close the panel. and Ripple Options value position the center of the ripples on the horizontal axis. Horizontal Specifies of 500 places the A ripples in the middle of the image. value the places 500 Vertical position Specifies the center of the ripples on the vertical axis. A of ripples in of the image. the middle the each and height of Specifies ripple. Amplitude depth the amount of space between ripples. Wavelength Specifies strength Specifies the amount of light contrast between the top and bottom of each ripple. Light color Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Select the Image checkbox to Background color use image colors, or click the original picker to select a different color. the Ripple direction Specifies the direction of the ripples. Select one or both of the following: vertically Ripple : Makes the ripples move towards the top and bottom of the image. Ripple : Makes the ripples move towards the right and left horizontally of the image. sides reset can click a You to right- to the default value. slider You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. point. center to, a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 210 334

211 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a Scattered Effect Applying Tiles tiles, use Tiles effect to divide your images into rectangular Scattered and scatter and stack the tiles. can the You change the Scattered Tiles options to apply this effect to your Select or image. can your settings as a preset for future use. You save a Effect: Tiles Apply To Scattered select Edit in In Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. the can also access the Special Effects menu from You Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. the 2. Scattered Tiles . Click On the Tiles panel, set the options as described below. 3. Scattered one the Do following: 4. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to discard Click changes and close the panel. your Scattered Options Tiles size the size of the tiles. Tile Specifies amount Specifies Scatter much the tiles will move from their original positions. how a select to color. Background color Specifies the color of the background. Click the color picker different Randomize Indicates random placement of the tiles. the an you the When Tiles effect to apply image, ACDSee places the tiles Scattered randomly. This makes the effect different every time you apply the filter. You can define specific random seed to generate identical tile patterns. a To generate a new random seed, click Randomize . to You right- click a slider can reset to the default value. areas You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific image. of your You can the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. use or can You Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, use directly to, a center point. the Applying a Sepia Effect You can use the Sepia effect to give your images an antique look. (The Old effect is similar to the Sepia effect, but produces more realistic appearance of age.) a You can use. your settings as a preset for future save Image: Tone an to To Add a Sepia of Page 211 334

212 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Edit in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. mode, drop- also Special Effects menu from the Filter the down menu or Filter toolbar. can You access Sepia . 2. Click one the Do following: 3. of to panel. your changes and close the Done Click accept Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. Click to can right- click You slider to reset to the default value. a You use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. can can specific the Gradient tool to transition this effect across You areas of your image. use or can You Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, use directly to, a center point. the Applying a Seventies Effect use look. retro a You can images the Seventies effect to give your To Apply Seventies Effect: the group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Seventies . Click 3. Do one of the following: panel. Done to accept your changes and close the Click and Click Cancel to discard your changes close the panel. reset You click a slider to right- to the default value. can You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. to, point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 212 334

213 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard a Sheet Effect Applying Metal your use Sheet Metal effect can turn the images into sheet metal impressions. You to can save your settings You a preset for future use. as To a Sheet Metal Effect: Apply group, In 1. in the Add Edit select Special Effect . mode, You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Metal . Sheet options On Metal panel, set the Sheet as described below. 3. the Do one 4. the following: of Click to accept your Done and close the panel. changes Click Cancel to discard your changes and close the panel. Sheet Options Metal Rounding Specifies the amount of curve in the edges of the impressions. Detail Specifies the amount of detail in the impression. sheet the in metal. Angle Specifies the angle of the grain Metal color the color of the sheet metal. Specifies was Specifies direction Direction which the sheet metal the manipulated. Select one of the in following: Indented : Stamps the metal from the top side of the image. Pushed : Stamps the metal from underneath the image. out You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. onto You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect areas specific of your image. You can the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. use effects You the Radial Gradient tool to apply use around, or directly to, a center point. can Applying a Shift Effect them You use the Shift effect to divide your images into bars and shift can in random directions. as You save your settings can a preset for future use. Effect: Shift Apply a To of Page 213 334

214 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Edit in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. mode, menu also Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down the or Filter toolbar. access can You Shift . Click 2. the Shift panel, set the options as described below. 3. On one 4. the following: Do of to your changes and close the panel. Done accept Click to Click your changes and close the panel. Cancel discard Options Shift Specifies the amount of Strength between the bars. shift Width the width of each bar. Specifies Specifies the of the bars. Angle angle image. Specifies background color color the filtered the Select the Image checkbox to Background of the original image colors, or click the color picker to use a different color. select You right- click a slider to reset to the default value. can effect can the Gradient tool to transition this You across specific areas of your image. use to, to point. center You can use the Radial Gradient tool a apply effects around, or directly Applying Effect Slant a can use the Slant effect to make a photo distort slanted. For example, you could use the Slant effect to You appear a photo by pushing the top of the photo to the left and the bottom of the photo to the right. Similarly, you could use downwards. the slant effect to push the left side of the photo upwards and the right side of the photo as a You can save your settings use. future preset for To Slant Effect: a Apply In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Click 2. Slant . the 3. Slant panel, set the options as described below. On 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. panel. the Click Cancel to discard your changes and close Options Slant of Page 214 334

215 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Specifies the of the slant. Amount degree left the the slant. Drag the slider to the of to place the center of the Specifies center Fulcrum the bottom of the photo. Drag the slider to the right to place slant center of near the slant the top of the photo. the near the Specifies background color of color filtered image. Click the color picker to select a Background the color. different Direction Specifies the angle of the slant: Slant Horizontal : Horizontal to push the top or bottom of the photo to the Select or right. left side Select to push the left or Vertical Vertical of the photo up or down. : right can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. You You can the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. use effect You the Gradient tool to transition this use across specific areas of your image. can to, to point. center You can use the Radial Gradient tool a apply effects around, or directly Applying a Effect Sobel of can the Sobel effect to create a You outline use your image. After creating a black image, the effect highlighted uses colored lines to outline the detail of an image where significant color differences exist. Greater differences the between in the original image produce brighter outline colors. (The Sobel effect is similar to colors Edge Detect outlines.) effect, produces sharper and brighter but To Use the Sobel Effect: 1. group, In Edit mode, in the Add select Special Effect . or You access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu also Filter toolbar. can 2. Sobel . Click 3. one of the following: Do Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. Click to discard your changes and close the panel. Cancel You can use image. Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your the areas of image. your You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 215 334

216 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard directly can Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or the to, a center point. You use a Solarize Effect Applying can use the Solarize effect to simulate the effect of overexposing an image, as though the You was exposed to film light developing. Select or change the Solarize options to apply this effect to your image. before future can your settings as a preset for save use. You To Apply a Solarize Effect: 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . drop- You access the Special Effects menu from the Filter also down menu or Filter toolbar. can 2. Click Solarize . 3. On the Solarize panel, drag the Threshold slider to specify the brightness threshold of the image. following 4. the Effect area, specify which pixels you want to adjust by selecting one of the In options: specified Solarize adjusts pixels located above the : threshold option. The effect takes any pixels an solarize a image, above the threshold and replaces them with their negative value. When you higher threshold sets a brighter threshold, and colors need to be brighter to be value overexposed. Lunarize adjusts pixels located below the specified : option. The effect takes any pixels threshold below the threshold and replaces them with their negative value. When you lunarize an image, a not higher sets a darker threshold, and colors do value have to be as bright to be threshold overexposed. 5. one of the following: Do Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. discard Click Cancel to your changes and close the panel. You can click a slider to reset to the default value. right- effect can You Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. the You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. effects You the Radial Gradient tool to apply use around, or directly to, a center point. can Applying a Somber Effect give You use the Somber effect to can your images an austere or sleek look. Effect: Somber Apply the To of Page 216 334

217 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Edit in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. mode, menu also Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down the or Filter toolbar. You can access Somber . Click 2. one of the following: 3. Do to your Done changes and close the panel. Click accept to the your changes and close Cancel panel. Click discard to right- a slider to reset can the default value. You click can use You Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. the You use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. can can a the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, You center point. use a Glass Effect Applying Stained can use the Stained Glass effect to divide You image into fragments of a random size and shape, to give the your using fragments the effect photo the appearance of a stained glass window. Control the size and position of the settings. You save your settings as a preset for future use. can Apply Glass Stained To Effect: a group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Stained Glass . Click 3. On the Stained Glass panel, set the options as described below. 4. Do one of the following: to Click Done and accept your changes close the panel. Click Cancel discard your changes and close the panel. to Glass Stained Options size Specifies the size of the Fragment fragments. Randomize Indicates the random placement of the fragments. When you apply the Stained Glass effect to an image, ACDSee places the fragments You randomly. makes the effect different every time you apply the filter. This can define a specific random seed to generate identical fragment patterns. . seed, Randomize click To generate a new random of Page 217 334

218 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click specific use Brush to paint this effect onto Edit areas of your image. can the You use the Gradient tool to transition this effect You specific areas of your image. can across can the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects use or directly to, a center point. You around, a Sunspot Effect Applying can You the Sunspot effect to add a bright spot in your images. use use. can settings as a preset for future your You save Apply a Sunspot Effect: To In Edit mode, in the Add group, select 1. Effect . Special You also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter can down menu or Filter toolbar. drop- 2. Click Sunspot . click Position to image 3. On the Sunspot panel, drag the Horizontal the and Vertical Position sliders or set the of the sunspot. location the Drag Brightness slider to set 4. intensity of the sunspot. the 5. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. Click to discard your changes and close the panel. Cancel You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. Applying a Swirl Effect can You to use the Swirl effect rotate and stretch people and objects in your image. future You your settings as a preset for save use. can To Apply a Swirl Effect: 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . Filter You also access the Special Effects menu from the can drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Swirl . as options below. described 3. On the Swirl panel, set the of Page 218 334

219 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 4. of to Click changes and close the panel. accept Done your panel. discard changes and close the to Click Cancel your Options Swirl Specifies the center of the swirl on the horizontal axis. A value of 500 Horizontal the swirl position places the of the image. in middle of Specifies center of the swirl on the vertical position A value the 500 places the swirl in Vertical axis. middle of the image. the Specifies the size of the Radius effect. swirl Strength the strength and direction of the swirl. Higher values create a clockwise Specifies while negative create a counter- clockwise swirl. swirl, values concentrate the Specifies the swirl. Higher values concentration the effect on the Focus of of the swirl, while lower values spread the swirl across center image. the Background Specifies the background color of the filtered image. Select the Image checkbox to color color the image colors, or click the original picker to select a different color. use the of both the Swirl direction Specifies following: direction of the swirl. Select one or Swirl horizontally Moves the swirl towards the top and bottom of the : image. right : Moves the swirl towards the Swirl and left sides of the vertically image. You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. Radial You can use the apply Gradient tool to effects around, or directly to, a center point. Applying the Effect Threshold a can Threshold effect to create the black and white image. You use can You your settings as a preset for future use. save To Apply the Threshold Effect: 1. In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . Filter You also access the Special Effects menu from the can drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Threshold . as options below. described 3. On the Threshold panel, set the of Page 219 334

220 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 4. of to Click changes and close the panel. accept Done your panel. discard changes and close the to Click Cancel your Options Threshold slider determines which Threshold become black and which ones become white in This pixels black white image. Any pixels that and brighter than the selected threshold the are become white and any pixels that are darker than the threshold will will become black. can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click onto use can Brush to paint this effect the specific areas of your image. You Edit can use the Gradient You to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. tool You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, can directly to, a center point. or Applying a Topography Effect contour into images effect You can use the Topography lines. to change the details of your use. You settings as a preset for future your save can Apply a Topography Effect: To In Edit mode, in the Add group, select Special Effect . 1. drop- can access the Special You menu from the Filter also down menu or Filter toolbar. Effects 2. Click Topography . 3. On the Topographic Map panel, drag the Rounding slider to adjust the amount of curve in the contour lines. lines 4. Number of lines slider to specify how many contour the you want to add. Drag 5. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. Click to discard your changes and close the panel. Cancel You value. right- click a slider to reset to the default can areas of image. your You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific of Page 220 334

221 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard can use Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. You the directly use can Gradient tool to apply effects around, or the to, a center point. You Radial a Water Effect Applying can use the You effect to insert an expanse of water below the subject of a photo and to display a reflection Water of subject in the water. You can control the position the the water below the subject. For example, you can of position the water below a person's chin, or below their waist. You can also control the appearance of ripples in the water how dark or light the water appears. and can use. your settings as a preset for future You save Apply Effect: Water To a group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click . Water the On Water 3. set the options as described below. panel, 4. Do one of the following: Click Done to accept your changes and close the panel. and panel. the close Click Cancel to discard your changes Water Options the Specifies of the water below position subject of the photo. Position the Specifies the Amplitude of the ripples in the water. Drag the slider to the left to reduce height the height of the ripples and the distortion caused by the ripples. Drag the slider to and the increase the height of the ripples to the distortion caused by the right ripples. Wavelength Specifies the distance between ripples. Drag the slider to the left to reduce the distortion distance ripples and increase the between caused by the ripples. Drag the the slider to the right to increase distance between ripples and reduce the distortion caused by ripples. the Changes slider size of the waves as they get farther from the subject. Drag the Perspective to the farthest left increase the size of the waves to from the subject and to increase the the illusion of distance. Lighting the amount of light in the water. Specifies You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. this You use the Edit Brush to paint can effect onto specific areas of your image. of areas image. your You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 221 334

222 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. You the Water Applying Drops a Effect of the Drops effect to display water drops use the surface Water the photo. You can control the number can You on of water drops, and their position on and photo. size the can your settings as a preset for future use. You save Water a to Apply Photo: To Drops select Edit In the Add group, mode, Special Effect . 1. in can also access the You Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Special 2. Water Drops . Click On the Drops panel, set the options as described below. 3. Water one the Do following: 4. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to discard your changes and close Click panel. the Water Options Drops to Specifies number of water drops on the photo. Drag the slider to Density left the the remove drops. Drag the slider to water right to add water drops. the to slider water the Radius Specifies the size of the water drops. Drag the make to the left drops smaller. the slider to the right to make the water drops larger. Drag the Specifies height of the water drops above Height photo surface. Drag the slider to the the left to reduce the height of the water drops and the distortion caused by the water the drops. the slider to the right to increase the height of the water drops and Drag distortion by the water drops. caused Randomize Indicates the random placement of the water drops. effect When you apply the Water Drops water to an image, ACDSee places the drops randomly. This the effect different every time you apply the filter. You can makes a seed random define to generate identical water drop patterns. specific generate a new random seed, click Randomize . To You can right- click a slider to reset to the default value. effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can image. can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your You to, a point. center You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 222 334

223 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a Waves Applying Effect You use effect to display waves across the photo. Waves can change the distance between waves. can the You is called wavelength. You can also change the height of the waves, and the angle at This the waves distance which the cross photo. for save as a preset settings future use. can your You a Waves Effect: To Apply select Edit in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . In 1. can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. You Click 2. . Waves On the panel, select or change the options as described below. 3. Waves one the following: Do of 4. to accept your changes and close the panel. Click Done the to your changes and close discard panel. Cancel Click Options Waves Specifies the Wavelength between waves. Drag the slider to the left to reduce the distance distance waves and increase the distortion caused by the waves. Drag the between and to slider to increase the distance between waves the reduce the distortion right caused by the waves. reduce to of height Amplitude Specifies the height of the waves. Drag the slider to the left the to the the distortion caused by the waves. Drag the slider to the right and waves increase height of the waves and the distortion caused by the waves. the Angle Specifies the angle of the waves. Type a number from 1 to 360 or drag the arrow to adjust the angle. Image color the background color. Select Background Specifies checkbox to use the original image the colors, or click the color picker to select a different color. to You right- click a slider can reset to the default value. Brush You can use the Edit effect to paint this onto specific areas of your image. You can the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. use or can You Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, use directly to, a center point. the Applying a Weave Effect You can use the Weave effect to give a photo the appearance of being woven into a tapestry or basket. You can gap control width of the vertical and horizontal strips, the width of the the between the strips, and the background color that displays through the gap. preset for use. future You can save your settings as a of Page 223 334

224 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Apply a Effect: To Weave Edit 1. the Add group, select Special Effect . mode, In in drop- access also Effects menu from the Filter the down menu or Filter toolbar. can You Special Weave 2. Click . On Weave panel, set the options as described below. 3. the one the Do following: 4. of to accept Done changes and close the panel. Click your Cancel to discard your changes and close Click panel. the Weave Options width Specifies width of the vertical and horizontal strips. Strip the gap width width of the the between the strips. Gap Specifies color Specifies the color of the background. Click the color picker Background select a different color. to You right- click a slider to reset to the default value. can effect can the Edit Brush to paint this You onto specific areas of your image. use to image. your of You can use the Gradient tool areas transition this effect across specific directly You the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or use to, a center point. can a Wind Effect Applying wind can use the Wind effect to add objects lines that make stationary You in your image look like they are moving. effect Select change the settings to control the or of the wind added to your image. use. You can save your settings as a preset for future Apply a To Effect: Wind select 1. in the Add group, mode, Special Effect . Edit In can also the You Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access 2. Click Wind . On 3. the Wind panel, select or change the options as described below. 4. one of the following: Do Click Done panel. accept your changes and close the to panel. the Click Cancel to discard your changes and close Options Wind of Page 224 334

225 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Determines how the wind lines are in the image. The higher the value, the Strength strong wind lines. stronger the will sharp edge must be before Threshold filter an apply wind. The higher how Determines the the sharper the edge needs to be. the value, wind of the amount of wind lines to place in the image. Chance Determines Specifies The edge detection algorithm. detection algorithm controls the formula used to the Edge edges and the direction of the edge indicators. the detect color Specifies the background color. Select the Image checkbox to Background the original image use colors, click the color picker to select a different color. or original color color of the wind lines. Select the Image checkbox to use the the Wind Specifies colors, click the color picker or select a different color. image to angle Specifies the angle of the wind lines. Wind Indicates the random placement of the wind lines. Randomize you wind the Wind effect to an image, ACDSee places the When lines randomly. apply apply This wind lines different every time you the the filter. You can define a makes identical generate random lines. specific wind seed to To generate new random seed, click Randomize . a can default click a slider to reset to the You value. right- effect can You Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. the You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. to, You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly can a center point. Creating a Custom Special Effect Filter (Convolution Effect) them You can use the Convolution filter to create your own special effects and apply to your image. You can your settings as a preset for future use. save Create Effect Custom To Filter: a group, In mode, 1. the Add Edit select Special Effect . in You can also access the Special Effects menu from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Click Defined Convolution . User set On User 3. Convolution panel, the the options as described below. Defined 4. Do one of the following: Click to accept your changes and close the panel. Done panel. Cancel to discard your changes and close the Click Convolution Defined User Options of Page 225 334

226 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Matrix Specifies formula to use when altering the image. Convolution the in the matrix fields to change the pixels in numbers image. Using a Type the an formula, value of each pixel in color image is multiplied by the mathematical the in numbers matrix to produce an effect. the Division the fractional coefficient of the matrix. Specifies a coefficients into the Division field to use fractional Type in the matrix. The number by of convolution matrix is divided the the division factor before being product applied to a pixel. Bias Specifies brightness of the image. the a image. into the Bias field to change the brightness of the Type The bias number each is to the RGB values of added pixel. A positive number brightens the number image, while a negative number darkens the image. Clear Resets the matrix. Matrix Sample Filters effect. own your Loads a sample effect to use as a starting point for creating Menu Drop- Down You can use the Edit Brush image. paint this effect onto specific areas of your to image. your of areas You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific You can the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. use an Rotating Image can rotate an image at preset or custom angles in You mode. Edit You save your settings as can preset for future use. a To Rotate an Image at a Custom Angle: Geometry 1. mode, in the Edit group, select Rotate . In You can also access the Rotate tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. following: 2. one or more of the Select Select one of the default orientation options. slider Drag the Straightening to the left or right until the image appears straightened. Click the or Vertical button, and use the tools as described below. Horizontal crop Crop image if you want to Select the image after it is straightened. straightened Select Preserve straightened image if you do not want to crop the straightened image. Select straightened the you would like to display behind the that image from the Fill color drop- color down. you Show grid overlay to display a grid over the image. You may find that the grid helps Select cropped. image be will straighten the image and understand how the of Page 226 334

227 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 3. of to Click changes and close the tool. apply Done your to all changes and close the tool. Cancel Click discard to Click your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot Reset clear your settings. reset Rotate Icons Click on the horizontal icon, and then use the cursor to draw a line on the Horizontal that you image want set as the horizontal line. to draw Click vertical icon, and then use the cursor to the a line on the image that you want Vertical on set as the vertical line. to You can click a slider to reset to the default value. right- an Image Flipping and can an image You vertically flip horizontally in Edit mode. both use. future for preset You can save your settings as a To Flip Image: an Geometry In mode, 1. the Edit group, select Flip . in You can also access the Flip tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. one or both of the following: Do Select the Horizontal Flip checkbox. Select Vertical Flip checkbox. the 3. Do one of the following: Click close Done to apply your changes and the tool. Click to discard all changes and close the tool. Cancel Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot reset settings. your You can use the Edit Brush image. paint this effect onto specific areas of your to image. your areas of You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 227 334

228 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio an Image Cropping a use tool to remove unwanted parts of your images, or to reduce the image canvas to Crop particular the You can size. save your settings as a also for future use. You can preset in, hold down When Spacebar to pan the image. zooming the Crop Image: To an select Edit the Geometry group, in Crop . In mode, 1. also access You Crop tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. can the Resize the crop window, and position it over 2. area of the image you want to keep. the 3. darken the parts of the image outside the crop window, drag the Darken outside crop area slider to To the left. slider to the right to lighten the area outside the crop window. the Drag Click Estimate new file size to view how big your image file is 4. cropping. after 5. one of the following: Do Done close crop the image and Click the tool. to Click to exit the tool without cropping the image. Cancel default the to You value. can right- click a slider to reset Resizing the Window Crop can the crop window in three ways: You resize the edges of the crop window to the Drag size. desired Specify exact size for the crop an in pixels, inches, centimeters, or millimeters. window Apply a ratio to constrain the crop window proportions. To the Crop Window by Dragging: Resize 1. Position your cursor over the edge or corner of the crop window until it changes into a double- pointed arrow. the 2. Drag the crop window's border to size. desired To Specify Exact Size for the Crop Window: an Type Width desired crop window proportions into the 1. and Height spin boxes. the select In Units drop- down list, the a unit of measurement. 2. 3. Use the Dots per inch spin box to specify a resolution. To Constrain Crop Window to a Ratio: the Select the Constrain cropping proportion checkbox. 1. 2. Select crop ratio from the drop- down list and select or clear the Landscape checkbox to toggle the a and landscape orientation. portrait window between of Page 228 334

229 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 3. of cursor Position edge of the crop window until it changes into a double- pointed over the your to drag edge of the crop window the the desired size. then arrow, and Width or Height spin box to specify a dimension Use one side of the crop window. the for automatically the other dimension based on the ratio you selected. ACDSee resizes Image an Resizing resize an image by adjusting its dimensions You pixels, percentage, or actual/print size. While resizing, can in can also choose an aspect ratio and a resampling filter to adjust you resized image's appearance. the You save your settings as a preset for future use. can Resize an To Image: select Edit the Geometry group, in Resize . In mode, 1. also access You Resize tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. can the Select one of the following resize options: 2. : image the Pixels to specific dimensions in pixels. resizes percentage : image to a the of the original. Percent Resizes size in : Resizes the image Actual/Print match a specific output size. Click the drop- down list to to specify a unit of measurement. specific and checkbox, ratio 3. If you want to maintain a aspect width to height ratio, select the Preserve then select the following options from the drop- down list: one of Maintains the original image's width to height ratio. Original : x 1 : Forces the width and height to be equal. 1 2 x : Forces a width 3 height ratio of 2:3. to 3 x 2 : Forces a width to height ratio of 3:2. to 3 : Forces a width 5 height ratio of 3:5. x 5:3. x 3 : Forces a width to height ratio of 5 dialog Custom : Applies a custom ratio. Enter a width to height ratio in the Custom Aspect Ratio box. Filter 4. filter from the Resizing resizing drop- down list. a Select Under the resize image's you selected in step #3, type the 5. new dimensions into the Width and option Height spin boxes. If you selected Actual/Print size in, click the Resolution drop- down list, and then select a resolution (in dots per inch) for your output image. image, 6. the size of the output estimate click Estimate new file size . To 7. Do one of the following: changes Click to apply your Done and close the Resize tool. tool. the Click Cancel to discard all changes and close Resizing Tips: of Page 229 334

230 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 66%. image reducing images only by 33%, 50%, or by Other percentages can distort the Maintain quality ratio. aspect resizing an image repeatedly. Each resizing places image pixels using a slightly different Avoid If As result, multiple resizes can change the overall color and appearance of the image. a your orientation. first attempt does not produce the resize result, click the Undo button. desired Increasing apparent, more pixels Avoid increasing the size of an image. image's image size makes the causing grainy effect. a Pixel Resize Options and Resulting Action the You can reduce and enlarge in size of one or more images from Manage mode by entering a new dimension For or information pixels. image more an on how to resize an image using pixel dimensions, please see Resizing Resizing multiple images . tends to avoid Enlarging an image enlarging to pixelate the image, reducing image quality. It is best images. of Page 230 334

231 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Options Fit Options Action Resize within the Width the image if Resizes specified dimensions only Enlarge only than the image's original dimensions. are larger width is to the specified value and The increased height increased to maintain the aspect the is ratio. only Resizes the image Height the specified dimensions if are than the image's original dimensions. larger height increased to the specified value The is the width is increased to maintain the and ratio. aspect and height Resizes the image if the Width dimensions specified are larger than the image's original dimensions. The width and height are increased as close to the specified as possible, while value the aspect maintaining ratio. if height Resizes or image (largest the specified dimensions Width the are larger image) the image's than dimensions. original The or height is increased as close to width the specified value as possible to maximize the size of the image, while maintaining the aspect ratio. specified Reduce only Resizes the image if the Width dimensions only are smaller than the image's original dimensions. The width is decreased to the specified and the height is decreased to value maintain the aspect ratio. Height only Resizes the image if the specified dimensions the than original image's are smaller dimensions. The is decreased to the height value and width is decreased to the specified aspect ratio. the maintain and height Resizes the image Width the specified dimensions if are than the image's original smaller dimensions. width and height are decreased The as close to the specified value as possible, while maintaining the ratio. aspect specified or (largest dimensions Resizes the image Width the height if image) are smaller than the image's original dimensions. The width or height is decreased as close the specified value as possible to to minimize the size of the image, while maintaining the aspect ratio. Enlarge Width or reduce only Resizes the width to the specified value and resizes the to whatever value is height to the aspect ratio. necessary maintain only Resizes the height to the specified value Height and resizes width to whatever value is the necessary to maintain the aspect ratio. Width and height Resizes the image within the specified width and height. The and height are resized as width while to close value as possible the specified maintaining the aspect ratio. Width or height (largest and Resizes the image within the specified width height image) The width or height. is resized as close to possible maximize to (or the specified value as of Page 231 334

232 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Options Fit Options Action Resize within size of image, while minimize) the the aspect the maintaining ratio. Adjusting Image Exposure use the Exposure tool to adjust an image's exposure, contrast, and fill light. You can save can settings as a preset for future use. You your the Exposure: Adjust To Image group, Edit in In Exposure/Lighting mode, select Exposure . 1. the can also access the Exposure tool from the Filter drop- down You or Filter toolbar. menu 2. the options as described below. Set Do one the following: 3. of to another your changes and set options on Apply tab. Click apply to apply your changes and close the tool. Click Done Cancel to discard Click changes and close the tool. all Click to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If Reset saved your changes, you cannot you reset your settings. Image Exposure Options to left exposure, exposure. Exposur the Drag the slider to the right to increase the decrease or drag to e Auto the Auto button to automatically adjust the exposure level. Click contrast, slider the Contras to the right to increase Drag or drag to the left to decrease contrast. t Fill to Drag slider to the right to increase the amount of light in the darkest areas of the image, or drag Fill Light left to decrease fill light. the light brightens dark areas of the image. pixels the red, turn Exposur Overexposed image. Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of when enabled. turn green. The icon is gray pixels disabled, and turns yellow if underexposed e warning reset can click a slider to right- to the default value. You can this use the Edit Brush to paint You effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. to, point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of 232 Page 334

233 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Image Levels Adjusting images. use Levels tool to precisely adjust the contrast and light levels You your the can in can your settings as a save for future use. You preset Adjust Image levels: To In 1. mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Levels . Edit menu can access the Levels You from the Filter drop- down also or Filter toolbar. tool 2. Do one of the following: and options manually. levels Set the light as described below to adjust the contrast adjust properties. and select a menu option to automatically Auto image Click 3. Do one of the following: changes. Click Apply to apply your close the Click Done to apply your changes and tool. Levels changes Click to discard all Cancel and close the tool. your Click Reset to clear changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot your settings. reset Levels Options of Page 233 334

234 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Specifies the or color channel you want to adjust. Channel brightness the black of an image. Shadows Specifies point the or a number from slider to 255 into type spin box to define the the Move 0 of an image. As the value increases, the dark colored areas of the image blackest area You also darker. click on the arrow to automatically set it to where the become can start the image. point black in the midtones in an image. Midtones Specifies box slider the a number into the spin or to set the midtone. Higher values Move type the image appear brighter, while make values make the image appear darker. lower You also click on the arrow to automatically set it to the midtone of the image. can Specifies the point of an image. Highlights white into slider type a number the 0 to 255 or the spin box to define the whitest Move from of an image. As the value increases, the light colored areas of area image become the lighter. can also click on the arrow to automatically set it to where the highlights You in the image. start Select of the following options: Auto one Contrast Adjust Automatically analyzes and adjusts image contrast. : and and color each Adjust Color adjusts Contrast : Automatically analyzes channel independently, then adjusts the contrast. and adjusts Color : Automatically analyzes and Brightness image Adjust and and brightness. color : Opens the Tolerance settings Tolerance box. Specify the maximum dialog clipping for black and white levels, percentage click OK . ACDSee adjusts and the image levels automatically. image Black Click the Black Point picker, and then click the picker area you want to set as the Point black point. Mid Point picker Click the Mid Point picker, and then click the image area you want to set as the mid point. the White Point picker Click the White Point picker, and then click image area you want to set as the white point. you to around the image with a selected eye dropper you will see the RGB numbers changing When click dropper. the values of the pixel under the eye RGB The RGB values represent the source pixel reflect (unprocessed) and the current pixel as it appears on the screen. effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can image. can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your You point. to, center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 234 334

235 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Levels Automatically Adjusting levels use Auto Levels tool to automatically correct You exposure the of your images. Auto Levels makes the can the image pixels darker, and the brightest pixels darkest brighter. You save your settings as a preset for future use. can Automatically Image's an To Levels: Correct group, In mode, 1. the Exposure/Lighting Edit select Auto Levels . in You can also access the Auto Levels tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. Select of the following options: one channels. Contrast Color : Adjusts color differences, brightness, Auto balances RGB and and Auto : Adjusts the Contrast differences and brightness only. color Auto Color : Balances the RGB channels in the image, without changing the brightness or contrast. to Use the Strength slider to fine tune the amount of exposure you want 3. apply. and 4. Exposure Warning to make overexposed Click underexposed pixels visible. Overexposed pixels turn pixels underexposed green. turn red, 5. Do of the following: one Done the accept your changes and close Click panel. to Click to discard your changes and close the panel. Cancel Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot reset your settings. reset can click a You to right- to the default value. slider You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. use You can tool the Gradient to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. or You the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, use directly to, a center point. can Adjusting Tone Curves In Edit, you can use the Curves tool to change the tonal range of an image. Select the RGB color channel to adjust or the of the image, range select a specific color. entire use. can save your settings as a preset for future You Curves in Image: an To Adjust the Brightness of Page 235 334

236 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio In Edit in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Tone Curves . 1. mode, also You Tone Curves tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access can the options as described below. 2. Set the of following: one 3. Do the to your changes. Apply Click apply to apply your changes and close the Click tool. Done Curves Cancel discard all changes and close the tool. Click to cannot to your changes and reset to default settings. Reset you saved your changes, you clear Click If your reset settings. Options Curves Channel Specifies color channels to adjust. the Histogram Toggles the histogram display Show and off. on Histogram a graphic of the color information levels in the image, based on the selected Displays Click and the line to manipulate the curve. Each time you click the channel. drag nodes new is added. You can drag the a up and down the curve. To curve, node a node, drag the node up and out of the remove or down and out of the graph. graph, Exposure Highlights overexposed and underexposed areas of the image. Overexposed pixels warning red, green. pixels turn turn underexposed effect can the Edit Brush You paint this use onto specific areas of your image. to tool image. your of You can use the Gradient areas to transition this effect across specific You can the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. use Lighting Adjusting can use the Light EQ™ tool to adjust areas in You image that are too dark or too light, without affecting other an areas of the photo. You can also simultaneously lighten dark areas that are too dark, and darken areas that are too against bright. would be a photo of a person silhouetted Examples a bright background like the sea, or a window. with In fact, most photos taken on a dull day, or with a flash, can be improved in various ways adjustments. fine You can your settings as a preset for future use. save the Light tool lets you make quick and easy adjustments. ACDSee The the photo and varies EQ™ analyzes adjustment the image automatically. For example, darker throughout are brightened more. By opening the images Light EQ™ tool, 1- Step applies an automatic exposure adjustment. For a more hands- on approach, the Basic tab fully allows click the Auto button and have ACDSee to analyze the photo and set the slider positions you that You can also click directly on an area of the image to generate automatic settings optimal for automatically. photo). the subject of area, (usually the of Page 236 334

237 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Step tab: an instant, effortless exposure adjustment. 1- For Is Basic quick and easy adjustments using three sliders. ACDSee analyzes the photo and for very tab: darker throughout image automatically. For example, the images are brightened adjustment varies the clicking the Auto button, you can have ACDSee fully analyze more. photo and set the slider By the automatically. can also click directly on an area of the image to generate automatic settings positions You that for (usually the subject of the photo). area, optimal the Light EQ™ Tool: Open To Edit mode, in the Exposure/Lighting group, select Light EQ™ . In You can access the Light EQ tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. also the 1- Tab Using Step Step open image in the Light EQ™ you 1- an automatically adjusts your image's exposure. You can When tool, adjust it using the Amount slider. To return to the 1- Step automatic adjustment, press the Reset button. further the Using Tab Basic Add to Dark Areas: To Light Drag the Highlights slider to the right to add light to the 1. parts of the photo. dark 2. the settings using any of Adjust controls in the table below. the Are That To Bright: Too Darken Areas 1. Drag slider to the right to lighten and return detail to areas that are too dark. the Shadows the settings using any of the controls in the table below. Adjust 2. Midtones That Are Too Light or Dark: Adjust To Drag the Midtones slider to the right to lighten and return detail to areas that are too dark. 1. the Adjust using any of the controls in settings table below. 2. the EQ™ Controls Light click on a Right- Right- click on a slider to reset it. slider to Click Exposure Exposure Warning Warning make any overexposed or the underexposed areas visible. Overexposed pixels turn red, underexposed pixels green. You can also toggle Exposure turn on the off momentarily by holding down Warning E key. and analyze Auto allow the software to to the photo and apply Click optimal settings based on the amount of light and dark pixels than in Darker photos are brightened more photo. photos the that are already bright. Done Click to apply your changes and close the tool. Cancel Click to discard all changes and close the tool. you Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, cannot settings. your reset of Page 237 334

238 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click use You Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. the can Edit specific use tool to transition this effect across Gradient areas of your image. can You the use the Radial Gradient tool You apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. can to White Adjusting Balance image. use White Balance tool to remove unwanted hue can an the For example, if you take a photo at You from and sunset resulting image has a reddish hue, you can use the White Balance tool to remove it. the You save your settings as a preset for future use. can Remove a Cast from an Image: To Color select Edit In the Color group, mode, White Balance . 1. in can also access the White Balance tool from the You drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. Filter 2. an image area that should be white or gray. Click color square shows the color of the original pixel on The right. the on pixel the left, and the modified right 3. Temperature slider to the left (more blue) or the (more yellow) to select a specific color Drag temperature. 4. Drag the Tint slider to the left (more magenta) or right (more green) to match the white balance settings that selected when you took the photo. you 5. To specify the strength of the white balance adjustment, move the Strength slider. Higher settings remove more of the unwanted color. Cancel 6. Click Done to save your changes, or click the to discard your changes and leave tool. You can click a slider to reset to the default value. right- effect can You Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. the If you are having difficulties achieving the desired effect, try clicking an image area that is a different shade white or gray. of Click Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot reset your settings. image. your areas of You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific of Page 238 334

239 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. You the Balance Color Adjusting an image's color values can the Color Balance tool. You adjust using save your settings as a preset for future use. You can an Color: Adjust To Image's Edit mode, in the Color group, select Color Balance . 1. In Filter can the Color Balance tool from the access drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. You also Adjust the sliders as described in 2. table below. the 3. one of the following: Do Apply to your changes. Click apply to tool. your changes and close the Done Click apply Cancel discard all changes and close the tool. Click to Reset to clear your changes and reset to default settings. Click you saved your changes, you cannot If reset settings. your Balance Color Options Adjusts the saturation of the image. Drag the slider to Saturation right to increase or drag to the the left to decrease saturation. left the to slider Hue Adjusts the hue of the image. Drag the to to the right to increase or drag decrease hue. or the brightness. Drag the slider to the right to Adjusts image drag to the left Lightness increase decrease the image's brightness. to Adjusts the red channel in the image. Drag the slider to or right to increase Red drag to the the to decrease the red tone in your image. left slider Adjusts green channel Green the image. Drag the the to the right to increase or drag to in the left to decrease the green tone in your image. Adjusts Blue the blue channel in the image. Drag the slider to the right to increase or drag to the left decrease the blue tone in your image. to reset can click a slider to You to the default value. right- You can use the Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. this You use the Gradient tool to transition can effect across specific areas of your image. to, point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly of Page 239 334

240 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio the Histogram Using color displays representation of the distribution of intensity levels of pixels for each graphical a The Histogram an channel in image. and the Histogram: Display To Use View mode, click Panes 1. Histogram , or View | Histogram in Edit mode. In | On Histogram, select or clear the following checkboxes: 2. the Shows or hides the red color channel. R : : Shows or hides the green color channel. G B : or hides the blue color channel. Shows image. : hides the lightness of the or L Shows Image Color Depth Changing can modify an image's color depth in View mode. Color depth refers to the range of colors an image You contains. To the Color Depth of an Image: Change and View click Tools | Modify | In Color Depth , mode, select one of the options described below. Change Color Depth Options Black palette white and black and White Two- color 16 Grays color grayscale palette 16- Grays color grayscale palette 256 256- Colors 16- color palette 16 uses 256 color palette (GIF format 256- 256 colors by default) Colors Hicolor 32,768- color palette Truecolor color palette of all colors visible to humans 16,777,216- You can use ACDSee to convert an image to any of these color depths. However, to use certain image enhancement filters, tools, Hicolor blends, and adjustment options, the image must be or Truecolor. To edit an image that is not and originally Truecolor, you can convert it, edit the image, or then convert it back to its original color Hicolor depth. Using the Color Dialog Box when The dialog box appears in several places in Edit mode Colors you select or apply a color. You can use the several tools. using different Color dialog box to select a color in multiple ways and to adjust a color of Page 240 334

241 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Standard Tab The from, first is a fixed honeycomb of Basic colors to choose there including gray, black, and white at the On tab, the bottom. is a grid of Custom or Favorite colors that you can fill in by selecting a color and then right- Below it a box in the grid. To create a clicking color, click the Custom tab. custom The Tab Custom a the tab, there is a color palette. On the far right is a color slider, which you can use to On to second navigate color and gain access to any or all colors of group spectrum. Add colors to your Custom colors by selecting the the box a grid. the color in the palette and then right- clicking in Selecting Adjusting Colors and To select a color, click on a square in the grid of custom colors, or on the color palette. You can also drag over the the color When you click a color, that color appears in palette. New box and all of its numerical values, (Hue, well Saturation, Luminosity, as in as Red, Green, and Blue), appear the fields on the Custom tab. and You adjust a color by changing the Hue, Saturation, also Luminosity values. To select a precise color, type can in the values for that color. You can do the same using the Red, Green, and Blue values. Sharpening an Image and edges. contrast high You can use the Sharpen tool to sharpen an image by enhancing medium of Page 241 334

242 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can save settings as a preset for future use. You your an To Sharpen Tool: Image Sharpen Using select mode, Edit Detail group, in Sharpen . In 1. the also access the Sharpen tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter You can toolbar. Drag sliders to enhance or fix your image as described below. 2. the one of the following: 3. Do to apply Done changes and close the tool. Click your Cancel to discard all changes and close Click tool. the Click to clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot Reset your settings. reset Sharpen Options by amount of sharpening Amount Specifies increasing contrast around the edges. the applied Controls the number of pixels to adjust around each edge. Higher values Radius the increase number sharpened pixels and tend to bring out coarser detail, while lower values of tend the of sharpened pixels and number to bring out finer detail. reduce edges around border extreme forms Suppresses the halo, (the light with that Detail sharpening), reducing its intensity. The higher the value, the stronger the by reduction. within how different the pixel lightness values Specifies an edge must be before the Threshold pixels within the edge are sharpened. Higher values sharpen only stronger edges but sharpen minimize of noise. Lower values appearance both strong and weaker the edges, but can increase the appearance of noise. We recommend you set the keeping threshold enhance edges while to background noise to a minimum. value. default the to You can right- click a slider to reset effect You the Edit Brush to paint this use onto specific areas of your image. can You can use the Gradient tool to transition this effect across specific areas of your image. tool You can use the Radial Gradient to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Blurring Image an You can use the Blur tool to apply different kinds of blur to an image. as You save your settings can a preset for future use. Blur To Image: an Page of 242 334

243 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Detail In mode, 1. the Edit group, select Blur . in You can also access the Blur tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. select 2. the Blur type section, In the type of blur to apply. below. described as options 3. Set the Do one of the following: 4. to Click Done tool. apply your changes and close the Blur changes and Click Cancel to discard all tool. the close default to Reset to clear your changes and reset Click settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot settings. your reset Blur Types of Page 243 334

244 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Produces an smooth blur. even, Specifies of blur. Move the slider the Amount amount Gaussian to the effect. to right intensify the blurring effect that gives the illusion Produces movement. a of Specifies amount of blur. the the slider Amount Move Linear right to intensify the effect. the to Specifies direction of the blur effect. Angle the point. blur a center point. Click the Produces to set the center around image Amount the amount of Specifies Move the slider blur. Radial the right to intensify to effect. the Clockwise clockwise blur. Specifies clockwise Specifies clockwise blur. Counter- counter- the Specifies center point on blur's the position Horizontal axis. horizontal Specifies the blur's Vertical point on the position center axis. vertical Produces a smeared or frosted blur. Amount Specifies the amount of slider Move the blur. Spread the to intensify the effect. right to Produces inward or outward blur to or from a center point. slider Specifies the amount of blur. Move the Amount Zoom to the right to intensify the effect. the to in in Zoom image's Creates a blur that zooms center. Zoom Creates a blur that zooms out from the out center. image's position Specifies the blur's center point on the Horizontal axis. horizontal position Specifies the blur's Vertical point on the center vertical axis. the on Produces blur by detecting and avoiding edges, and preserves detail based threshold usually This effect is setting. used to smooth out skin. Blur Smart Amount Specifies the amount of blur. Move the slider to the right to intensify the effect. Specifies Threshold area how little detail an must have before the will apply to it. blur Produces aperture. blur that mimics the blurring effect of a camera a the Select concentrate shape from the options on a Blur panel. These shapes bokeh Lens in highlights. Amount Specifies the strength of the blur. Move the slider the right to intensify the effect. to Bokeh Frequency Specifies how often the bokeh shapes show up. much Brightness Specifies how Bokeh the bokeh shapes stand out. to the value. default You can right- click a slider to reset of Page 244 334

245 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can use Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific areas of your image. You the specific use tool to transition this effect across Gradient areas of your image. can the You use the Radial Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a You point. can center Noise Noise Reduction About and area looks random black, white, or colored noise in an like of a photo where there should be solid Image pixels such as a dark night sky. In color, photography, noise is typically more visible in the dark areas of a photo. digital There many causes of image noise. You will increase image noise if you use a high ISO setting (such as ISO are to (You a photo, or if you extend the exposure time. 800) would typically use a high ISO setting and extend capture can exposure take a photo in low light.) However, image noise to be caused by dead or stuck pixels in a digital time dust reflecting or blocking camera's image sensor. Similarly, by on a camera lens or scanner bed can cause noise light. Images have two types of noise: luminance generally color. Luminance noise is random variations of and brightness, and particularly in gray areas, may appear spotted when there should be a solid color in the area of the image. noise is random variations Color color in the image. of Noise is visually distracting, so in most cases you will want to reduce noise in your photos. However, if you reduce may noise too much you can unintentionally reduce image sharpness.You use the Noise Removal tool to remove both luminance color noise in your images. and Noise Removing can use the Remove Noise tool to remove noise You your images while preserving details that you want to from retain. You can use the Remove Noise tool to remove hot image pixels caused by digital cameras with caused malfunctioning array sensors, or the extra pixels CCD by a dusty scanner or camera lens. preset future for use. You can save your settings as a of Page 245 334

246 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Remove Noise an Image: To from select Edit the Detail group, in Noise . In mode, 1. also access the Noise tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter You can toolbar. Select Remove Noise tab. 2. the an Noise from the Select Type section. 3. option the options as described below. 4. Set down the ALT key while adjusting a slider Hold view a preview of its effect on the image. to 5. one of the following: Do the Done your changes and close apply Remove Noise tool. Click to Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool. Click saved Reset clear your changes and reset to default settings. If you Click your changes, you cannot to reset your settings. Noise Removal Options following the Adjust noise. Noise Type Camera Noise sliders Removes digital camera to remove noise: further Removal Luminance the random variations of Reduces brightness in the noise. Strength the strength of the Controls Luminance slider. Color Reduces the random variations of noise. color in the Preserve details lost due to strong Restores Detail removal. Set the slider to noise adjust how much detail is restored. Preserve Detail Determines the level of detail Threshold the necessary to be included in Preserve slider's Detail adjustments. 3 pixel Square Removes noise using Noise 3 x Median a square. Removal X Removes noise using a 3 x 3 pixel when X shape. Use this option to preserve you want image's an diagonal lines. and thin noise Removes 3 using a 3 x Plus pixel plus (+) shape. Use this option when you want to preserve an vertical, and image's thin, lines. horizontal Removes noise. Despeckle 334 of 246 Page

247 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio can right- a slider to reset to the default value. You click use areas Edit Brush to paint this effect onto specific can of your image. You the across can Gradient tool to transition this effect the specific areas of your image. You use can use the You Gradient tool to apply effects around, or directly to, a center point. Radial Adding Noise small can the Add Noise tool to add a grainy texture to an image. You use amounts of noise can reduce the Adding appearance of minor imperfections in the original image. your use. future for You can save preset settings as a To Add to an Image: Noise Detail In 1. in the Edit group, select Noise . mode, You can also access the Noise tool from the Filter drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. 2. the Add Noise tab. Select 3. Set the options as described below. 4. Do following: one of the close Click apply your changes and to the Add Noise tool. Done Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool. default Click to clear your changes and reset to Reset settings. If you saved your changes, you cannot settings. reset your Noise Add Options of Page 247 334

248 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Specifies the of noise to add to the image. A higher intensity increases the Intensity amount a chance will replace a pixel in the original image. noise that pixel image. the of Specifies pixels to add to the color A lower value gives each noise proximity Color noise color similar to the pixel it replaces. Higher pixel result in a random selection a values the pixel color. of noise Select color: of the following options to specify noise pixel color Noise one : Randomly the color. Random selects Produces : and white noise pixels. Monochrome black : Randomly Adjustable the color of each noise pixel, but more pixels selects match defined color. To define a color, click the color picker and select a a color. a noise to image areas that closely match Adds defined color. Select the Set color Noise placement to enable noise placement, and click the color picker to specify a color. checkbox Indicates of random placement Randomize noise in an image. the you based Add Noise tool, ACDSee places the noise pixels When on a random use you seed. the image noise different each time makes use the Add Noise tool. You This identical generate specific noise. can define a image random seed to To generate random seed, click Randomize . a new right- value. a slider to reset to the default can You click onto use can Brush to paint this effect the specific areas of your image. You Edit can use the Gradient tool to specific this effect across You areas of your image. transition Adjusting Clarity to Clarity adds subtle definition to the details in your image. Use the Clarity The tool enhance the contrast of tool midtones your images, without in the shadows and highlights. overpowering You can save your settings as a preset for future use. the To Adjust Clarity of Your Image: 1. In mode, in the Detail group, select Clarity . Edit Filter can You the Clarity tool from the also drop- down menu or Filter toolbar. access 2. Drag the Strength slider to the right for greater clarity, or to the left for reverse clarity. 3. Do of the following: one Done to Click your changes and close the tool. apply Click Cancel to discard all changes and close the tool. the You also type a number into can number box and incrementally make precise adjustments. the to value. default You can right- click a slider to reset of Page 248 334

249 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio effect can the Edit Brush You paint this use onto specific areas of your image. to your of areas Gradient You can use the image. tool to transition this effect across specific tool point. center a You can use the Radial Gradient to, to apply effects around, or directly of Page 249 334

250 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard 7: Mode Chapter 365 help with 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, then click Support . For 365.acdsee.com, can 365 mode to upload your images to You an image sharing and storage service available use online to images ACDSee users. With 365 mode and 365.acdsee.com, you can upload and browse through your create a having to launch an Internet browser. You need to without 365.acdsee.com account first, before uploading your photos. With 365.acdsee.com, you can: Account 365.acdsee.com Create Your Images Upload Set Privacy Your Image Folders for Settings 365 Mode in Working click with 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, then For Support . help You can use 365 mode to upload your images to 365.acdsee.com, an image sharing and storage service available to ACDSee users. With 365 mode and 365.acdsee.com, you can upload and browse through your online images access without to launch an Internet browser. Or you can having 365.acdsee.com at any time directly from an Internet browser. 365.acdsee.com Transfer and Parts: 365 Mode Has Two of Page 250 334

251 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard enable the and Transfer tabs, you need to create a 365.acdsee.com account . 365.acdsee.com To 365.acdsee.com, the tab takes you to 365.acdsee.com where you can Clicking 365.acdsee.com through images browse have uploaded to your online account, see other you users' or upgrade your membership level. 365.acdsee.com has the images, menus: following Manage : Organize your images into folders. Upload : Click Upload to switch to Transfer for uploading images. Profile : your profile and set specific information to public or Modify private. Support See the Help or : for assistance with 365.acdsee.com. FAQs Transfer Transfer allows you to upload images to your 365.acdsee.com account. In bottom Transfer, splits into two. The screen of the screen displays the the available images in your computer, and the top of the screen displays your 365.acdsee.com account. select image, an an You cannot take an image from 365 mode and open it in Edit mode for editing. To edit image in or View mode and open it in Edit mode for editing. Manage a Account Creating 365.acdsee.com you can upload your images to 365.acdsee.com, Before need to create an account. you To Create an 365.acdsee.com Account: 1. Click the 365 tab to enter ACDSee 365 mode. 2. the Sign Up Now button. Press 3. Enter your information into the fields and click Create your account . account, If already have an you click the Login button. Uploading to Images 365.acdsee.com For help 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, then click Support . with ACDSee is 365.acdsee.com sharing and storage service for an users. You need to create a 365.acdsee.com image account first, before uploading your photos. There is no size limit for uploading images to your 365.acdsee.com account. Depending your ACDSee 365 account on you can also upload videos. level, To Upload Your Images: . 1. 365 mode, click Login In 2. Login to your account. to switch Transfer. to 3. Click Upload of Page 251 334

252 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio screen splits two, with the bottom part of the screen displaying images on your computer, and the Your in of the representing your images online. top part screen to drop- list in the top right corner down select one of the following: Use 4. the with associated data : Upload images in current file format, including any Upload Original such This those containing metadata. files option is the best for images you want to associated as archive. Original JPG ): Uploads image as a JPG Upload it's original size. in (as sets x JPG 1920 Converts the image to JPG and 1440 the size to 1920 x 1440. This Upload : is the best for high quality option JPGs. Upload x 768 JPG : Converts the image to JPG and sets the size to 1024 x 768. This 1024 fastest is for images you want to view on a Netbook, and results in the best upload. option the Do of the following to one an image to upload: 5. select and drag an image into the top part of the screen to upload it to your Click 365.acdsee.com account. select multiple images, press the SHIFT or the CTRL key and click on the images to To them. click can also select and drag your cursor to select multiple images. You the a of your images to folder top part of the screen. Drag to Sync or to Select images and click the up arrow icon beside Transfer Manager, Web click upload all images in the Sync to Web folders. the they upload images are displayed in the order complete, were uploaded. Overlay icons indicate When is file type and if the image has the edited. been You upload a folder with sub- folders. 365 mode respects can hierarchy when uploading a folder to folder your 365.acdsee.com account. Setting Folders to Automatically Sync to Web tab, For 365.acdsee.com, click the Web with then click Support . help If you want to upload all the images from a folder on your computer to 365.acdsee.com and keep the folder synced automatically as add new images, you can set your folder to you Sync to Web. The sync works in one direction; your images from computer are uploaded to your 365.acdsee.com account. Set selected folders to Sync to Web, and have files in these folders upload to your365.acdsee.com pages whenever you click Sync to Web. all Set Automatically Folder to To Sync to Web: a In Login mode, click 1. . 365 Login 2. your account. to 3. Click the Transfer tab. 4. In the Folders pane in the bottom half of the screen, right- click a folder and select Set as Sync to Web Folder . dialog In Set up Sync to Web 5. the box, set the options as described below. folder 6. Click OK . clicking You also set Sync to Web folders by can File | Manage Sync to Web Folders . to Sync Web: Run To of Page 252 334

253 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard In Transfer, the right side along the screen split, click Sync to Web . on 1. OK 2. Click . a Folder's Edit to Web Settings: To Sync In Transfer, in the Folders pane in the bottom half of the screen, right- click a Sync to Web 1. and folder, select Sync to Web Folder . Edit set In Sync to Web Folder dialog box, Edit the options as described below. 2. the Click OK . 3. to Sync Folder Options Web to Type the drop- Upload list Use select one of the following: down Upload Original with associated data : Uploads images in their current file format, any associated files such as those containing including you This the best for images is want to archive. metadata. option Original (as JPG) : Converts the image to Upload in it's original size. JPEG Upload x 1440 JPG : Converts 1920 image to JPEG and sets the the resolution to 1920 x 1440. This option is the best for high quality JPEGs. image Upload 768 JPG : Converts the x to JPEG and sets the 1024 resolution to 1024 x 768. This option is the best for images you want to view on a Netbook, and results in the fastest upload. select to button a Local Folder Displays the path to the folder you selected. Click the Browse different folder. Enter a name for the online folder. By default this is set to the Folder name as the Online same on computer that you want your sync to Web. folder to to Web right immediately. Select to upload the images in the selected folder Sync If you do not select this you away can click Sync to Web to upload all the images in all the folders checkbox, have to you sync. chosen Folders Setting Privacy Creating and help with 365.acdsee.com, For the Web tab, then click Support . click In 365.acdsee.com and Transfer, you can create folders and make them private or public. When you make a folder and public, anyone can find see the images in that folder. You can also copy the URL for your public folders and share it family and friends. with set you new folder, it is a to private by default. When create Create a Folder To Make it Private or Public in Transfer: and 1. In 365 mode, click Transfer . 2. In the Folders pane on the top left, right- click your user name, and select New Online Folder... new 3. the New Online Folder dialog box, enter a name for the In folder. 4. OK . Click By Private. the new folder is default Public Make . click To change the folder to Public , right- click on the folder, and then of Page 253 334

254 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Share the for a Public Folder: To URL 365 click Transfer . In mode, 1. the Folders pane on the top 2. right- click on a public folder. In left, Click Copy URL . 3. Paste the URL into 4. email, instant message, or other application to share it. an Right- a public folder and select Share folder to share in an email, post click a social networking site, on or to create a widget. Changing the Rating System For help with 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, then click Support . You Photos have rated in Manage mode are rated with a star rating system in 365 mode. you can select how to that use to rate your photos. stars Change Your Rating System: To 1. Click Tools and then select Options . 2. the Options dialog box, select ACDSee 365 . In 3. In Ratings, select Convert 'Rating 1' to 5 stars or Convert 'Rating 1' to 1 star . 4. Click OK . Downloading Images then . Support click For help with 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, 365.acdsee.com is a storage service for ACDSee users. You can download your images from your also account to your computer at any time. 365.acdsee.com Download Your Images: To In 1. mode, click Login . 365 2. Login to your account. 3. the Transfer tab. Click Your screen splits in two, with the bottom part of the screen displaying images on your computer, and the top part of the screen representing your images online. the 4. In the top part of the screen, in the Folders pane in your top left, navigate through 365.acdsee.com folders to images you want to download. the select In bottom part of the screen, in 5. Local Computer pane, the a folder that you want to download the your image to. 6. Do one of the following to select an image to download: To Click drag an image into the bottom part of the screen to download it to your computer. and key select images, press the SHIFT or the CTRL multiple and click on the images to select them. images. to multiple select You can also click and drag your cursor of Page 254 334

255 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio a folder your images to the bottom part of the screen. Drag of icon and the down arrow click beside Transfer Manager. Select images Transfer Manager Using For help 365.acdsee.com, click the Web tab, then click Support . with your Transfer The you monitor the progress of Manager uploads and downloads on your 365.acdsee.com lets and Uploads tabs: two account, and also lets you cancel or pause image transfers. The Transfer Manager has canceled. Downloads. tabs list images that are being uploaded, downloaded, paused, or two These Open the Transfer Manager: To Click | Transfer Manager . Tools You can do the following in Transfer Manager: Cancel an upload or download. Retry the upload or download. image Pause upload or a download. an Continue the image upload or download. Selects all images in the list. list. the from images Clear uploaded, downloaded or canceled of Page 255 334

256 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 8: Dashboard Chapter Mode Mode Dashboard Using is a quick and convenient way to browse your file, camera, and database statistics. Camera Dashboard mode is read your images' metadata, and file information from analyzed from your ACDSee database. are statistics it is important to catalog to get the most out of Therefore, mode. Dashboard Cataloging Files catalog, do of the following: To one Tools Catalog Database | to . Go | your in Manage mode. Browse folders Dashboard Mode Dashboard contains the following tabs: mode Overview : The Overview tab summarizes the information tab on the other tabs. It also displays a found the counts. the of graph detailing your monthly or yearly photo top You can use the drop- down menu at range tab between viewing a range of months or a switch of years. You can use the Prev and Next to buttons to navigate backward or forward in time. to Database :The Database tab displays data pertaining tab your database, such as its location, size, your backup information, a breakdown of assets, and more. to Cameras The Cameras tab displays data pertaining : your camera usage, such as which cameras tab you use the most, your favorite ISO setting, and more. your Files : The Files tab displays data pertaining to tab image and video files, such as your most used bit resolutions, image more. and depths, of Page 256 334

257 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 9: PicaView Chapter PicaView ACDSee About Windows/File a and easy file viewer "add- on" PicaView quick Explorer™ that saves you time by is ACDSee for preview files without having to open them in an application. letting can view your image files in various you You — RAW files — or its EXIF information, or both, including right- clicking. You can also view a preview of sizes by other image file format supported by any . You can access the ACDSee PicaView preview by right- clicking a ACDSee file Windows/File Explorer™. in the can variety of ACDSee PicaView's settings, including a size of the preview, what information You configure and more. Access these settings by clicking ACDSee PicaView | Options... displays, or through ACDSee , by , going Tools | Options... and navigating to ACDSee PicaView in to Options dialog's menu. the To Adjust the ACDSee PicaView Options: ACDSee the a preview. 1. Right- click PicaView file in Windows/File Explorer™ to access 2. At top of the preview, click ACDSee PicaView | Options... the as On ACDSee PicaView Options 3. set or change the options the described below. dialog, 4. Click OK to apply your changes. ACDSee PicaView Options Display Image preview the Image checkbox to display Select Display of the right- clicked file a on the context menu. : Location: image to main menu Add When you right- click, the displays preview in main menu. Add sub- menu : When you right- click, to image preview in a sub- menu, available by clicking displays arrow next to ACDSee PicaView . the of Select the size displays the preview that Size: when you right- click. Show Original Select Show Original to display the pre- edited version of the image when you right- click. Show EXIF Information clicked Toggle the Show EXIF Information checkbox to display the right- information. EXIF photo's of Page 257 334

258 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 10: Options Configuration Chapter and General Setting Options the set settings the Options dialog box to display You tips, in the format for date displays, set adjust can helpful options, and control the display automatic certain image types. rotate of Access General Options: To the any . click Tools | Options In 1. mode, In Options dialog box, click General . 2. the On the General page, set or change any of the options 3. below. described 4. OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee . Click Options General Enable Applies the specified amount of gamma correction when viewing or previewing gamma images. correction stretch your as them set Stretches small images to fit the entire Automatically when you desktop to wallpaper wallpaper. fit screen image image Displays only the first frame Disable an animated pane in Manage mode's Preview of animation and in View mode. (based of EXIF their Automatically rotate images JPEG and TIFF on orientation the corrects Automatically data) TIFF and JPEG when displayed in ACDSee . images on EXIF based orientation a bar Specifies the date Status display in the status bar for date selected file. to Date/Time output Select one of the following: format displaying Default system format : Uses the default system format when and time in information overlays. date the Uses format : the the specified format to display Custom date and time in the all information overlays. Select a format for both Date and Time from lists. down drop- ACDSee Show Taskbar area. Notification Displays the in icon in the Taskbar icon area Notification Show the Mode mode. each Displays the icons next to the names of icons Switching Setting the Mode Options can You the control the appearance of mode buttons to maximize viewing space. To the Mode Button Options: Set 1. In any mode, click Tools | Options . 2. In the Options dialog box, click Mode Configuration . deselecting corresponding their checkboxes. 3. On the Mode Configuration page, hide modes by 258 334 of Page

259 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio cannot hide mode. You Manage the 4. drop- down menus to set them to display icons and labels, labels only, or modes' Use corresponding only. icons conserve appearance of the mode buttons to Condense space with smaller mode buttons. Click the 5. OK . 6. Click Manage Setting Options the Mode folder. use Options dialog box to set various options for Manage mode, including the can start the You default Set Mode Options: To Manage any In click Tools | Options . 1. mode, In the Options dialog box, click 2. Mode . Manage 3. the Manage mode page, set or change the options as described below. On to Click apply your changes and return to ACDSee . OK 4. Mode Options Manage start folder Remember from that the Opens Manage mode in the same folder Default was open session ACDSee time you used previous , and automatically applies any last criteria were using. browsing you folder Always opens Manage mode to the specified Home Home folder. Click Browse button to locate a the folder on your starting hard drive. , session previous from Show warning if Remember enabled have you If your does start and that folder, or folder Home folder, no longer exist, you exist will receive a warning. not use theme color scheme to the in ACDSee . Specifies Display path history on you Clears the list of recently- accessed folders whenever Clear exit ACDSee . exit Show path in title full Displays the full path of an image in the ACDSee title bar. bar database Show bar. title the Displays the name of the database that ACDSee is currently running in bar title in filename Folder the Tree appears. Folder tree Display Density Sets how condensed to Use signs to can that tree Displays plus signs next plus items on the Folder tree folder expand be expanded. if Error Reporting Select this option if you do not want to see a system error report is there an error in . ACDSee Scanning Destination Click the Browse For Folder button to specify the destination for your scanned images. the Quick Search Options Setting You can search. the Quick Search options to refine your use Search Quick Set Options: To 259 334 of Page

260 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard In Manage click Tools | Options . 1. mode, Mode the In box, click Manage Options | Quick Search . 2. dialog On the Quick 3. page, set or change any of the Quick Search options described below. Search 4. OK to apply your Click and return to ACDSee . changes Quick Search Options names Include Searches for file and folder names that begin with the search term. file Include categories Searches for categories that match the search term, and returns any files assigned to categories. Subcategories are not included. those Include contents of Searches for contents names that begin with the search term and returns the folder folders are Subfolders included. not of those folders. Setting List Pane Options File the can use the Options dialog box to set options for the File List pane to suit your preferences, such as grouping You different files subfolders, or highlighting image types with with background colors. You can also archive adjust your thumbnails, the file types ACDSee displays, and and how ACDSee handles files customize thumbnails in the List pane. File Adjust Options: File List Pane To the In 1. mode, click Tools | Options . any 2. In the Options dialog box, click File List . or 3. the File List page, set On change the options as described below. ACDSee 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to . List File Options of Page 260 334

261 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard List Automatically File select Automatically selects new files when they are added to the pane. displayed in the File List files new folder sorting with Treats archives files as folders when Group items in the archive File List pane. folders embedded RAW Displays the RAW files embedded thumbnail if Use the thumbnails has them. file the high a high- quality thumbnail of Creates RAW file in the Generate quality background while the embedded thumbnail thumbnails is then replaces the poorer quality thumbnail displayed, it ready. once is thumbnails on Displays thumbnails Show a folder's contents on the folder of File icon in the folders List pane. Remember each the remember Select this option if you want ACDSee to used settings settings that you sort in specific folders. folder's sort key activates key. the Activates hot- tracking when holding CTRL contents hot- selected, you can hot- track (update the When tracking of the Preview and Properties panes without changing your file selection) by holding the CTRL key and moving your cursor the File List pane. over animations Use or deactivates animation for some features as Activates they close or open. For example, group headers. media Configure Show all files Shows image files, folders, Filters files and archive files in the File List. hides and select, you Apply filtering that Shows any of the following criteria any are not selected. that image files Show Show folders Show media files Show archive files hidden files normally are Shows system and other Show and that files folders hidden for safety. and files THM Show Canon THM files in the File Fist. Shows Show XMP files Shows XMP sidecar files in the File List. highlight Highlight Don't highlight image and Does not files image files in Details image files Thumbs+Details views. Use a single color to in types file Uses a single color to highlight all image files highlight Details and Thumbs+Details views. image Use multiple colors in Uses a different color to highlight each image type to Thumbs+Details highlight image files and Details views. the Pop- hover Activates or deactivates cursor animated pop- up preview Mouse ups pop- ups that displays when File hover over thumbnails in the activates you List. below allow you to Settings text and/or an image include in the pop- up, or if you turn this option off, to activate you the pop- up only when hold down the SHIFT key. if the pop- up only Activates you hold down the SHIFT key over activates pop- key while hovering ups a thumbnail in the File List. You if can this option off turn it interferes with SHIFT selection. if are you still Auto hide pop- ups Hides pop- ups after 5 seconds, even Page of 261 334

262 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio over the hovering image. List in Shows a pop- up preview of images in the File thumbnail when Show you hover over them with a mouse. ups pop- Show information up. Includes text file information in the mouse- over pop- in ups can select the information You display by clicking pop- to Configure file information... the and selecting button your pop- up information. desired dialog file the Choose Pop- up Information Opens where you can select what information Configure to display in the pop- up when you information over a thumbnail in the File List. The hover default file name, location, size, modified is and image dimension, but you can date, multimedia or IPTC, image, select other ACDSee Metadata, EXIF, file, attributes. default Show Windows context ACDSee the of instead menu context Explorer Displays the Windows the Explorer shell menu. context the menu default as menu right- click the Thumbnail Info Options Setting display can the Options dialog box to change what information to use with thumbnails of images in the File List You These File options are set under pane. List | Thumbnail Info . To Adjust Thumbnail Info Options: the In 1. mode, click Tools | Options . Manage 2. In the Options dialog box, click File List | Thumbnail Info . or 3. the Thumbnail Info page, set On change the options as described below. ACDSee 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to . Options Info Thumbnail of Page 262 334

263 ACDSee Standard Studio 2018 Photo thumbnail Displays of each file on the name in the name the Information File File List pane. select a box where you can dialog the information Opens Thumbnail Choose display on each thumbnail in the File List pane. Info to can Info dialog box where you a select the information Opens Choose Tiles on each tile in Tiles view mode. to display Shows icons unrated, Show overlay unlabeled and unrated, untagged, and on hover. untagged, unlabeled overlay hover on icons on file the icons if Overlay Rating Displays a rating overlay icon thumbnails been has database. ACDSee the in rated the view To database on icon overlay the of thumbnails Embed Pending Displays a icons, go overlay that added information files and have had metadata Browsing to Files yet been stored in the ACDSee database, but have not List in the File indicates a the files. This icon to that written file and the . Pane database are out of sync. Icon Displays a file format overlay icon on thumbnails in the File pane. List Category Displays a category overlay icon on thumbnails if the file has been categorized. if thumbnails on the Collection Displays a collection overlay icon file has added to a collection. been Displays shortcut overlay icon on thumbnails if the Shortcut a is a shortcut to another file. item the Offline offline overlay icon on thumbnails if an file Displays is stored on an offline device. Excluded items Displays an excluded file icon on thumbnails if the file is excluded from ACDSee database. the on items a Tagged overlay icon Displays thumbnails. If the file tagging is tagged, a checkmark displays in the icon. on Auto- Displays an auto- rotate overlay icon rotate thumbnails if the file was automatically rotated. Edited icon Displays an Edit overlay on thumbnails if the file has been edited. file Displays overlay icon on thumbnails if the marker Geotagged a been pinned on the map. has Displays Label color label overlay icon on thumbnails if the a file has been labeled. Setting the Thumbnail Style Options You can use the Options dialog box to change how the thumbnails of images display in the File List pane. These options set under File List | Thumbnail Style . are To Adjust the Thumbnail Style Options: 1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Options . | Style Thumbnail . 2. In the Options dialog box, click File List of Page 263 334

264 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard On the Style page, set or change the options as described below. 3. Thumbnail ACDSee OK apply your changes and return to Click . 4. to Style Options Thumbnail Thumbnail frame drop shadow Shows thumbnails with a 3D Show shadow. drop Show slide Displays a shaded background behind the thumbnail and information. background its style XP style folder Displays folders as an XP- Folder image. style 3D folder Displays folders as style 3D folder with transparency. a Thumbnail ratio Custom Specifies a custom height- to- width ratio for the shape of the in the File List pane. Drag the slider thumbnails the to set the ratio. The preview shows under preview the shape as you you the slider. move Portrait a standard 3:4 portrait Specifies for the shape of ratio the thumbnails in the File List pane. Landscape Specifies standard 4:3 landscape ratio for the shape a the thumbnails in the File List pane. of Thumbnail spacing Slider Increases or decreases the space between each thumbnail. pane. quality scaling Uses high- quality High- scaling in the File List thumbnail the Options View Details Setting You can the Options dialog box to change how thumbnails display in the File List pane. use Adjust Details View Options: To the In any mode, click Tools | Options . 1. File In Options dialog box, click the List | Details View . 2. 3. On the Details View page, set or change the options as described below. return 4. to apply your changes and OK to ACDSee . Click Details View Options Show grid lines Separates each row and column in Details view mode with a grid line. row Full Selects select the entire row when you click a column entry in that row. Column auto- Automatically resizes each column to fit its contents. width files sort Highlights Highlight column used to sort column when you click on the column's title. the Choose Details Specifies the columns you want to use to sort files in Details view mode. Setting Preview Pane Options the You can specify how ACDSee displays previews of your images, and configure settings to play audio and video files view automatically, soon as you as them in the Preview pane. Set Options: Preview the To of Page 264 334

265 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Do one the following: 1. of mode, In | Options | Preview . click Manage Tools select right- mode, the Preview pane and click Preview Options . Manage In in the Preview 2. page, set or change the options as described below. On options Click to apply your changes and OK to ACDSee . 3. return Options Preview Specifies how quickly the Delay pane displays an image after you select it in the Preview File pane. List relation Specifies of the previewed image in size to the selected image. Size the audio and pane. List Previews media files as you Preview them in the File select clips video and audio pane. Preview Automatically starts Autoplay audio and video files in the playing clips video improves decoded. is image Instant image as Displays an instant preview that the in quality preview Image and Select one of the following: Information the : Show a preview of image selected image in the Preview Displays pane. Show information : Displays information about the selected image in the Preview pane. Choose Preview Info Specifies the type of information you want to display in the Preview pane. For more information, see Previewing Images . Setting the Folders Pane Options archives, can identifying and You displaying customize the Folders pane by showing or hiding the Easy- Select bar, excluded folders. Customize the Folders Pane: To In any mode, click Tools | Options . 1. Options In the . dialog box, click Folders 2. or 3. the Folders page, set On change the options as described below. ACDSee 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to . Pane Folders Options Page of 265 334

266 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Select Show Select Displays the Easy- Select bar in the Folders pane, which Easy- Easy- use to multiple folders. you can select your Displays tool- Select when you place a cursor over the Easy- Enable tip tooltip bar. Select Easy- in Show display Lists archive files in the Folders pane. Folder archives Pane Folder confirmation & drag Confirm movements folder Prompts you for drop of folder within the Folders pane. within move views overlay for excluded are Displays an overlay icon on folders Show that folders from the ACDSee database. excluded the Catalog Options Setting Pane while customize Catalog pane to specify which confirmations you want to be can for the working You prompted categories, choose whether to show and Easy- Select bar. with the Set the Catalog Pane To Options: 1. any mode, click Tools | Options In In Options dialog box, click Catalog . 2. the On the Catalog page, set 3. change the options as described below. or 4. Click OK . Catalog Options deleting when if category Category deletion Confirm a category confirmation for you Prompts files has with assigned files. assigned if category category Confirm a Prompts you for confirmation when deleting categories categories. containing sub- has sub- for removal file File Prompts you Confirm confirmation when un- assigning files removal a from category from category. Select pane, Easy- Select Displays an Easy- Show bar in the Catalog select which Easy you can use to select multiple categories, special items, and ratings. the Enable Easy- Select Displays a tool- tip when you place your cursor over Select tooltip Easy- bar. so Icons icons for categories, identify easily can you Show icons Displays categories, ratings, special and ratings, labels, color items. and color labels, special items set Enable setting in labels and ratings, categories, color Allows you to pane. keywords, categories, the Catalog color ratings, and labels Setting the Calendar Pane Options You can customize the format, Calendar to start each week on a specific day, to use a 12- or 24- hour clock ACDSee when files. types sorting and to use one of four date 266 334 of Page

267 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Set the Pane Options: To Calendar any . click Tools | Options In 1. mode, In Options dialog box, click Calendar . 2. the On the 3. page, set or change any of the options described below. Calendar 4. OK to accept your changes and Click to ACDSee . return Calendar Pane Options Date types Database the Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the date stored in date ACDSee . database on taken files in the Calendar Date based Sorts the EXIF date of each pane item. File modified date Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the last- modified date each item. of File created was Sorts files in the Calendar pane based on the date each file date created on your computer. pane the on based Filters Apply Calendar the in displayed items the Filters List File Advanced current File pane filter settings . Filters List (excluding folders) and image Show pane. Displays only image, audio, Calendar video files in the media and only files of week Specifies the first day of each week in the Calendar pane. Start formats Clock hour Uses a 12- hour clock in the Calendar pane. 12 Calendar hour a 24- hour clock in the 24 pane. Uses Setting the CD/DVD Management Options set to Options preferred You can use the the dialog box to change the folder where Burn Basket files are stored and method identifying Photo Discs. for To Change the Burn Basket or Photo Disc Identification Options: 1. In any mode, click Tools | Options . box, 2. In the Options dialog click . CD/DVD Management or options the CD/DVD Management page, set On change any of the 3. described below. . 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee Options Management CD/DVD 267 334 of Page

268 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio by Disc Attempts to identify a Photo Disc disc its volume label. This setting Photo Use label is recommended if you are working with multi- session Photo Identification volume Discs. disc identify Attempts to Use a Photo Disc by its serial number. This setting with preferred when working serial single- session Photo is a or Discs, converting Photo Discs from importing previous number or of ACDSee . version Basket Show Burn Wizard. Basket Burn the Displays the Welcome step Burn in Basket Wizard welcome step Browse Opens For Folder dialog box where you can change the Browse folder where Basket files are stored. Burn the Properties Pane Options the Setting can use the Options dialog box to customize the information available You the Metadata tab in the Properties on pane. Customize Metadata Tab in the Properties Pane: To the In Manage mode, click Tools 1. Options . | 2. the Options dialog In click Properties Pane . box, by page, corresponding the 3. On the Properties Pane deselecting hide the Tagged, Rating, and Color Labels, checkbox. 4. the Categories by deselecting the checkbox. Hide Click to Metadata Views to open the Choose Metadata 5. Display dialog box. Manage the Click plus signs to expand the tree and select your preferences. 6. 7. Click OK . and 8. to apply your changes OK return to ACDSee . Click You can also click the Metadata View drop- down list in the Properties pane Metadata tab and select Manage Metadata Views . Management Setting the File Options and You ACDSee handles renaming and deleting files how folders, and whether ACDSee sends deleted specify can to the desktop Recycle Bin by default. files Set the File Management Options: To any In Options mode, click Tools | 1. . 2. the Options dialog box, click File Management . In 3. On the below. Management page, set or change any of the options as described File . 4. Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee Options Management File of Page 268 334

269 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio duplicate Prompts you for confirmation when overwriting Overwriting Ask files. files duplicate resolves Rename conflicts when any Automatically naming files copying renaming the source files. or moving by Separator character field, type a character to In the separate use names in the automatic renaming to file system. folder Replace in the target overwrites Automatically files prompting for confirmation. without Does not move, copy, or overwrite any files that result Skip in naming conflicts. is Originals copy of the original file when it a edited using one of the batch editing Save Saves This makes it possible to restore the original file later. Turning this option off tools. that means are not saved during batch editing, and so cannot be restored. originals always Edit In copy of the original file is mode, saved, whether or not this option is a selected. the clicking by edited Other Click to edit file be Specifies that file names can name file the File List pane. name in Recycle Bin Recycle to the Desktop Sends Bin. If not selected, Use files files are permanently removed from your hard deleted drive. with copy you Preserve Copies database information database files when when information them to another location. files are copied and Control for folder delete, file delete, and read- only rename confirmations delete actions in your operating system settings. Setting the Database Options and settings a specify You can adjust information, in the Options dialog box to display reminders, control database your cached your hard drive where you want to store on database files and location thumbnails. To Set the Database Options: . 1. In any mode, click Tools | Options 2. . Database In the Options dialog, click set as On the Database page, 3. or change the options described below. ACDSee . 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to Options Database Page of 269 334

270 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio file Database location on your hard drive where the ACDSee database is stored. Displays the database. Automatically you to back up your ACDSee reminds Click the Every drop- backup Display reminder and select how often you would like to be reminded. down list where Folders Excluded excluded List dialog box, the you can specify which folders Opens Manage want to exclude folders the ACDSee database. you from embed Display Metadata. Displays a ACDSee to embed reminder ACDSee Metadata reminder database date to the Set Automatically adds the EXIF date to the ACDSee database when you catalog date of EXIF a folder. contents If the date is changed, the Embed Pending flag does not Note: database show up. into Import database ACDSee the and Automatically imports EXIF and IPTC information EXIF from the whenever you catalog metadata contents of a folder. IPTC cataloged files this option is not selected, ACDSee If not import the EXIF and IPTC does information, does set aside space within the database records. To remove the but records, database sure to optimize your empty frequently. be if "Embed Displays a Set overlay icon on thumbnails Pending" the file has been tagged, but this database file the that This and when tagging metadata has not yet been written to the file. files icon indicates the database out of sync. When this option is disabled, tagged images will not are Items up Embed Pending in the Special under section of the Catalog pane. show Show separator can You occurs. conflict separator Displays the IPTC Keywords dialog box when a conflicts it dialog conflict specify a method of handling for within the dialog and select not to display change keywords again. Select this option to IPTC or adjust those settings the next time a separator occurs. conflict Show separator Displays the IPTC Supplemental Categories dialog box when a separator conflict specify and dialog a conflict dialog for occurs. You can elect the method of handling conflicts within option settings to display it again. Select this not to change or adjust those IPTC the supplemental next time a separator conflict occurs. categories the Photos Mode Options Setting display can adjust settings in the Options dialog box to determine which files will how. in Photos Mode and You To Set Photos Mode Options: the In 1. mode, click Tools | Options . any 2. In the Options dialog, click Photos Mode . or 3. the Photos Mode page, set On change the options as described below. ACDSee. 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to Mode Photos Options of Page 270 334

271 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio files Show Select Show database orphan Photos to display missing files flagged as database orphans. Orphans will be displayed in sepia. files orphan Show which Activates or deactivates the animated pop- up navigation thumbnail, to thumbnail the date on the navigation during scrolling. This option is displays assist with orientation for users scrolling through large photo collections. thumbnail while This option only works when using the scroll bar and pausing scrolling the in desired area/date range. photo from oldest whether your thumbnails will display Select Sort to newest or newest to oldest. thumbna dates il ups Mouse cursor you when displays that Activates or deactivates the animated pop- Pop- preview up hover hover over thumbnails. activates pop- ups hold key a over Activates the pop- only if you hovering down the SHIFT key while up activates pop- thumbnail. ups image. the over hovering Auto hide still are Hides pop- ups after 5 seconds, even if you ups pop- images when Shows a pop- up preview of Show mouse. you hover over them with a thumbnail in pop- ups the select can You Includes file information in the mouse- Show pop- up. over button and information information to display by clicking the Configure file information... information. pop- selecting your desired pop- up in ups Setting the View Mode Options the increase and preferences, You can use the Options dialog box to adjust the behavior of View mode to suit your speed which images are displayed. with To Set the View Mode Options: 1. In any mode, click Tools | Options . Mode 2. In the Options dialog box, click View . change mode the View mode options page, set or On any of the View 3. options described below. . 4. Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee Options Mode View 271 334 of Page

272 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio and caching next image in Decoding Automatically decodes the next image in sequence in Decode mode, advance shorter load times. resulting View in for decoded Keeps the previously image image in memory Keep previous display in View mode. quick memory in Replace images in list Does not Startup a new View mode window if an image is files open from application. opened another to new Opens a new View in window Images display images mode opened from another application. window files Replace images in list Replaces the list of images open in View mode with Dropped dropped images View mode from another into application. Add list Adds any images dropped into View mode by another images to the open. of images already to application list window top the ACDSee on as the top Keeps in a stack of windows. Always window screen Opens images in View mode Full- full- screen mode. (Press F to exit full- screen mode.) in Hide cursor in mouse mode. Hides the cursor in full- screen screen full- image preview Displays an instant preview in View Instant that improves in quality as the image is mode decoded. when images for viewer UseACDSee Quick View If selected, ACDSee Quick View is set as the default ACDSee is closed. pixels is when Show box Resampling is not applied to images zoomed past 100%. When the produce 100% zoomed images zoomed past 100% are resampled to past smooth unchecked, transitions, but this may result in excessive blurring. . ACDSee closing to prior selected On startup, opens images in the ACDSee Lens last in open Always Lens ACDSee selected moving after Automatically returns to Exit mode after delete/move or deleting an image in View Manage mode. to View images in Adds all images in a folder all the current image list when viewing any file from that folder folder. full image Show bars. status file and Displays the image's full file path in View mode title path Sharpen 100%. Automatically sharpens the view for subsampled zoomed in at less than images images Setting the Display Options the You use the Options dialog box to change can window background and specify how images are zoomed. Display Options: To Set the any mode, click Tools | Options . In 1. In View the Options dialog box, click 2. Mode | Display . 3. On the Display options page, set or change the options described below. . ACDSee 4. Click OK to accept your changes and return to Display Options of Page 272 334

273 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio options Default mode Specifies the default zoom level for images in View Zoom zoom mode. to zoom Reset the when default Resets the zoom mode to the selected mode every displayed image changes. on default change image the image based on the selected option. For Resize Resizes about information these choices affect the more how Automatically or enlarging see shrinking Viewer, images . Enable click- zooming Pan to turn off the one click image toggle between tool Deselect view and Actual Size Default view. Pan Slow - Fast Specifies the speed when panning an image. speed background Default the default ACDSee color for the Uses in Background color and Edit mode. View color Specifies a color to use as the background in View and Custom mode. Edit image Uses a tiled image as the background for View and Edit Tiled Click an to locate mode. image on your hard Browse drive. do The and tiled image options background not affect full screen mode. color color click then and To change the background , in ACDSee Quick View, open an image in Quick View Tools | . Options the Mode Options Setting Edit can use the Options dialog box to show icons in Edit mode. You Show To in the Edit Pane: Icons In 1. mode, click Tools | Options . any 2. In the Options dialog box, click Edit Mode . Show 3. Edit Mode page, select the icons in Edit pane . On 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to ACDSee. Setting the ACDSee 365 Options can You use what the Options dialog box to set options for ACDSee 365, such as the temporary folder location and to uploads and downloads when you close ACDSee. with do Set the ACDSee 365 Options: To In any mode, click Tools | Options . 1. 2. In the Options dialog box, click ACDSee 365 . or 3. the ACDSee 365 page, set On change any of the options described below. ACDSee. 4. Click OK to accept your changes and return to ACDSee Options 365 of Page 273 334

274 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard to locations Click the Browse button folder change the folder where Folder Temporary temporarily keeps files during ACDSee and uploads downloads. all On always ACDSee. close you Uploads/Downloads shutdown, transfers when Pauses transfers all pause On startup, always ACDSee. reopen you when transfers Resumes all resume automatically transfers paused all of concurrent at same the Select the number of files to be uploaded Number 10) time. uploads (1- of concurrent same Select the Number of files to be downloaded at the number 10) downloads (1- time. a Ratings 'Rating 1' to five to Converts Convert numeric rating of 1 stars. stars 5 to 1 star. one Convert 'Rating 1' to of rating Converts a numeric star 1 the Showroom Options Setting ACDSee can customize the ACDSee Showroom desktop You in a number of ways, including changing the slide slideshow duration, order, and transition or changing the frame opacity, size, and frame style. To the ACDSee Showroom Desktop Slideshow: Customize 1. following: ACDSee Showroom by doing one of the Start . Showroom ACDSee | In any mode, click Tools | Create | Click | ACD Systems Programs ACDSee Showroom . | Start Right- click anywhere in the ACDSee Showroom window and select Options . 2. Set the or change 3. options as described below. selected 4. Set As Default to use the currently Click options as the default for new Showroom windows. your 5. Click OK to apply changes. Options Showroom ACDSee 274 334 of Page

275 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Folder Include Select this option if you want to include photos from Picture subfolders the slideshow. subfolders in hidden folders this option hidden skip Select folders such as the Skip to folders that are created when you process [Originals] images. Slide Drag the slider to the left to decrease the display time Duration each right and to the for to increase the display photo for each photo. time From the Order Order down list select Sequential to drop- display photos in order or Random to display photos randomly. Transition the Transition drop- down list select None if you From not transition any special do effects, Slide if you want from want enter the window to the right and exit photos to the left, and Fade if you want to reduce photo opacity during transition from one photo to another. the Apply to all Select Apply to all if you want to apply these changes to slideshows. all Showroom Window Opacity Drag the opacity slider to the left to reduce the Opacity the increase to right of the Showroom window and to opacity. Size the Size drop- down list select either a Small , From , Large Showroom window frame. Medium or From the Frame drop- down list select a Frame style. frame Always top Select Always on on if you want the Showroom top window to display on top of all other application windows. Apply all Select Apply to all if you to to apply these changes want to all Showroom windows. Run at startup Select Run at startup if you want to start ACDSee Showroom automatically when you start your computer. Setting the ACDSee Quick View Options You can ACDSee Quick View in a number of ways, including displaying Quick View on top of any open customize color displaying view at full screen, or even changing the background windows, in the Quick View window. Quick To Customize ACDSee Quick View: 1. Double- click on an image. For example, double- click on the image in Windows Explorer or in an email message. Click Tools | Options . 2. 3. Set or change the options as described below. 4. Click OK to apply your changes. ACDSee View Quick Options of Page 275 334

276 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard ACDSee Quick If selected, ACDSee Quick View is set as the default viewer for images when ACDSee Use closed. is View gamma of the specified amount Enable Applies correction when viewing images. gamma correction animation Displays only the first frame of an animated image. Disable on Always Keeps the Quick View window as the top window in a stack of windows. top screen the images in Full Quick View window in full screen mode. Opens the Hide in mode. screen Hides cursor cursor in full mouse screen full Default zoom mode Fit image : Displays the image at the largest magnification that fits in the Quick View window. that are smaller than the Quick View window display at their Images size. original size : Displays the image at its actual size in the Quick Actual window. View Background color : Uses the Default background color in Quick View. ACDSee Custom color : Specifies a color to use as the background in the Quick View a window. color swatch to select the different color. Click Setting JPEG Options You can change method, settings in the Options dialog box to control the quality of the JPEG image, encoding the JPEG the in image. color subsampling method, and whether to update or create embedded thumbnails JPEG Options Drag the slider to determine the quality of the JPEG image. Image quality : to Progressive enable progressive encoding. Select Encoding Huffman : Optimize to optimize codes codes to increase Huffman Select compression. axis horizontal 2:1 Horizontal : Select to subsample color channels on the Color component by a factor of 2:1. sampling vertical Vertical to subsample color channels on the Select axis by a 2:1 : of 2:1. factor existing Only update existing thumbnails : Select to update any thumbnails Embedded thumbnails. embedded add/update thumbnails : Always to update any existing Select embedded thumbnails, or create embedded thumbnails. Select Never add/update thumbnails : if you do not want to update any existing embedded or if you do not want to create embedded thumbnails, thumbnails. Generate compatible thumbnails : Select to generate thumbnails DCF (DCF) that Digital Camera Format the specification and are compatible meet with the thumbnail view on the LCD of a digital camera. This option forces a any fixed x 120 and pads 160 extra space with black. of resolution these JPEGs. Save Select this option to use these JPEG settings by default for all settings the defaults as Setting the Media Options . ACDSee from launched You can change what application handles your audio and video files when of Page 276 334

277 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Customize the Media Player for Files Launched from ACDSee : To Default any 1. Tools | Options . mode, In click the dialog box, click Media . In 2. Options launch audio and video files in your system's default media 3. check the Use default media To player, to audio and video files checkbox. player open OK to apply your changes. 4. Click ACDSee Indexer Options Setting the can use the Options dialog to customize the You of the ACDSee Indexer. functionality To the ACDSee Indexer: Customize In any click Tools | Options . 1. mode, In Options dialog box, click ACDSee Indexer . 2. the On the Folders page, set or change the options as described below. 3. 4. Click to apply your changes and return to ACDSee . OK Indexer ACDSee Options index folders or Enables the indexing of Auto or images while the computer is idle. Set the folders indexing images when computer is be should before idle indicate slider to begins. how long your computer for idle types image Deselect to index all file only supported by ACDSee . Index files database Current which database will be indexed. Displays Folders to monitor Displays which folders will be indexed. Add Folder... Click the Add Folder... button to add additional folders to be indexed. Remove Remove Select a folder from the list and click the Folder Folder button to remove it from the folders to be indexed. folder. OneDrive your of Include Microsoft indexing Enables the OneDrive the ACDSee PicaView Options Setting You can use the Options dialog box to change your ACDSee PicaView settings, as well as toggling it on and off. To Adjust the ACDSee PicaView Options: Tools . Options | 1. In Manage mode, click click 2. Options dialog box, the ACDSee PicaView . In the On or ACDSee PicaView page, set 3. change the options as described below. ACDSee 4. Click OK to apply your changes and return to . ACDSee Options Picaview 334 277 of Page

278 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio PicaView. ACDSee enables or disables ACDSee checkbox When enabled, ACDSee PicaView Enable This when an ACDSee - supported file is right- clicked anywhere on your hard drive. Picaview appears or the displaying a preview of the file of image, and its EXIF information, have You option or the other. or one a Select Image checkbox to display Display preview of the Image Display the file. right- clicked image main menu : Add Location: to right- click, displays When you the menu. in image main to : menu image Add sub- right- click, displays When you in a image menu, available sub- by the arrow next to clicking PicaView . ACDSee the Select the preview that size of Size: right- click. you displays when Select Show Show to display the Original Original edited of the image version pre- when right- click. you EXIF the Toggle the Show EXIF Information checkbox to Show display Information clicked photo's EXIF information. right- the Mobile Sync Options Setting ACDSee can use the Options dialog box to change your ACDSee Mobile Sync You settings. To the ACDSee Mobile Sync Options: Set 1. any mode, click Tools | Options . In Options . Sync Mobile 2. In the ACDSee dialog, click 3. On ACDSee Mobile Sync page, set or change the options as described below. the return 4. to apply your changes and OK to ACDSee. Click ACDSee Mobile Sync Options Root Folder Click the Browse For Folder button to specify the destination for your sent images videos. and Server Name To customize the name of the target server (ACDSee on your PC), enter text in the of field. name will appear in your list This targets in the ACDSee Mobile Sync app. the Show ACDSee Mobile pane. Folders in folder Sync Mobile Displays the ACDSee Folder Root Sync on Tree Folder hiding and Panels Auto- Panes can use the Auto Hide button to automatically hide You panes and panels in ACDSee . When a pane is set to some auto- hide, it rolls away when you click outside of it, leaving a tab displayed. You can access the pane by moving not the over the tab. When a pane or panel is floating, the auto- hide feature is cursor available. You cannot move if the to a new location pane it is set to auto- hide. reflects its setting: current The Auto Hide button's appearance on the pane’s title bar of Page 278 334

279 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio horizontal pushpin that the pane is set to automatically hide when you click outside of A indicates it. vertical that the pane is fixed and will remain visible even if indicates click outside pushpin A you it. of To Set or Remove Auto- Hide: Auto Hide button on the title bar Click that it displays a slanted or horizontal pushpin. the so the Pane Using Task menus Pane groups of often- used tasks Task the displays and toolbars based on your current location The from selections in ACDSee and By default, the Task Pane opens on the right side of the Manage mode window. . To or Close the Task Pane: Open Manage mode, Panes | Task Pane . In click the in Task Pane change menus on what area of the Manage mode window you are working in The depending what items you and For example, if you select more than a folder in the File List pane, the Task Pane select. displays menus than it does if different select a photo or media file. you images multiple dynamically. the The options on the Task Pane menus also change in For example, if you select File List, options in the Fix and Enhance Photos menu change to list options that you can use with multiple the images. Customizing Toolbars in can the appearance and organization of You customize Manage mode and View mode by selecting toolbars which toolbars to display, and specifying each toolbar’s buttons or commands. You can also discard your changes at and toolbars to their default layout the any time. reset Displaying and Hiding Toolbars mode. can choose to display or hide the specific toolbars in Manage mode and View You Display To or Hide a Toolbar: In Manage View mode, click View | Toolbars , and then select the toolbar you want to display or hide. or Toolbar Customizing Contents can the following toolbars: You customize Manage mode: In Main toolbar and the File List toolbar. The In View mode: The Bottom toolbar. and You add, remove, and rearrange buttons on these toolbars. You can also display or hide text labels can tool toolbar tips the buttons on these toolbars. All for customization options are in the Customize dialog box. Box: Dialog Customize the To Display of Page 279 334

280 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio one of following: Do the mode, In | Toolbars and then select Customize . click Manage View the click drop- down mode, located to the right of the Main toolbar or File List toolbar, Manage In arrow, or Remove Buttons , and then select Customize . Add select View click the drop- down arrow, located to the right of the Bottom toolbar, select Add mode, In or Buttons and then select Customize . , Remove or Remove Toolbar Buttons: Add To Manage Mode: In toolbar : Main Click the down arrow located on the right side of the Main toolbar. 1. drop- name Add Remove Buttons Select Main Toolbar , then select the or of the button you want to add or 2. | remove. List toolbar : File the With dialog box open, on the Commands tab, drag items from the Commands field to the Customize to buttons. toolbar add Customize remove drag them from the toolbar To the buttons, dialog box. to In View Mode: Bottom toolbar : toolbar. Bottom the of 1. Click the drop- down arrow, located to the right 2. Select or Remove Buttons | Bottom Toolbar , then select the name of the button you want to add Add remove. or Rearrange Buttons: To Toolbar the Customize dialog box With drag buttons to your desired toolbar location. open, To Display or Hide Text Labels Below Toolbar Buttons: 1. Display Customize dialog box. the Click the Toolbars tab. 2. 3. In Manage mode: Select File List Toolbar or Main Toolbar . In View mode: Select Bottom Toolbar . Show 4. Select the text labels checkbox to display text labels, or clear the Show text labels checkbox to hide text labels. Click . 5. Close Display or Hide Tool Tips for Toolbar Buttons: To Display 1. Customize dialog box. the Click the Options tab. 2. 3. Select Show ScreenTips on toolbars to display tool- tips, or clear Show ScreenTips on toolbars to Show hide tips. If you select this option, you can also select tool- shortcut keys in ScreenTips to show keyboard shortcuts in the tool- tips. 4. Click . Close of Page 280 334

281 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Toolbars Resetting discard all of your changes, and return the toolbars can buttons to their default states. You and Reset the Toolbars: To Display the Customize dialog box. 1. Click 2. Toolbars tab, and then click Reset All . the Click to 3. reset the toolbars. Yes Click 4. . Close Customizing Toolbar and Pane Locations You can hide, resize, float, move, and dock most toolbars and panes to suit your preferences. To learn about all the see ways customize your experience in Manage mode, can Using Manage Mode . you Hiding Panes At the top right corner of Manage, View, and Edit mode, you can use the Hide/Unhide buttons to hide and reveal screen. panes the left, right, or bottom of the on Hide/Unhide Left Panels Hide/Unhide Bottom Panels Hide/Unhide Right Panels Edit and View Mode Moving Panes and Toolbars in location. You a pane or toolbar from a docked or floating position to a new move can Some do not activate the Docking toolbars Compass. To Move a Pane or Toolbar: 1. Drag the pane or toolbar's title bar and hold your cursor over any of the arrows of the Docking Compass. the 2. the shaded marquee displays the position of When pane or toolbar you want, release the mouse button. double- 3. pane to its previous location, a click its title bar. return To Move a Docked or Floating Pane or Toolbar: To Do of the following: one Drag the pane or toolbar's tab to a new location. title Drag pane or toolbar's the bar to a new location. on If you use dual monitors, you can move the panes and toolbars to your second monitor to free up space your monitor. main of Page 281 334

282 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Panes and in View and Edit Mode Docking Toolbars select When or toolbar, the Docking Compass activates to help you place the pane precisely. The a you pane hold consists outer and inner ring of arrows. When you an your cursor over any of the Compass Docking of shaded marquee displays the arrows, position of the pane. a potential toolbars not activate the Docking Compass. Some do a or Toolbar: Dock Pane To pane or toolbar's title bar or tab to Drag the Docking Compass. To dock a pane around the outer edge the activate the window, hold your cursor of any of the outer arrows of the Docking Compass, and then release the mouse over button. Panes Resizing resize all the panes and toolbars, whether they are docked or floating. You can a Pane: Resize Docked To your cursor over the edge of the 1. or toolbar until the cursor changes to arrows and lines. Hold pane 2. the edge of the pane or toolbar to the size you want. Drag To a Floating Pane: Resize toolbar your over the edge or corner of Hold pane or cursor and then drag the pane to the size you want. the the resize To folder. You can enlarge the Filmstrip in View and Edit mode to expedite browsing your Filmstrip, drag its edges. one of as tear and move the Drawing and Selections can as well off the ACDSee Actions bar. You Toolbar, a Custom Menu Creating can create a new menu in Manage mode with custom commands for easy access. You can also customize the You name and of your new menu. location Create New Menu: To a Do one of the following: 1. and In click View | Toolbars mode, then select Customize . Manage In Manage mode, click the drop- down arrow located to the right of the Main toolbar or File List toolbar, Add select or Remove Buttons , and then select Customize . 2. In Customize dialog, on the Commands tab, select New Menu from the Categories field. the your In Commands 3. select New Menu and drag it to the desired toolbar location. field, To Add Commands to a New Menu: 1. In the Customize dialog, on the Commands tab, select any option from the Categories field. menu 2. the Commands field, select your command and drag it over to your new In on the toolbar. The new menu will expand down. Drop the command on the menu. New Command: or Menu To Delete a of Page 282 334

283 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Customize dialog be open to delete a new menu or command. The must the Right- or command and choose Delete from the context menu. new click menu New Menu: To Name a a must open dialog name be new menu. Customize The to click the new menu 1. choose Button Appearance... from the context menu. Right- and In Button Appearance dialog, with Text only selected, enter a name in the Button text field. 2. the Press OK . 3. Configuring External Editors can configure ACDSee to work with a variety of image editors, such as Canvas, You specify which image editor and ACDSee by default. You can then open images in any of your external editing applications from within uses . ACDSee configure an external editor before you can assign a shortcut key must it or place it as a button on You to toolbar. the Configure an External Editor in ACDSee : To In mode, 1. click Tools | External Editors | Configure Editors . Manage In box, Configure Photo Editors dialog 2. click Add . the drive Browse 3. folder on your hard to that contains an image editing application. the application. Select Canvas16.exe. example, 4. For the executable file of the editing 5. Click Open . OK the field, type a name for the editor, and In click Name . 6. then Create a Shortcut to an External Editor: To Click the Toolbar drop- down arrow (to the right of the External Editors select item) and 1. Add or menu Remove | Customize . Buttons Category In Customize dialog box, click the Keyboard tab and select External 2. from the the list. Editors 3. a shortcut key into Enter Press New Shortcut Key field. the 4. Click Assign and close the dialog box. shortcut Your new keyboard has been set. To Add External Editor to the FileList Toolbar in Manage Mode: an Editors Click Toolbar drop- down arrow 1. the right of the External the menu option) and select Add or (to Remove Buttons | Customize . 2. In the Customize dialog box, in the Commands tab, select External Editors from the Category list. the 3. drag an External Editor from and list onto the FileList toolbar. Click 4. Close the dialog box. The External Editor is added to the FileList toolbar. in Mode: Toolbar View To Add an External Editor Button to the of Page 283 334

284 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Click the drop- down arrow next to the tools and select Add or Remove Buttons | Customize . Toolbar 1. select the dialog box, in the Commands tab, Customize External Editors from the Category list. In 2. Click and drag an External Editor from the list 3. the toolbar. onto 4. the dialog box. Close External Editor added to the toolbar. is The Your Image Editors: Manage To In the Configure Photo Editors dialog 1. in the Editors list, select the application you want to change. box, 2. Do any of the following: To change the location of the executable file or the name of the application displayed in the Editors list, click . Set the location and name of the application, and then click OK . Edit set for application as the default external editor To ACDSee , click Set As Default . the at specify the application can handle multiple images whether the same time, select or clear To the checkbox in the Supports Multiple Images column. To remove application from the list, click Remove . the and Click to accept your changes 3. return to ACDSee . OK To Open an Image in an External Image Editor: image 1. Manage or View mode, select the In you want to open in the external editor. the of one following: 2. Do or Click Editors | Default External Editor External the name of an editor. | Tools CTRL + ALT + X to open the image in the default external editor. Press Keyboard Shortcuts Customizing are pre- defined keyboard shortcuts for commands pre- you use frequently. You can change There defined that shortcuts, or create keyboard shortcuts for commands that do not currently have shortcuts. The options available the in Customize Shortcut dialog will be mode- specific, depending on which mode you opened the dialog from. To Keyboard Shortcuts: Customize In Manage mode: 1. Do one of the following: . Click View | Toolbars , and then select Customize the Remove down Click or drop- Add arrow, located to the right of the Main toolbar, select Customize Buttons then select Customize , or File List toolbar, and then select and . , In the Customize dialog box, click 2. Keyboard tab. the 3. From the Category drop- down menu, select a top- level menu, such as File, Edit, or View. The commands available from that menu display in the Commands list box. 4. a command in the Commands list box. Select If a keyboard shortcut box. been defined for that command, it displays in the Current Keys has be box will If a keyboard shortcut has not been defined for that command, the Current Keys empty. of Page 284 334

285 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard box, To existing keyboard shortcut, select the keyboard shortcut in the Current Keys an and then 5. remove Remove . click In View and Edit mode: Click Tools | Customize Shortcuts 1. . 2. the Category drop- down menu, select a top- level menu, such as File, From or View. The commands Edit, available that menu display from the Commands list box. in 3. Select a command in the Commands list box. command, If shortcut has been defined for that keyboard it displays in the Current Keys box. a If a keyboard shortcut has not been defined for that command, the Current Keys box will be empty. Keys To an existing keyboard shortcut, select the keyboard shortcut in the Current remove box, and then click Remove . To Define a New Keyboard Shortcut: text key shortcut box. 1. Click in the Enter a new want 2. keys on your keyboard that you the to use for the keyboard shortcut. Press The keys display in the Enter a new shortcut key text box. The Currently assigned to field will display the if function shortcut is assigned to, entered applicable. your 3. Click Assign . The new keyboard shortcut displays in the Current Keys box. 4. Click Close . keyboard To remove all custom default shortcuts and restore the keyboard shortcuts, click Reset All . Changing the Theme Display color ACDSee can change the display theme to change In background you of the panes and toolbars. the To Change the Display Theme: 1. In Manage mode, click Tools | Options . 2. the Options dialog box, click Manage Mode . In theme. In the Display theme drop- down list, select a 3. return . ACDSee to 4. Click OK to apply your changes and of Page 285 334

286 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 11: Chapter Shortcuts Manage Mode Keyboard Shortcuts that shortcuts mode. be You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while working in Manage can There are also used specifically in the Calendar pane . To select and Print... click print this page for easy reference, right- of Page 286 334

287 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Shortcut Has Result This This Closes ACDSee . F4 + ALT + W CTRL O Opens ALT Options dialog box. + the Opens the Help file. F1 Opens the selected item in View mode. ENTER Deletes the selected items. DELETE Manage Mode Using Tags or \ the image . (backslash) untags (grave accent) Toggles image audio ` or off. on ALT 0 to 5 Assigns + color label to the currently a selected item. Press ALT + 0 to remove a color label. to + the selected items Adds the Burn Basket. ALT B + C Copies one or more selected ALT to a folder files you specify. tab + Opens the ALT COMMA in the Properties previous pane. ALT + PERIOD Opens the next tab in the Properties pane. ALT ENTER Opens or closes the Properties pane. + ALT + G Opens the Import dialog box. Filters ALT I Opens the + dialog box where you can in displayed File the specify the types of files List pane. the K the cursor + Places Keyword section of ALT in IPTC group in the Metadata tab of the the pane. Properties + M Moves one or more ALT files to a folder selected you specify. ALT + Q Removes currently displayed item from the Burn Basket. + SHIFT + F ALT the File List pane. Maximizes F2 Renames one or more selected files. ALT + W Restores your desktop wallpaper to the applied settings you were using before you an wallpaper. ACDSee from ALT Removes currently displayed item X the + Image Basket . BACKSPACE Moves up one level in the current drive's folder structure. CTRL + 0 to 5 Assigns a rating to the currently selected CTRL item. Press to + 0 remove a rating. CTRL \ (backslash) Selects the tagged images . + CTRL + A Selects the entire contents of the current folder. . + B Adds the CTRL items to the Image Basket selected in Edit image CTRL + E Opens the currently selected mode. of Page 287 334

288 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo text a as listing CTRL document. G Generates a file + 334 of 288 Page

289 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo current the in images folder. + I Selects all CTRL 334 of 289 Page

290 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo dialog Caption Edit the CTRL box. ALT + D Opens + 334 of 290 Page

291 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio + K the cursor in the Keywords field of the CTRL Places in Organize pane. the tab Properties Creates pane. new folder in the File List N CTRL + a box, Opens Open Files dialog the in which + CTRL O select one or more images to open you can in mode. View P + currently selected image or Opens the CTRL ACDSee Print utility. the images in CTRL Moves the focus of the Manage mode window + TAB the currently displayed panes. between + CTRL Cuts the currently selected items to the X Clipboard. + C CTRL Clipboard. Copies the selected items to the INSERT + CTRL V Pastes CTRL the + the contents of Clipboard. INSERT SHIFT + Manage mode. Refreshes F5 Opens the Search pane. F3 + ALT + E CTRL the Export dialog box. Opens F4 the Contents bar drop- down list. Displays Changes File List to Thumbs+Details F6 the view. Changes the File List F7 Filmstrip view. to F8 Changes the File List to Thumbnails view. Tiles to List Changes F9 view. the File F10 Changes File List to Icons view. the Changes File List to List view. F11 the Changes the File List to F12 view. Details SHIFT DELETE Removes the selected + from your hard item drive. SHIFT + F5 Refreshes the File List pane. of SHIFT Moves the focus TAB the Manage mode window + to the previous pane or tool in sequence. TAB the focus of the Manage mode window Moves to the next pane or tool in sequence. + CTRL the ALT + R Opens selected images in the Compare Images viewer. as + W Sets the selected image + a stretched CTRL ALT wallpaper. desktop CTRL ALT + X Opens the current image in the default + external editor. CTRL + RIGHT CLICK Opens Windows Explorer context menu. or CTRL + 1 Opens SHIFT closes the Folders pane. + CTRL + SHIFT + 2 Opens or closes the Catalog pane. Opens CTRL SHIFT + 3 + or closes the Search pane. the pane. closes Calendar CTRL + SHIFT + 4 Opens or of Page 291 334

292 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio + SHIFT 5 Opens or closes the Image Basket . CTRL + SHIFT CTRL Selects all files in the current folder. + + A the + Shows or hides B status bar. + CTRL SHIFT SHIFT + C Copies the currently selected image to the CTRL + Clipboard. + + D Clears your current selection. CTRL SHIFT system SHIFT E Opens the + file in the default + CTRL current or opens a dialog box where you application select can application. an CTRL SHIFT + F Toggles the full- screen view for the File List + pane. CTRL + I Inverts your current selection. + SHIFT the SHIFT L Opens or closes + Selective Browsing CTRL + panel. + SHIFT + M Opens or closes the Map CTRL pane. Opens a second instance of the ACDSee N CTRL SHIFT + + program. the CTRL + O Opens the file using + system application SHIFT associated with its file extension. + Main mode Manage CTRL + SHIFT the T Displays or hides toolbar. CTRL + TAB Moves the focus SHIFT the Manage mode window + of the currently displayed panes. between image + + W Sets the selected SHIFT as a tiled desktop CTRL wallpaper. CTRL + SHIFT + ALT + W Sets the selected image as a centered desktop wallpaper. Viewing ALT + LEFT ARROW Returns to the previous folder you browsed in the File List pane. back ALT + RIGHT ARROW Returns to the folder you last moved from in pane. List the File the CTRL a slideshow from Creates currently S + images. selected + or + P Opens CTRL closes the Preview pane. SHIFT Batch Editing CTRL + R Opens the Batch Resize Images dialog box. T CTRL + Opens the Batch Adjust Time Stamp dialog box. CTRL F Opens the + Convert File Format dialog Batch box. CTRL + J Opens the Batch Rotate/Flip Images dialog box. box. dialog CTRL + L Opens the Batch Adjust Exposure Mode Switching of Page 292 334

293 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio + F2 to Photos mode. CTRL Switches F3 the image in View mode. + CTRL Opens F5 Opens the image in Edit mode. CTRL + + F6 to 365 mode. CTRL Switches F7 to + Dashboard mode. Switches CTRL Mouse Shortcuts Mode Manage can use the following You shortcuts in Manage mode. mouse To this page for easy reference, right- click and select Print... print Resulting Shortcut Action click Opens the selected image in View mode. Double- click the Right- Manage mode context menu. Opens SHIFT click Selects a group of images . + click not screen, the Click + drag Selects a group of images . Be sure to of on a blank area you on folder, before you drag, so or can draw a selection box image an the group of images . around + images Selects CTRL you click on. click + CTRL click Opens the Windows Explorer context menu. right CTRL + Wheel up Increases the magnification of the thumbnail (zooms in). CTRL + Wheel down Decreases the magnification of the thumbnail (zooms out). View Keyboard Shortcuts Mode You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while working in View mode. reference, To this page for easy print right- click and select Print... Customizing . Shortcuts Keyboard If you would like to define your own keyboard shortcuts, see of Page 293 334

294 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Resulting Action Shortcut F4 Closes ACDSee . ALT + + W CTRL accent) Toggles the display of the ` file path in the Status bar. (grave full Switches to the previous mode. ENTER ESC + ESC Minimizes ACDSee in View and Edit SHIFT mode. ALT O Opens the Options dialog box. + Opens Help file. the F1 File Menu + O the Opens CTRL Open files dialog box. INSERT SHIFT F4 Closes the current item. + CTRL SHIFT + F4 Closes all images. + CTRL + S Opens the Save Image As dialog box, in which you can save your image with different name or file format. a system + Opens SHIFT file using the L application associated with its file the extension. SHIFT + E Opens the current file in the default system application or opens a dialog where you can select an application. box CTRL + P Opens the current image in the ACDSee Print utility. selected CTRL SHIFT + P Prints all currently + images, or all images in the current folder. Facebook box. dialog Uploader ALT + F Opens the ALT + the Flickr Uploader dialog box. L Opens U box. the SmugMug Uploader dialog + ALT Opens box. Z the Zenfolio Uploader dialog + ALT Opens the Interface Customizing + SHIFT + H Toggles the Histogram open and closed. CTRL + SHIFT + M Toggles the Magnifying Glass pane open and closed. CTRL + in (plus) Zooms CTRL on the Magnifying Glass pane. + on CTRL (minus) Zooms out - the Magnifying Glass pane. + CTRL + SHIFT + S Toggles the Navigator open and closed. Properties ALT + ENTER Toggles the pane open and closed. ALT + , to the tab to the left on the Properties pane. Switches . to to the tab ALT + the right on the Properties pane. Switches the + + F Toggles SHIFT Filmstrip open and closed. CTRL CTRL + SHIFT + I Toggles the Info palette open and closed. the T closed. and open Toggles Toolbar + T + SHIFT CTRL closed. and open bar Status the Toggles B B + SHIFT + CTRL page for multi- images. CTRL + SHIFT + V Toggles the Page View panel open and closed of Page 294 334

295 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Managing CTRL Cuts the current item to the Clipboard. + X C Copies currently displayed file to the Clipboard. CTRL + the Pastes the contents of the Clipboard. + CTRL V C Opens the Copy To Folder dialog box. ALT + M the + Move To Folder dialog box. ALT Opens the image. DELETE selected Deletes F2 dialog Opens the Rename File box. R ALT + Adds the selected B to the Image Basket. CTRL + image + X Removes the selected image ALT the Image Basket. from ALT B Adds currently displayed item to the Image Basket in Manage mode. + + Q the selected image from the Burn Basket. ALT Removes A Opens the Add Shortcut dialog box. ALT + + ALT + D Opens the Edit Caption dialog box. CTRL (back slash) Tags or untags the image . \ + dialog Opens the Manage Metadata Presets CTRL box. M + Clears CTRL the rating. 0 + CTRL Assigns a rating of 1. 1 2. of rating a CTRL + 2 Assigns CTRL + a rating of 3. 3 Assigns 4 a rating of 4. + Assigns CTRL 5 Assigns a CTRL of 5. + rating + 0 Clears the color label. ALT + 1 Assigns a red color label. ALT + 2 Assigns a yellow color label. ALT + Assigns a green color label. ALT 3 + 4 Assigns a ALT color label. blue ALT + 5 Assigns a purple color label. CTRL + K Opens the Keywords section of the Properties pane. + ALT K Opens the Metadata tab of the Properties pane. CTRL + + SHIFT centered. wallpaper, Sets the selected image as the desktop W ALT + + SHIFT + W Sets CTRL selected image as the desktop wallpaper, tiled. the CTRL + ALT + W Sets the selected image as the desktop wallpaper, stretched. you ALT W Restores your desktop wallpaper to the settings + were using before you applied an ACDSee wallpaper. Viewing . image the next PAGE ARROW Displays RIGHT PAGE DOWN 3 (numeric keypad) SPACEBAR of Page 295 334

296 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard . ARROW PAGE image previous the Displays LEFT PAGE UP (numeric 9 keypad) BACKSPACE to Switches last image in the Filmstrip. END the Switches to the first image in the HOME Filmstrip. CTRL Right- click Opens the Windows Explorer context menu. + (plus) in. + Zooms (minus) Zooms out. - + SHIFT Zooms in to the area you select. Z / (forward slash) Zooms the image to its actual size. * (numeric keypad area. viewing the Fits the image to asterisk) 8 SHIFT + + PAGE ARROW area. ALT image width to the display Fits RIGHT ALT + PAGE DOWN Fits image height to the display area. and ALT Toggles the zoom lock on \ off. + L Toggles the pan lock. Z Opens the Set Zoom Level dialog box. PAGE ARROW Pans right when zoomed into the image. RIGHT image. the into zoomed PAGE ARROW LEFT Pans left when PAGE DOWN down when zoomed into the image. Pans UP up when zoomed into the image. PAGE Pans Toggles full screen mode. F right + closed. and Toggles the PAGE pane open CTRL RIGHT ARROW CTRL + PAGE closed. and Toggles the bottom pane open DOWN ARROW O Displays saved version of the image. E Toggles the exposure warning on and off. R Toggles the RAW decode/embedded preview on and off. + SHIFT Activates F1 the Hand tool after zooming in with the Zoom tool. SHIFT + Activates the Select tool. F2 + the Clears CTRL current selection. Q F3 Activates the Zoom tool. SHIFT+ F5 Refreshes the View mode window and reloads the current image. 1 the Auto Lens to None. Sets 2 Sets the Auto Lens to Black & White. 3 the Auto Lens to Orton. Sets Lomo. Sets the Auto Lens to 4 Auto Lens Sepia. to 5 Sets the of Page 296 334

297 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Toggles the EQ button on and off. 6 Light S ALT to the next image every 1 to 2 seconds. Automatically + advances + S Launches the slideshow. CTRL + ALT A or hides headers and footers. + CTRL Displays SHIFT + Q Opens the View Header/Footer dialog box, in CTRL you can specify + which text display on your images in View mode. the to CTRL + Advance Starts or stops the Auto + slideshow. ALT S page PAGE + Advances to the next SHIFT of a multi- page image. ARROW DOWN + PAGE image. page Switches to the SHIFT page of a multi- previous UP ARROW + SHIFT the first page of a multi- page image. HOME Switches to multi- END the last page of a to page image. SHIFT + Switches Editing SHIFT + CTRL + counterclockwise. Rotates the current image 90° PAGE LEFT ARROW SHIFT + + CTRL Rotates the current image 90° clockwise. ARROW PAGE RIGHT ALT E Opens the image in the default editor. + + original Restores an edited image to the SHIFT version. O + the Commits SHIFT changes. S Convert + CTRL the Batch F File Format dialog box. Opens Rotate/Flip J box. dialog CTRL + Images Opens the Batch CTRL + Opens the Batch Resize Images dialog box. R + Opens the Batch Adjust Exposure dialog box. CTRL L + T Opens the Batch Adjust CTRL Stamp dialog box. Time CTRL ALT + R Opens + Batch Rename dialog box. the CTRL + SHIFT + 1 Changes the image color depth to Black and White. image CTRL + 2 Changes the SHIFT color depth to 16 grays. + CTRL + SHIFT + 3 Changes the image color depth to 256 grays. image CTRL SHIFT + 4 Changes the + color depth to 16 colors. + CTRL + SHIFT 5 Changes the image color depth to 256 colors. CTRL + + 6 Changes the image color depth to Hicolor. SHIFT + color + 7 Changes the image CTRL depth to Truecolor. SHIFT to + + 8 Converts the image CTRL a 16- bit grayscale palette. SHIFT CTRL + SHIFT + 9 Converts the image to a 48- bit color palette. Mode Switching selected + Opens the CTRL F5 image in Edit mode. currently CTRL + F1 Switches to Manage mode. CTRL F2 Switches to Photos mode. + mode. + F6 Switches to 365 CTRL Switches to mode. Dashboard CTRL + F7 of Page 297 334

298 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Mode Mouse View Shortcuts use You mouse shortcuts while working in View mode. the can following page select easy reference, right- click and this Print... To print for Action Resulting Shortcut to mode and returns Double- the previous mode. Closes View click Opens the View mode Right- menu. click context click full screen mode (on 3- button mouse). Middle Toggles Toggles screen mode. click Wheel full Displays the previous item. Wheel up Displays next down item. Wheel the Right- click + the Windows Explorer context menu. CTRL Opens + Wheel CTRL Increases the magnification of the image (zooms in) . up CTRL Wheel down Decreases the magnification of the image (zooms out) . + + Wheel Displays the previous page of a multiple- page image. SHIFT up of + Displays the next page down a multiple- page image. SHIFT Wheel Pane Shortcuts Calendar you the familiar with Once basic calendar pane options, consider using the following shortcuts: are display the bar Click a year, month, or day table to title all available images for that year, month, or day. on years, adjacent from select Right- click the title bar on a year, month, or day table to scroll through and months, or days. in Year double- click any month to switch to Month view. In view Month view, double- click any date to Or, switch to Day view. In Month view click the letter indicating a day of the week to display all available images for that day of the all week. click F to select example, Fridays in that month. For In Day view click AM or PM to select the first or second half of a day. key In Event view press and hold the CTRL to and click any month or day display all available images for those months days. or on month. title of any month calendar, to select all the photos in that Click the the Click of the week, to select all name photos in those weeks of the month. the Drag and select any days in the calendar to select all the photos in those days. Edit Mode Shortcuts Keyboard the following Use shortcuts in Edit mode. keyboard Print... print this page for easy reference, right- click and select To . Customizing Shortcuts Keyboard If you would like to define your own keyboard shortcuts, see of Page 298 334

299 ACDSee Studio Standard 2018 Photo Keyboard Shortcuts Mode Edit 334 of Page 299

300 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Resulting Action Shortcut F4 Closes ALT in all modes. + ACDSee + ESC Minimizes SHIFT in View and Edit mode. ACDSee ALT + O Opens the Options dialog box. F1 Opens the Help file. full ` Toggles the display of the accent) file path in the Status (grave bar. File Menu PAGE ARROW RIGHT next the image. Opens DOWN PAGE keypad) (numeric 3 Opens image. previous the PAGE ARROW LEFT PAGE UP (numeric keypad) 9 S the image. CTRL Saves + ALT CTRL S Saves a copy. + + CTRL ALT + E Opens the Export dialog. + END Switches to the last image in the Filmstrip. in image Switches Filmstrip. HOME the to the first mode. Switches to the previous ESC ENTER Edit Menu Redo. CTRL + Y + Undo. Z CTRL Z Undo + SHIFT + CTRL all. CTRL + C Copy. Paste. + V CTRL DELETE Delete. Managing 300 334 of Page

301 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio + 0 the color label. ALT Clears 1 ALT red color label. Assigns + a Assigns label. yellow color 2 ALT + a 3 a green color label. + ALT Assigns 4 Assigns a ALT color label. + blue + Assigns a purple color label. ALT 5 0 the + rating. CTRL Clears 1 + a rating of 1. CTRL Assigns + 2 Assigns a CTRL of 2. rating CTRL 3 Assigns a rating of 3. + + 4 a rating of 4. CTRL Assigns + Assigns a rating of 5. CTRL 5 + K Opens the Keywords section of the Properties pane. CTRL ALT + Opens the Metadata tab of the Properties pane. K (back Tags \ the photo. slash) + M CTRL the Manage Metadata Presets dialog box. Opens dialog Caption Edit ALT CTRL + box. + D Opens the Viewing CTRL PAGE ARROW RIGHT Toggles the right pane open and closed. + left + ARROW LEFT Toggles the PAGE pane open and closed. CTRL CTRL + PAGE ARROW DOWN Toggles the bottom pane open and closed. / Zooms the image to its actual size. slash) (forward area. 8 SHIFT Fits the image to the viewing + asterisk) * (numeric keypad + (plus) Zooms in. - out. (minus) Zoomed F image full screen. the Displays Toggles Navigator open and closed when zoomed ' the image. into Displays saved version of the image. Z RIGHT ARROW zoomed Pans right when PAGE into the image. image. PAGE LEFT Pans left when zoomed into the ARROW PAGE DOWN Pans down when zoomed into the image. image. PAGE UP Pans up when zoomed into the the Customizing Interface of Page 301 334

302 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Toggles the Menu open and closed. F2 Filter F4 the Properties pane open and closed. Toggles ENTER + ALT Filmstrip open and closed. the F5 Toggles the Info palette open and F6 Toggles closed. closed. F7 and open Toggles the Histogram H CTRL + SHIFT + the Toggles pane open and closed. F10 Colors + F1 Toggles the Toolbar open and closed. ALT ALT + Toggles the Filters toolbar open and closed. F2 Selecting ALT Selects all. + A D + ALT Deselects. ALT + I Inverts selection. + SHIFT + S Saves the selection. ALT + L + ALT Opens the Load Selection dialog box. SHIFT box + + M ALT the Manage Selections dialog SHIFT Opens Filters Y Opens the Red Eye Reduction tool. Repair the Opens P ALT + tool. X Opens tool. the Text B ALT Border tool. Opens + the Vignette tool. Opens V the S ALT the Special Effects panel. + Opens Opens the Tilt- Shift tool. T + R Opens the Rotate tool. ALT + ALT the Flip tool. F Opens the Crop tool. C Opens Opens the Resize tool. J + X Opens the ALT tool. Exposure L Opens the Levels tool. ALT + Opens the Auto Levels tool. L Opens Tones Curves tool. U the Opens the Light Q tool. EQ A Opens the White Balance tool. ALT + H Opens the Color Balance tool. ALT N Opens the Sharpen tool. + ALT + U Opens the Blur tool. N Opens the Noise Reduction tool. Clarity ALT + C Opens the tool. Inside Working Filters of Page 302 334

303 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Toggles Brush open and closed. B controls the working stroke display when Toggles S brush filter. a inside Toggles Gradient controls open and closed. G Toggles Radial Gradient controls open and R closed. SPACEBAR to the Hand tool when working with the Switches or filter. inside a Brush Gradients off Toggles exposure E on and the in the warning Exposure tool. Tools CTRL + Q Activates the Hand tool. CTRL + + R Activates the Rectangle tool. SHIFT + Activates + E CTRL the Elliptical tool. SHIFT CTRL SHIFT + L Activates the Line tool. + CTRL + A Activates the Arrow tool. CTRL SHIFT + P Activates the Polygon tool. + CTRL + SHIFT + B Activates the Curve tool. B the Brush tool. Activates CTRL tool. F Activates the Fill + Gradient the Activates tool. CTRL + G CTRL + + I Activates the Eyedropper tool. SHIFT Tools Color + [ Opens the Foreground Color dialog box. CTRL + ] Opens the Background Color dialog box. CTRL CTRL + X Switches the foreground and background color. Selection Tools CTRL + R Activates the Rectangle Selection tool. CTRL + I Activates the Ellipse Selection tool. CTRL + L Activates the Lasso Selection tool. the CTRL + W Activates Magic Wand Selection tool. Mode Switching + Switches to Manage mode. CTRL F1 + F2 Switches to CTRL mode. Photos CTRL + F3 Opens the image in View mode. CTRL + F6 Switches to 365 mode. mode. CTRL Switches to Dashboard F7 + Edit Mode Mouse Shortcuts Use adjustments. following mouse shortcuts in Edit mode to make quick image the and Print... select click To print this page for easy reference, right- of Page 303 334

304 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Resulting Action Shortcut the click off the auto- collapse SHIFT in Turns pane as you open groups. + feature + mouse wheel Makes large adjustments to the sliders. SHIFT Right- click any slider to its default value. Resets your wheel slider Makes fine adjustments Mouse a slider. Place over cursor over the slider and scroll to up or down. Place to down or Mouse wheel over image Adjusts brush size. up your cursor over the image and scroll adjust width. nib + mouse wheel Adjusts feathering. Place your cursor the SHIFT image and scroll up or down to over adjust feathering. 365 Mode Keyboard Shortcuts following Use the keyboard shortcuts in the Transfer mode. reference, To this page for easy print right- click and select Print... Shortcuts Customizing Keyboard . If you would like to define your own keyboard shortcuts, see of Page 304 334

305 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio Resulting Action Shortcut A + folder as an Upsync folder. Sets ALT selected Downloads files and folders. D selected ALT + Displays Properties pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode. ALT + ENTER lower + forward files and folders in the Group screen of Transfer mode. Num + ALT Num - Group backward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode. ALT + + Displays Options dialog. ALT O U selected files and folders. + Uploads ALT X Removes files from ALT image basket. + the + SHIFT + U Upsyncs all files. ALT + \ Selects CTRL files. tagged CTRL A Selects all files and folders. + + F8 the view in the upper screen in Transfer mode to thumbnail view of CTRL Changes your in account. images F12 Changes the view in the upper CTRL in Transfer mode to a detailed view of + screen in your account. images + SHIFT + D Clears image selection. CTRL + + I Inverts image selection. CTRL SHIFT + SHIFT + 1 Displays Folders pane in the lower screen CTRL Transfer mode. of CTRL SHIFT + 2 Displays Catalog pane + the lower screen of Transfer mode. in screen the mode. Transfer CTRL + SHIFT + 3 Displays Search pane in of lower CTRL + + 4 Displays Calendar pane in the lower screen of Transfer mode. SHIFT + + 5 Displays the image basket. CTRL SHIFT + W Closes ACDSee. CTRL Deletes or DELETE folders. files mode. Opens selected item ENTER View the in F2 Renames files and folders. F5 Refreshes the view. in F6 and details of folders and files thumbnails the lower screen of Displays Transfer mode. F7 Displays filmstrip view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode. in Displays thumbnails of folders and files F8 the lower screen of Transfer mode. of F9 Displays tile view files folders and in the lower screen of Transfer mode. F10 Displays view of folders and file types in the lower screen of Transfer icon mode. types a list of folder and file F11 in the lower screen of Transfer mode. Displays F12 Displays a detailed view of folders and files in the lower screen of Transfer mode. Num Sort forward files and folders + the lower screen of Transfer mode. in Num - Sort backward files and folders in the lower screen of Transfer mode. mode. SHIFT ALT + A Displays 365.acdsee.com + SHIFT + ALT + C Copies URL. mode. T Transfer Displays SHIFT + ALT + of Page 305 334

306 ACDSee Studio 2018 Photo Standard Mode Shortcuts 365 Mouse the following Use shortcuts in Transfer mode. mouse To print this page for easy reference, right- click and select Print... Shortcut Action Resulting Click + drag Selects a group of images. CTRL + click Selects images you click on. a images. of group SHIFT + click Selects Keyboard Shortcuts PicaView ACDSee use can following the You shortcut with ACDSee PicaView. Result This Shortcut Has This you have SHIFT + right- click an the If in display Display Image enabled : The image will not image main context menu. Display the If you have main Image disabled : The image will display in menu. context of Page 306 334

307 ACDSee Photo Standard 2018 Studio 12: File Chapter Formats Files About RAW that is a negative. RAW files contain all of RAW data like was collected by your digital camera's sensor file A the took a photo. If when tried to view a RAW file without processing, it would appear almost completely black. you you is necessary to process your RAW therefore to produce a photo. It files ACDSee, you can view RAW files In the embedded thumbnail image created by your camera. If you want to using process images, you must use a photo editing program such as ACDSee, which includes tools for developing RAW images. RAW will automatically apply geometry corrections to DNG files that include geometric distortion ACDSee generate tags. files correction from the Adobe DNG Converter© will often DNG geometric created distortion tags for micro 4/3rds cameras. Associating Files default work opening for ACDSee can application with a large number of file formats. ACDSee can be set as the you certain This process is called associating files. When types. associate file types, you set ACDSee as the file default program to open these kinds of files when you double- click them. To File Association Options in ACDSee : Set 1. Click Tools | File Association Settings . like 2. In the four format sections, select the checkboxes of the file formats you would to associate with ACDSee for formats, RAW formats, media formats, and archive formats. image 3. Click . Save Disassociate a To Type with ACDSee : File 1. Click Tools | File Association Settings . like 2. the four format sections, deselect the checkboxes of the file formats you would In to disassociate with formats, ACDSee image formats, RAW for media formats, and archive formats. 3. Save Click . of Page 307 334

308 Glossary

309 A Absolute Colorimetric intent, generally for proofing. Based on a device- independent color space, reproducing colors within the available Rendering used and of colors outside of the gamut to the nearest reproducible hue (at the expense perfectly, saturation). gamut reducing Actions ACDSee Actions, record Edit mode adjustments. You can then apply them to other images ACDSee "playing" them back. This is an efficient Actions by to batch editing. method Acquire used term to describe the process of locating images on peripheral devices (such as scanners and digital cameras) and Often the adding images your hard drive. Can also refer to taking screen captures. See import . to Album shortcuts often organized by theme or event. In ACDSee , albums contain images, to where the images are stored on your Collection of drive. hard Aliasing edges caused by pixels. Occurs most often Jagged low resolution images or images that have been enlarged. See jaggies . in Anchor a of an object such as a selection Method fixing screen, page, or image location. to Antialiasing, Anti- Aliasing Software technique for reducing jagged lines, or ‘jaggies’. Uses shades of gray and color to smooth out the contrast between adjacent pixels. Aspect Ratio 3:1 image’s height ratio. For example, an image with an aspect ratio of to- has a width 3 times larger than its height. An width- Azimuth of shadows that extend from the edges of image details. In ACDSee you can control azimuth when applying the Angle effect to an Emboss image. B Background Processing programs that function Tasks user interaction. or without Bandwidth of data that can be sent through Amount network connection in a fixed amount of time. Bandwidth is measured in kilobits per second a (Kbps). Barrel Distortion In barrel distortion the photo appears to bulge outwards from the center. Batch Editing be operation tool, such as resizing, converting, or renaming, that Any or used to adjust multiple images or files simultaneously. can Bit Bits are small units of computer memory. The color depth of your image is constrained by the number of bits available to store color RGB information. example, it is possible to store 256 different color values per color channel in 8- bit For images. Similarly, it is possible per to 65,536 different color values store color channel in 18- bit images.

310 Blackpoint An darkest area. You can control the intensity of the black in an image by adjusting its blackpoint. image’s Modes Blend change the effect of a tool or the appearance of a selected object. Filters that Brightness intensity an image. You can make an image appear brighter or darker by adjusting Light brightness. its of Brush want you can A in Edit mode to isolate or indicate pixels you that to apply effects or adjustments to. The Brush in Drawing Tools tool use be used to draw in color on your image. can C Cache speed storage mechanism. The ACDSee Database is a cache. High- Caption printed a file, or a comment or description added to a with image. Text associated Cataloging Adding file information to the ACDSee database. Category categories to photos to help sort and manage them more Assign easily. Chromatic Aberration high lens can result in fringes in that contrast areas of some photos. A artifact CMYK (key) Color uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black that as its primary colors. model Color Cast Changes the hue of an image while keeping the saturation and brightness intact. For example, many digital cameras produce pictures with a blue color cast. ACDSee includes a tool that removes an unwanted color cast. slightly Channel Color Value all pixel information for a single color. A grayscale image has one channel, while an RGB image has three channels. You can Contains adjust RGB when editing a color. values Gamut Color of colors that a device such as a Range or monitor can produce or display. printer Color Management Process of adjusting your computer settings so that the color output from your printer matches the colors you see on your monitor. Color Space dependent. are types of color spaces: device- independent or There two A device- independent color space, such as RGB, device- describes all possible colors. A device- dependent color space describes the subset of colors (from the device- independent color space) devices that particular device can reproduce. Device- dependent color spaces are used to map colors between a (for example, from a that monitor a printer) to ensure to colors are reproduced accurately. Compression

311 Process that data to a storage format requiring less space than the original data. converts Sheet Contact digital page that contains a series of small images, usually in a grid format. Physical or Contrast of image’s color and brightness differences. Measure an Convert file from one format to another. For example, you might convert a Change from a bitmap (.bmp) to a JPEG (.jpg) to reduce the file a file size. Cropping Removing unwanted image areas. D Database filing system that provides fast access to stored data. The ACDSee Database contains two parts: a cached thumbnail file and Electronic information an The cached thumbnail file contains small copies (thumbnails) of the images on your system. The information file file. dates, details files on your system, such as descriptions, the authors, notes, keywords, and categories. contains about Date Database that you apply to the properties of a file and save in Date ACDSee Database. the Descriptions and stores in a hidden file named descript.ion. Descriptions such as file ACDSee descriptions captions for an image will be name included in the descript.ion files. Dock Attaching a toolbar, window, or pane to different screen areas. DPI (dots inch) per dots of resolution. For example, 92 DPI means 92 dots horizontally and 92 dots vertically, which equals 8,464 image’s Measurement an square More dots per inch result in inch. resolution and image quality. per higher Range Dynamic dynamic range of an The is directly related to the dynamic range of your digital camera's sensor. If your digital camera's sensor image has large dynamic range it can capture the darkest shadows a brightest highlights at the same time, without clipping the shadows and or highlights. (RAW images preserve the dynamic range of your digital camera's sensor.) Adjusting the tonal range of the image on changes dynamic range of the image is represented the a monitor or in a photo. how E Elevation Height of an imaginary light source over an image. The elevation of the light source works in conjunction with azimuth to generate a three- dimensional effect. emboss Encode Writing (or a file format. saving) Encryption Method of converting data into a secure format. You need a digital password or key to read an encrypted file. EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)

312 Standard for information, primarily with images that use JPEG compression. Most digital cameras create EXIF information and storing it in image file. For example, EXIF information can include details about shutter speed and whether a flash was used. embed the Export data one application to another. The exporting application places the from in a format that the other application Moving data understands. Exposure is the amount of time that your digital camera's sensor is exposed Exposure light. to F Feather Softening to blend them into the background. image edges Listing File files a report of the ACDSee currently displayed in Manage mode. In , Format File file for information in a file. Each type of file has a different encoding format that specifies how it organizes the information it Medium contains. Filter Program that can apply an effect to an image, such as an embossed appearance or a sepia tone. Fisheye Distortion if fisheye photo appears to bulge outwards from the center, as the the photo were wrapped around a sphere. In distortion, G Gamma of color values a monitor, Range or printer can display. Adjusting this value increases or decreases the intensity of the light scanner, spectrum. Image Grayscale composed of different Image of gray. shades H Highlights Highlights are the brightest or whitest parts of an image. Histogram A is a graph that displays the dynamic histogram of shadows and highlights in an image. range HSL An acronym for hue, saturation, and lightness. Hue color in an image. Predominant I Image Editor Program that you editor. use to create and edit images. ACDSee is an image can

313 Image Resolution of image and colors. Also used to describe the quality of monitors and printer output. Quality details Viewer Image Program images. ACDSee is an image viewer. displays that Import format an Bringing from another using a into that the receiving application understands. data application Interpolation that uses nearby pixels to estimate the color of new pixels added to the larger image. For example, Process might be used interpolation when a digital image. enlarging IPTC descriptive encoding information within image files so that items such as of comments and copyright information can Standard method transmitted with the image. be K J- Jaggies Individual displayed in an image with low resolution. The appearance of pixels pixels an image causes lines and curves to appear in jagged. L Lens Vignetting Unusual darkness in the corners of images as a result of an inability of the lens to distribute light into the corners of the image. Lossless Compression quality. of retains all image data and that Form compression Rotation and Flipping Lossless of a JPEG image without loss of image quality. This works best on images with Rotation that are a multiple of 8 or 16. dimensions Lossy Compression data of that attempts to remove unnecessary Form This compression loss can affect image quality. data. M Marquee Dashed- line frame that identifies a selected portion of an image. Depending on the tool, you can resize or move a marquee with or without the underlying image. changing Metadata Information about an image and how it was taken. For example, the metadata of digital camera images can contain the date and time the whether picture taken, the shutter speed, the exposure settings of the camera, and was a flash was used. Monochrome Image Image containing a single color. N Noise

314 Effect produced a variety of pixel colors are used in the same color region. Noise often occurs in images with high ISO setting or when shutter speed. slow O Opacity produces an effect is when applied to an image or a selection. High Determines how a more solid effect, while low opacity visible opacity in a nearly invisible effect. results Overexposed that are overexposed have too many highlights, and tend to look faded. You typically overexpose images by exposing your digital Images sensor light for too long. camera's to P- Q Panning zoomed images vertically, horizontally, and diagonally across the display area to view specific areas of the image. Moving Perceptual Rendering that scales all of the colors within one gamut to fit within another gamut. Best used for photographic images, as it intent maintains the between the colors more accurately than the colors themselves. relationship Photo Album album See . Photo Editor See editor . image Pincushion Distortion In pincushion distortion the photo appears to shrink inwards toward the center. Pixel (PICture ELement) visible portion a digital image, arranged in rows and columns. Smallest of in Plug- larger adds functionality to a Software program. that module (pixels per inch) PPI of how an image is displayed. More pixels per Measurement result in higher image quality. inch Presets settings preset image correction settings. You can create and use presets to ensure A contains you apply are the same and that consistent across all images. Primary Colors Colors that can produce other colors when blended. For example, in the RGB color model, red, green, and blue are primary colors. R Image Raster Image composed of a rectangular grid of pixels. Each pixel contains a defined value about its color, size, and location in the image. As a result, the image can affect its quality. resizing Rating Assign ratings (1, 2, easily. 4, 5) to photos to help sort and manage them more 3,

315 RAW An file format. RAW files contain all of the image data that was captured by your digital camera's sensor. RAW files are not image by your instead, you must process RAW images using a photo editing program such as ACDSee . processed camera; Recursive or can repeat itself indefinitely, such that a slideshow. task Program as Eye Red occurs when the light from your digital camera's Red reflects off the retinas in the subject's eyes. The subject's eyes look red eye flash of their normal color. instead Relative Colorimetric intent that maps the colors that fall exactly within the color gamuts of both the Rendering and output devices. Best used for single- input or color images as colors outside of both gamuts may be mapped to a single color. limited- Render Drawing to your screen. images Rendering Intent used to map colors from one color gamut to another. There are four rendering intents available: Perceptual , Relative Approach , Colorimetric , and Absolute Colorimetric . Saturation Resolution dots clarity of an Quality measured in pixels, and per inch, or pixels per inch. image, RGB Color model that uses red, green, and blue as its primary colors. Ringing Artifacts around the of image subjects, caused by compressing or resizing an image. Distortion edges S Saturation in color. Higher color saturation results Purity more gray. a of (rendering intent) Saturation intent that maintains color saturation from one gamut to another. Best suited Rendering images in which the actual color represented for is important than the color’s vividness. less Selection surrounds an image that you define with a Portion tool. A marquee of a selection. ACDSee and ACD Photo Editor include selection selection tools. Sepia Sepia- toned images are composed of shades of brown. Many old photographs have a sepia tone. Sharpen The tool is for sharpening images. The original image is sharpen slightly. This blurred version of the image is subtracted from blurred the original image, revealing the edges in the original image. These edges can then be sharpened by increasing contrast. Sharpness You sharpness in an image is determined, primarily, by your digital camera's lens and sensor. The can also create the illusion of sharpness by increasing the contrast between edges within an image.

316 Shortcut Menu that appears you right- click within a program. Sometimes referred to as a context menu. Menu when Slideshow sequential of images. You can use slideshow software such as ACDSee to display slideshows Automated your images. of display Proofing Soft of Using as a proofing device. The monitor displays a simulation your how colors will appear when rendered by the computer's monitor printer. T Tagging like categories and ratings, Tagging, a great way to organize and group your photos without moving the files into different folders. is You tag a photo with one click. Similarly, you can display all tagged photos with one click. can Thumbnails Small of a full- sized image. preview Timestamp Date time associated with a file. and Transitions effects used between Special or video segments in slideshows, screensavers, and videos. images U Underexposed Images that are underexposed have too many shadows. Images typically become underexposed if you don't expose your digital camera's sensor to long enough. light V Vector Image objects. of objects rather than pixels. Mathematical equations define Image individual You can adjust the size of a vector consisting the and image image will retain its clarity and quality. the W Watermark usually or graphics added to an Background text to provide copyright protection. image, White Balance Removes color cast to create a photo that is correctly lit. You can use your camera settings to apply the correct white balance before balance taking or correct the white image, in ACDSee . an Whitepoint Lightest image area. You can control the intensity of the white in an image by adjusting its whitepoint. X- Z XML (Extensible Markup Language) Standard language for Web documents. Zoom

317 view In , zoom refers to the process of increasing or decreasing the display scale for an image. Increase the display scale to ACDSee a the portion an image or a specific image detail. Decrease of display scale to view more or all of the image.

318 Index

319 3 365 24 mode an account creating 251 253 folders creating folder public or private 253 making privacy settings 253 system 254 rating uploading images 24 A ACDSee database 119 photos 28 importing 14 user interface ACDSee Sync 38 Mobile acquiring importing 28 acquiring photos 28 Adjusting Clarity 248 archiving files 106 assigning categories and color labels 63 assigning categories ratings 60 and files ACDSee 307 associating with audio to images 145 adding to images 146 recording advance 141 auto B backing up database 127 tips and strategies 127- 128 batch editing about 111 exposure 115 flipping 112 renaming 117 resizing 114 rotating 112 black and white 240 blurring 242 border 177

320 brightness 232 160 Brush 101 Burn Basket C pane Calendar 43 Catalog pane customizing 266 cataloging ratings assigning 60 files 55 cataloging files 122 categories 60 assigning unassigned finding 91 images 59 managing CD creating 101 getting photos 34 discs Photo 149 setting CD/DVD management options 267 clarity 248 color changing color depth 240 color labels 63 scheme , 285 color 259 committing changes 152 images 53 comparing sheets contact creating 105 printing 111 converting databases 124 descript.ion files 125 images another file format 111 to to grayscale 240 copying files 74 images 75 Crayon Drawing effect 193 cropping 228

321 Crosshatch effect 193 customizing Calendar pane 266 266 pane Catalog 269 Database File List pane 260 File management 268 pane 265 Folders keyboard shortcuts 284 panes 18 moving Preview pane 264 279 toolbars mode 271 View D database about 119 information to adding 80 79- backing up 127 cataloging files 122 converting 124 descript.ion files 125 excluding folders 122 126 exporting 124 importing keywords 73 maintaining 129 drives 130 mapping 130 optimizing options 269 quarantining files 131 rebuilding thumbnails 130 restoring 129 tips and 127- 128 strategies date in multiple files 82 changing Dauber effect 194 descript.ion files 125 Details view 46 Details View options 264

322 digital camera photos 29 getting 29 plug- ins theme 259 , 285 display downloading a CD 34 photos from a digital camera 29 from photos photos in ACDSee 28 dual monitors moving panes 18 the Finder Duplicate 91 DVD creating 101 CD/DVD management options 267 setting E E icon 41 , 263 Edge Detect effect 195 Edit 157 Add Noise 247 Levels Auto 235 Blur 242 Border 177 Clarity 248 Balance 239 Color 228 Crop Flip 227 presets 158 Red Eye Reduction 171 Remove Noise 245 Repair tool 172 229 Resize Rotate 226 Selections 167 Sharpen 241 Text 173 , 175 Tone 235 Curve Vignette 182 Edit Brush 160 Edit mode 24

323 Edited State by 48 group editing noise adding 247 adding text 173 , 175 blurring 242 brightness 232 clarity 248 cloning 172 configuring editors 283 correcting and highlights 236 shadows cropping 228 235 exposure 227 flipping light levels 233 158 presets noise 245 removing removing red eye 171 repairing 172 resizing 229 values RGB 239 rotating 226 sharpen 241 special effects 185 tone 235 curve toolbars 279 effects about 185 Bathroom Window 185 Blinds 186 Blur 203 188 Bulge collage 191 Edges 191 Colored Contours 192 Crayon Drawing 193 Crosshatch 193 Dauber 194 Edge Detect 195 Emboss 196

324 Furry Edges 197 Edges 198 Glowing 199 golden hue 199 Granite Mirror 200 Negative 201 Oil Paint 201 202 Old Outline 203 Pencil Drawing 204 Explosion Pixel 205 Pixelate 206 206 Posterize Waves 208 Radial Rain 209 Ripple 210 Scattered 211 Tiles Sepia 211 Sheet Metal 213 Shift 213 Slant 214 Sobel 215 216 Solarize Glass 217 Stained Sunspot 218 Swirl 218 219 Threshold 220 Topography user defined 225 Vignette 182 Water 221 Water Drops 222 Waves 223 Weave 223 Wind 224 emailing images 93- 94 Emboss effect 196 excluding from database 122 folders EXIF adding EXIF information 79- 80

325 viewing 70 database information exporting 126 exposure automatically adjusting 235 adjusting for multiple images 115 F Favorites pane 45 List pane File customizing 260 filtering files 47 full 42 screen setting View options 264 Details File options 260 setting List thumbnail display options setting 262 using 39 views 46 files archiving 107 associating with ACDSee 307 cataloging 55 in the 122 cataloging database 82 dates changing and moving 74 copying details 46 finding 91 duplicates 126 listing management 268 options map coordinates 71 pasting 76 properties 69 131 quarantining renaming 76 replacing 76 selecting 50 sorting 49 synchronizing between folders 83 filtering files 47 flipping in Edit 227 multiple photos 112

326 folders browsing 42 from database excluding 122 76 pasting renaming 76 synchronizing files 83 View mode synchronizing in 148 pane Folders options 265 using 42 footer View in 142 mode printing pages 110 on mode fullscreen 21 Furry Edges effect 197 G getting photos renaming templates 34 Glowing Edges effect 198 Gradient 161 Granite effect 199 240 grayscale by Group Edited State 48 H header View mode in 142 printing on pages 110 Heal tool 172 hicolor 240 highlights 236 histogram 141 240 , folder home 259 HTML album 102 I Image Basket 55 Image Well 92 images adding audio 145 comparing 53

327 converting to format 111 another 75 copying downloading 28 94 93- emailing from video files 145 extracting finding quickly 91 29 import importing 28 panning 155 252 uploading viewing 21 import photos 29 importing images 28 importing database information 124 importing photos from a CD 34 from a digital camera 29 from a disk 34 IPTC adding information 79 IPTC IPTC auto categories 81 removing keywords 70 viewing J options 276 JPEG K keyboard shortcuts customizing 284 Manage mode 286 View 293 mode L labels assigning 63 Light EQ™ 236 light levels 233 listing 126 files local contrast enhancement 236 M magnifying glass 155

328 Manage mode Basket 101 Burn 279 customizing toolbars pane 45 Favorites File List pane 39 42 Folders pane Basket 55 Image keyboard shortcuts 286 pane 71 Map 259 options pane Properties 69 Quick Search bar 85 Search pane 86 Browsing Selective 88 pane using 16 views 46 Map pane using 71 Mirror effect 200 mobile sync 38 modes switching 16 mouse shortcuts 298 moving files 74 mode panes Manage 16 multiple images adjusting exposure 115 renaming 117 resizing 114 N navigator 155 Negative effect 201 noise about 245 adding to an image 247 removing an image 245 from O Oilpaint effect 201 Old effect 202

329 optimizing the 130 database options ACDSee 150 Quick View 266 pane Calendar pane 266 Catalog 111 contact sheet 269 database management 268 file Folders 265 general 258 mode 259 Manage pane Preview 264 mode View 271 organizing assigning categories 60 color labels 63 assigning images quickly 91 finding managing categories 59 originals showing 152 Orton effect 203 Outline effect 203 files overwriting 76 P panes auto- hiding 278 moving 17 resetting default layout 16 to PDF 100 Pencil Drawing effect 204 photo discs 149 Photo Repair 172 tool 191 photos PicaView 257 Pixel Explosion effect 205 pixel resize options 230 Pixelate effect 206 plug- ins about 131 managing 131

330 viewing properties 132 191 polaroid 206 Posterize effect pane Preview customizing 264 using 51 printing options contact sheet 111 size and positioning 109 setting on pages 110 text Properties pane 268 options 69 using Q quarantining files 131 R Waves effect Radial 208 Rain 209 effect ratings assigning 60 recording image audio 146 red eye reduction 171 removeable devices 29 renaming file folder 76 or multiple files 117 getting photos 34 while files 76 replacing resizing multiple images 114 one image 229 restoring database information 129 restoring originals 159 effect 199 retro RGB 239 Ripple effect 210 rotating in Edit 226 52 in and View mode Manage , 141 multiple photos 112

331 S Scattered effect 211 Tiles capture 92 screen screensavers 94 creating 98 sharing Search pane 86 searching patterns file name 88 duplicate files 91 for Image Well 92 Search Quick 85 bar setting Search options 259 Quick 88 wildcards ACDSee 84 with the Search pane with 86 second monitor moving the panes 18 selecting files 50 part of image 143 an tool Selections 167 Selective Browsing 88 Sepia effect 211 sharing 106 archives sheets 105 contact images emailing 94 93- HTML albums 102 PDFs 100 screensavers 98 slideshows 98 with ACDSee 92 sharpen 241 Sheet Metal effect 213 Shift 213 effect shortcuts Manage mode 286 mouse 298 View mode 293

332 Slant effect 214 slideshows auto advance 141 96 configuring sharing 98 Sobel effect 215 Solarize effect 216 sorting files 49 sound adding to images 145 recording 146 Glass effect 217 Stained folder start 259 default 218 Sunspot effect 218 effect Swirl switching modes 16 sync uploading 252 images sync to web 252 synchronizing files between folders 83 View mode to a folder 148 T tagging 78 images text adding an image 173 , 175 to to pages adding 110 (printing) displaying on images in View mode 142 lists of files 126 theme color , 285 259 Threshold 219 effect thumbnails rebuilding 130 setting display options 262 setting ratio options 263 views 46 timestamp 82

333 timestamps 82 279 toolbars 220 Topography effect 240 truecolor U 159 undo/redo USB mass storage device about 29 interface 14 user V files video extracting 145 frames View mode advance auto 141 automatic 153 zooming 271 customizing text 142 displaying fullscreen mode 21 141 , 240 histogram shortcuts keyboard 293 glass 155 magnifying shortcuts 298 mouse navigator 155 panning 155 setting display 272 options zoom 153 setting level to a folder 149 synchronizing using 21 zooming an image 152 viewing file properties 143 file types in the File List 47 fullscreen 21 images 21 images in another application 151 text on images in View mode 142 Vignette effect 182 W wallpaper 148 Water Drops effect 222

334 Water effect 221 effect 223 Waves Weave 223 effect White Balance 238 wildcards 88 Wind effect 224 Z zooming automatically 153 setting level 153

Related documents

CityNT2019TentRoll 1

CityNT2019TentRoll 1

STATE OF NEW YORK 2 0 1 9 T E N T A T I V E A S S E S S M E N T R O L L PAGE 1 VALUATION DATE-JUL 01, 2018 COUNTY - Niagara T A X A B L E SECTION OF THE ROLL - 1 CITY - North Tonawanda TAX MAP NUMBER ...

More info »
CRPT 116hrpt9 u2

CRPT 116hrpt9 u2

U:\2019CONF\HJRes31Front.xml APPRO. SEN. [COMMITTEE PRINT] REPORT { } CONGRESS 116TH 1st HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES Session 116- FURTHER APPROPRIATIONS FOR MAKING CONTINUING OF HOMELAND SECURITY FOR THE...

More info »
RIE Tenant List By Docket Number

RIE Tenant List By Docket Number

SCRIE TENANTS LIST ~ By Docket Number ~ Borough of Bronx SCRIE in the last year; it includes tenants that have a lease expiration date equal or who have received • This report displays information on ...

More info »
CalCOFI Atlas 33

CalCOFI Atlas 33

THE EARLY STAGES IN OF THE FISHES CALIFORNIA CURRENT REGION CALIFORNIA FISHERIES COOPERATIVE OCEANIC INVESTIGATIONS ATLAS NO. 33 BY THE SPONSORED STATES OF COMMERCE DEPARTMENT UNITED OCEANIC AND ATMOS...

More info »
MPI: A Message Passing Interface Standard

MPI: A Message Passing Interface Standard

MPI : A Message-Passing Interface Standard Version 3.0 Message Passing Interface Forum September 21, 2012

More info »
Current APD Policy Manual 2017 1.5 issued 7 20 2017

Current APD Policy Manual 2017 1.5 issued 7 20 2017

APD Issued 2017-1.5 Manual Policy 7/20/2017 Austin Police Department Policy Manual CHIEF'S MESSAGE I am proud to present the newest edition of the Austin Police Department Policy Manual. The Policy Ma...

More info »
untitled

untitled

G:\P\16\HR1\INTRO.XML ... (Original Signature of Member) TH 116 CONGRESS 1 ST S ESSION H. R. 1 To expand Americans’ access to the ballot box, reduce the influence of big money in politics, and strengt...

More info »
Fourth National Report on Human Exposure to Environmental Chemicals Update

Fourth National Report on Human Exposure to Environmental Chemicals Update

201 8 Fourth National Report on Human Exposure to Environmental Chemicals U pdated Tables, March 2018 , Volume One

More info »
Untitled

Untitled

Harmoniz ed vision 4 hedule of the United States (2019) Re Tariff Sc Annotated f poses ting Pur or Statistical Repor GN p .1 GENERAL R ATION ULES OF INTERPRET inciples: wing pr ollo y the f verned b i...

More info »
pisa 2012 results volume I

pisa 2012 results volume I

PISA 2012 Results: What Students Know and Can Do tICS, themA StuDent PeRfoRmAnCe In mA ReADIng AnD SCIenCe Volume I rogramme for ssessment A tudent S nternational I P

More info »
doj final opinion

doj final opinion

UNITED STAT ES DIS TRICT COURT IC F OR THE D ISTR T OF CO LU M BIA UNITED STAT F AMERICA, : ES O : : la in t if f, P 99 No. on cti l A vi Ci : 96 (GK) -24 : and : TOBACCO-F UND, : REE KIDS ACTION F : ...

More info »
PostScript Language Reference Manual

PostScript Language Reference Manual

See also cross-references: abcdefghijklmnopqrltuvw PLRM 2nd Edition July 27, 1992 ® PostScript Language Reference Manual SECOND EDITION Adobe Systems Incorporated Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, In...

More info »
UNSCEAR 2008 Report Vol.I

UNSCEAR 2008 Report Vol.I

This publication contains: VOLUME I: SOURCES SOURCES AND EFFECTS Report of the United Nations Scientific Committee on the Effects of Atomic Radiation to the General Assembly OF IONIZING RADIATION Scie...

More info »
Out of Reach 2018

Out of Reach 2018

2018 of OUT REACH THE HIGH COST OF HOUSING MADE POSSIBLE BY THE GENEROSITY OF:

More info »
H966v2

H966v2

GENERAL ASSEMBLY OF NORTH CAROLINA SESSION 2019 H 2 HOUSE BILL 966 Committee Substitute Favorable 4/30/19 2019 Appropriations Act. (Public) Short Title: Sponsors: Referred to: April 26, 2019 A BILL TO...

More info »
Out of Reach 2016

Out of Reach 2016

No Refuge for Low Income Renters MADE POSSIBLE BY THE GENEROSITY OF:

More info »
435 441 458 467r e

435 441 458 467r e

WT/DS435/R, WT/DS441/R WT/DS458/R, WT/DS467/R 28 June 2018 Page: (18 - 1/884 4061 ) Original: English AUSTRALIA CERTAIN MEASURES CON CERNING TRADEMARKS, – PACKAGING IONS AND OTHER PLAIN GEOGRAPHICAL I...

More info »